Loading...
1/*
2 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
3 *
4 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
5 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
6 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
7 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
8 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2018 Intel Corporation
10 *
11 * This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
12 * it under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
13 * published by the Free Software Foundation.
14 */
15
16#ifndef MAC80211_H
17#define MAC80211_H
18
19#include <linux/bug.h>
20#include <linux/kernel.h>
21#include <linux/if_ether.h>
22#include <linux/skbuff.h>
23#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
24#include <net/cfg80211.h>
25#include <net/codel.h>
26#include <asm/unaligned.h>
27
28/**
29 * DOC: Introduction
30 *
31 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
32 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
33 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
34 * drivers.
35 */
36
37/**
38 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
39 *
40 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
41 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
42 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
43 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
44 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
45 * tasklet function.
46 *
47 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
48 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
49 */
50
51/**
52 * DOC: Warning
53 *
54 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
55 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
56 */
57
58/**
59 * DOC: Frame format
60 *
61 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
62 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
63 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
64 * hardware.
65 *
66 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
67 *
68 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
69 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
70 *
71 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
72 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
73 */
74
75/**
76 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
77 *
78 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
79 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
80 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
81 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
82 *
83 * mac80211 will flushed the workqueue upon interface removal and during
84 * suspend.
85 *
86 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
87 *
88 */
89
90/**
91 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
92 *
93 * mac80211 provides an optional intermediate queueing implementation designed
94 * to allow the driver to keep hardware queues short and provide some fairness
95 * between different stations/interfaces.
96 * In this model, the driver pulls data frames from the mac80211 queue instead
97 * of letting mac80211 push them via drv_tx().
98 * Other frames (e.g. control or management) are still pushed using drv_tx().
99 *
100 * Drivers indicate that they use this model by implementing the .wake_tx_queue
101 * driver operation.
102 *
103 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with a
104 * single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
105 *
106 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
107 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
108 *
109 * The driver can't access the queue directly. To dequeue a frame, it calls
110 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it
111 * calls the .wake_tx_queue driver op.
112 *
113 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
114 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
115 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
116 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
117 * .release_buffered_frames().
118 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
119 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
120 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
121 */
122
123struct device;
124
125/**
126 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
127 *
128 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
129 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
130 */
131enum ieee80211_max_queues {
132 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
133 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
134};
135
136#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
137
138/**
139 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
140 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
141 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
142 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
143 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
144 */
145enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
146 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
147 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
148 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
149 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
150};
151
152/**
153 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
154 *
155 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
156 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
157 *
158 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
159 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
160 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
161 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
162 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
163 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
164 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
165 */
166struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
167 u16 txop;
168 u16 cw_min;
169 u16 cw_max;
170 u8 aifs;
171 bool acm;
172 bool uapsd;
173};
174
175struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
176 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
177 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
178 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
179 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
180};
181
182/**
183 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
184 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
185 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
186 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
187 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
188 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
189 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
190 */
191enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
192 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
193 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
194 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
195 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
196 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
197};
198
199/**
200 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
201 *
202 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
203 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
204 *
205 * @def: the channel definition
206 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
207 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
208 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
209 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
210 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
211 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
212 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
213 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
214 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
215 */
216struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
217 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
218 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
219
220 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
221
222 bool radar_enabled;
223
224 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
225};
226
227/**
228 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
229 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
230 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
231 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
232 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
233 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
234 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
235 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
236 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
237 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
238 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
239 * for changes/removal.)
240 */
241enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
242 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
243 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
244};
245
246/**
247 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
248 *
249 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
250 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
251 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
252 * done.
253 *
254 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
255 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
256 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
257 */
258struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
259 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
260 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
261 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
262};
263
264/**
265 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
266 *
267 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed() callback
268 * to indicate which BSS parameter changed.
269 *
270 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
271 * also implies a change in the AID.
272 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
273 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
274 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
275 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
276 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
277 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
278 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
279 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
280 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
281 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
282 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
283 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
284 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
285 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
286 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
287 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
288 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
289 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
290 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
291 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
292 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
293 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
294 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
295 * changed
296 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
297 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
298 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
299 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
300 * context had been assigned.
301 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
302 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
303 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
304 * keep alive) changed.
305 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
306 *
307 */
308enum ieee80211_bss_change {
309 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
310 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
311 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
312 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
313 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
314 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
315 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
316 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
317 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
318 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
319 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
320 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
321 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
322 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
323 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
324 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
325 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
326 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
327 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
328 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
329 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
330 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
331 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
332 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
333 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
334 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
335
336 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
337};
338
339/*
340 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
341 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
342 * filtering will be disabled.
343 */
344#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
345
346/**
347 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
348 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
349 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
350 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
351 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
352 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
353 * once each time the timeout triggers.
354 */
355enum ieee80211_event_type {
356 RSSI_EVENT,
357 MLME_EVENT,
358 BAR_RX_EVENT,
359 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
360};
361
362/**
363 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
364 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
365 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
366 */
367enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
368 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
369 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
370};
371
372/**
373 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
374 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
375 */
376struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
377 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
378};
379
380/**
381 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
382 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
383 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
384 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
385 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
386 */
387enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
388 AUTH_EVENT,
389 ASSOC_EVENT,
390 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
391 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
392};
393
394/**
395 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
396 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
397 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
398 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
399 */
400enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
401 MLME_SUCCESS,
402 MLME_DENIED,
403 MLME_TIMEOUT,
404};
405
406/**
407 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
408 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
409 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
410 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
411 */
412struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
413 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
414 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
415 u16 reason;
416};
417
418/**
419 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
420 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
421 * @tid: the tid
422 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
423 */
424struct ieee80211_ba_event {
425 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
426 u16 tid;
427 u16 ssn;
428};
429
430/**
431 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
432 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
433 * @rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
434 * @mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
435 * @ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
436 * @u:union holding the fields above
437 */
438struct ieee80211_event {
439 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
440 union {
441 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
442 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
443 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
444 } u;
445};
446
447/**
448 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
449 *
450 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
451 *
452 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
453 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
454 */
455struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
456 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
457 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
458};
459
460/**
461 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
462 *
463 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
464 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
465 *
466 * @assoc: association status
467 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS
468 * or not
469 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
470 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
471 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
472 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
473 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
474 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
475 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
476 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
477 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
478 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
479 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
480 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
481 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
482 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
483 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
484 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
485 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
486 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
487 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
488 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
489 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
490 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
491 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
492 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
493 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
494 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
495 * the current band.
496 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
497 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
498 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
499 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
500 * @chandef: Channel definition for this BSS -- the hardware might be
501 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
502 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
503 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
504 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
505 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
506 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
507 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
508 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
509 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
510 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
511 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
512 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
513 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
514 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
515 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
516 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
517 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
518 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
519 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
520 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
521 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
522 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
523 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
524 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
525 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
526 * your driver/device needs to do.
527 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
528 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
529 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
530 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
531 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
532 * @txpower: TX power in dBm
533 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
534 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
535 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
536 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
537 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
538 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
539 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
540 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
541 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
542 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
543 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
544 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
545 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
546 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
547 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
548 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
549 * station.
550 */
551struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
552 const u8 *bssid;
553 /* association related data */
554 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
555 bool ibss_creator;
556 u16 aid;
557 /* erp related data */
558 bool use_cts_prot;
559 bool use_short_preamble;
560 bool use_short_slot;
561 bool enable_beacon;
562 u8 dtim_period;
563 u16 beacon_int;
564 u16 assoc_capability;
565 u64 sync_tsf;
566 u32 sync_device_ts;
567 u8 sync_dtim_count;
568 u32 basic_rates;
569 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
570 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
571 u16 ht_operation_mode;
572 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
573 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
574 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
575 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
576 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
577 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
578 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
579 int arp_addr_cnt;
580 bool qos;
581 bool idle;
582 bool ps;
583 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
584 size_t ssid_len;
585 bool hidden_ssid;
586 int txpower;
587 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
588 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
589 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
590 u16 max_idle_period;
591 bool protected_keep_alive;
592};
593
594/**
595 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
596 *
597 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
598 *
599 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
600 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
601 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
602 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
603 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
604 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
605 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
606 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
607 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
608 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
609 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
610 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
611 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
612 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
613 * station
614 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
615 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
616 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
617 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
618 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
619 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
620 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
621 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
622 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
623 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
624 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
625 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
626 * hardware queue.
627 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
628 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
629 * is for the whole aggregation.
630 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
631 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
632 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
633 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
634 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
635 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
636 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
637 * off-channel operation.
638 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
639 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
640 * it can be sent out.
641 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
642 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
643 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
644 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
645 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
646 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
647 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
648 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
649 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
650 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
651 * queue gets full.
652 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
653 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
654 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
655 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
656 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
657 * should kick the MLME state machine.
658 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
659 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
660 * status to user space)
661 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
662 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
663 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
664 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
665 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
666 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
667 * handled properly by the device.
668 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
669 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
670 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
671 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
672 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
673 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
674 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
675 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
676 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
677 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
678 * PS-Poll responses.
679 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
680 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
681 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
682 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
683 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
684 * monitor injection).
685 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
686 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
687 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
688 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
689 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
690 *
691 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
692 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
693 */
694enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
695 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
696 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
697 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
698 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
699 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
700 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
701 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
702 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
703 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
704 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
705 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
706 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
707 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
708 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
709 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(14),
710 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
711 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
712 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
713 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
714 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
715 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
716 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
717 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
718 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
719 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
720 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
721 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
722 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
723 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
724 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
725 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
726};
727
728#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
729
730/**
731 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
732 *
733 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
734 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
735 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
736 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
737 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
738 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
739 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
740 *
741 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
742 */
743enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
744 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
745 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
746 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
747 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
748 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
749};
750
751/*
752 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
753 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
754 */
755#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
756 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
757 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
758 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
759 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
760 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
761 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
762 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
763
764/**
765 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
766 * Rate Control algorithm.
767 *
768 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
769 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
770 *
771 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
772 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
773 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
774 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
775 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
776 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
777 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
778 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
779 * Greenfield mode.
780 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
781 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
782 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
783 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
784 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
785 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
786 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
787 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
788 */
789enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
790 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
791 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
792 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
793
794 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
795 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
796 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
797 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
798 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
799 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
800 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
801 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
802 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
803};
804
805
806/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
807#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
808
809/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
810#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
811
812/* maximum number of rate stages */
813#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
814
815/* maximum number of rate table entries */
816#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
817
818/**
819 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
820 *
821 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
822 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
823 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
824 *
825 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
826 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
827 *
828 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
829 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
830 *
831 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
832 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
833 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
834 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
835 * information::
836 *
837 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
838 *
839 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
840 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
841 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
842 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
843 * information should then contain::
844 *
845 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
846 *
847 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
848 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
849 */
850struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
851 s8 idx;
852 u16 count:5,
853 flags:11;
854} __packed;
855
856#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
857
858static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
859 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
860{
861 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
862 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
863 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
864}
865
866static inline u8
867ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
868{
869 return rate->idx & 0xF;
870}
871
872static inline u8
873ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
874{
875 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
876}
877
878/**
879 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
880 *
881 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
882 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
883 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
884 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
885 *
886 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
887 * @band: the band to transmit on (use for checking for races)
888 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
889 * @ack_frame_id: internal frame ID for TX status, used internally
890 * @control: union for control data
891 * @status: union for status data
892 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
893 * @ampdu_ack_len: number of acked aggregated frames.
894 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
895 * @ampdu_len: number of aggregated frames.
896 * relevant only if IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU was set.
897 * @ack_signal: signal strength of the ACK frame
898 */
899struct ieee80211_tx_info {
900 /* common information */
901 u32 flags;
902 u8 band;
903
904 u8 hw_queue;
905
906 u16 ack_frame_id;
907
908 union {
909 struct {
910 union {
911 /* rate control */
912 struct {
913 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
914 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
915 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
916 u8 use_rts:1;
917 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
918 u8 short_preamble:1;
919 u8 skip_table:1;
920 /* 2 bytes free */
921 };
922 /* only needed before rate control */
923 unsigned long jiffies;
924 };
925 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
926 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
927 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
928 u32 flags;
929 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
930 } control;
931 struct {
932 u64 cookie;
933 } ack;
934 struct {
935 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
936 s32 ack_signal;
937 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
938 u8 ampdu_len;
939 u8 antenna;
940 u16 tx_time;
941 bool is_valid_ack_signal;
942 void *status_driver_data[19 / sizeof(void *)];
943 } status;
944 struct {
945 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
946 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
947 u8 pad[4];
948
949 void *rate_driver_data[
950 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
951 };
952 void *driver_data[
953 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
954 };
955};
956
957/**
958 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx staus info for rate control
959 *
960 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
961 * @info: Basic tx status information
962 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
963 */
964struct ieee80211_tx_status {
965 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
966 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
967 struct sk_buff *skb;
968};
969
970/**
971 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
972 *
973 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
974 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
975 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
976 *
977 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
978 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
979 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
980 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
981 */
982struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
983 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
984 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
985 const u8 *common_ies;
986 size_t common_ie_len;
987};
988
989
990static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
991{
992 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
993}
994
995static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
996{
997 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
998}
999
1000/**
1001 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1002 *
1003 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1004 *
1005 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1006 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1007 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1008 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1009 *
1010 * NOTE: You can only use this function if you do NOT use
1011 * info->driver_data! Use info->rate_driver_data
1012 * instead if you need only the less space that allows.
1013 */
1014static inline void
1015ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1016{
1017 int i;
1018
1019 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1020 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1021 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1022 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1023 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1024 /* clear the rate counts */
1025 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1026 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1027
1028 BUILD_BUG_ON(
1029 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ack_signal) != 20);
1030 memset(&info->status.ampdu_ack_len, 0,
1031 sizeof(struct ieee80211_tx_info) -
1032 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.ampdu_ack_len));
1033}
1034
1035
1036/**
1037 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1038 *
1039 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1040 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1041 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1042 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1043 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1044 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1045 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1046 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1047 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1048 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1049 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1050 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1051 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1052 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1053 * de-duplication by itself.
1054 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1055 * the frame.
1056 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1057 * the frame.
1058 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1059 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1060 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1061 * merging.
1062 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1063 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1064 * (including FCS) was received.
1065 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1066 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1067 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1068 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1069 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1070 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1071 * each A-MPDU
1072 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1073 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1074 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1075 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1076 * on this subframe
1077 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1078 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1079 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1080 * done by the hardware
1081 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1082 * processing it in any regular way.
1083 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1084 * them for sniffing purposes.
1085 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1086 * monitor interfaces.
1087 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1088 * them for sniffing purposes.
1089 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1090 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1091 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1092 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1093 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1094 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1095 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1096 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1097 * interleaved with other frames.
1098 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA: This frame contains vendor-specific
1099 * radiotap data in the skb->data (before the frame) as described by
1100 * the &struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap.
1101 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1102 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1103 * the first subframe.
1104 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1105 * be done in the hardware.
1106 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1107 * frame
1108 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1109 */
1110enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1111 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1112 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1113 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = BIT(2),
1114 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1115 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1116 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1117 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1118 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = BIT(7),
1119 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1120 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1121 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1122 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1123 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1124 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1125 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1126 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1127 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = BIT(16),
1128 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(17),
1129 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1130 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1131 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_VENDOR_DATA = BIT(20),
1132 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1133 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1134 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1135 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1136 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1137};
1138
1139/**
1140 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1141 *
1142 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1143 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1144 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1145 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1146 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1147 * to hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact
1148 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1149 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1150 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1151 */
1152enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1153 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1154 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1155 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1156 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1157 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1158 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1159};
1160
1161#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1162
1163enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1164 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1165 RX_ENC_HT,
1166 RX_ENC_VHT,
1167};
1168
1169/**
1170 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1171 *
1172 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1173 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1174 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1175 *
1176 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1177 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1178 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1179 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1180 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1181 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1182 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1183 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1184 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1185 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1186 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1187 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1188 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1189 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1190 * values were filled.
1191 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1192 * support dB or unspecified units)
1193 * @antenna: antenna used
1194 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1195 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1196 * @nss: number of streams (VHT and HE only)
1197 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1198 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1199 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1200 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1201 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1202 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1203 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1204 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1205 */
1206struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1207 u64 mactime;
1208 u64 boottime_ns;
1209 u32 device_timestamp;
1210 u32 ampdu_reference;
1211 u32 flag;
1212 u16 freq;
1213 u8 enc_flags;
1214 u8 encoding:2, bw:3;
1215 u8 rate_idx;
1216 u8 nss;
1217 u8 rx_flags;
1218 u8 band;
1219 u8 antenna;
1220 s8 signal;
1221 u8 chains;
1222 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1223 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1224};
1225
1226/**
1227 * struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap - vendor radiotap data information
1228 * @present: presence bitmap for this vendor namespace
1229 * (this could be extended in the future if any vendor needs more
1230 * bits, the radiotap spec does allow for that)
1231 * @align: radiotap vendor namespace alignment. This defines the needed
1232 * alignment for the @data field below, not for the vendor namespace
1233 * description itself (which has a fixed 2-byte alignment)
1234 * Must be a power of two, and be set to at least 1!
1235 * @oui: radiotap vendor namespace OUI
1236 * @subns: radiotap vendor sub namespace
1237 * @len: radiotap vendor sub namespace skip length, if alignment is done
1238 * then that's added to this, i.e. this is only the length of the
1239 * @data field.
1240 * @pad: number of bytes of padding after the @data, this exists so that
1241 * the skb data alignment can be preserved even if the data has odd
1242 * length
1243 * @data: the actual vendor namespace data
1244 *
1245 * This struct, including the vendor data, goes into the skb->data before
1246 * the 802.11 header. It's split up in mac80211 using the align/oui/subns
1247 * data.
1248 */
1249struct ieee80211_vendor_radiotap {
1250 u32 present;
1251 u8 align;
1252 u8 oui[3];
1253 u8 subns;
1254 u8 pad;
1255 u16 len;
1256 u8 data[];
1257} __packed;
1258
1259/**
1260 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1261 *
1262 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1263 *
1264 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1265 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1266 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1267 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1268 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1269 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1270 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1271 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1272 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1273 * for more.
1274 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1275 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1276 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1277 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1278 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1279 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1280 * operating channel.
1281 */
1282enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1283 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1284 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1285 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1286 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1287};
1288
1289
1290/**
1291 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1292 *
1293 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1294 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1295 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1296 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1297 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1298 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1299 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1300 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1301 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1302 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1303 */
1304enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1305 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1306 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1307 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1308 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1309 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1310 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1311 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1312 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1313};
1314
1315/**
1316 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1317 *
1318 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1319 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1320 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1321 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1322 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1323 */
1324enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1325 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1326 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1327 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1328 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1329
1330 /* keep last */
1331 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1332};
1333
1334/**
1335 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1336 *
1337 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1338 *
1339 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1340 *
1341 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1342 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1343 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1344 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1345 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1346 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1347 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1348 *
1349 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1350 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1351 *
1352 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1353 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1354 *
1355 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1356 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1357 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1358 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1359 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1360 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1361 *
1362 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1363 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1364 * configured for an HT channel.
1365 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1366 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1367 */
1368struct ieee80211_conf {
1369 u32 flags;
1370 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1371
1372 u16 listen_interval;
1373 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1374
1375 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1376
1377 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1378 bool radar_enabled;
1379 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1380};
1381
1382/**
1383 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1384 *
1385 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1386 * operation.
1387 *
1388 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1389 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1390 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1391 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1392 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1393 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1394 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1395 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1396 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1397 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1398 */
1399struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1400 u64 timestamp;
1401 u32 device_timestamp;
1402 bool block_tx;
1403 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1404 u8 count;
1405};
1406
1407/**
1408 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1409 *
1410 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1411 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1412 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1413 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1414 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1415 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1416 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1417 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1418 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1419 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1420 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1421 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1422 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1423 */
1424enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1425 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1426 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1427 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1428 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1429};
1430
1431/**
1432 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1433 *
1434 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1435 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1436 *
1437 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1438 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1439 * or the BSS we're associated to
1440 * @addr: address of this interface
1441 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1442 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1443 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on. Internally it is
1444 * write-protected by sdata_lock and local->mtx so holding either is fine
1445 * for read access.
1446 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
1447 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1448 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1449 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1450 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1451 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1452 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1453 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
1454 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
1455 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
1456 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
1457 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
1458 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1459 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1460 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1461 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1462 * interface.
1463 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1464 * sizeof(void \*).
1465 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1466 */
1467struct ieee80211_vif {
1468 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1469 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1470 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1471 bool p2p;
1472 bool csa_active;
1473 bool mu_mimo_owner;
1474
1475 u8 cab_queue;
1476 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1477
1478 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1479
1480 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
1481
1482 u32 driver_flags;
1483
1484#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1485 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1486#endif
1487
1488 unsigned int probe_req_reg;
1489
1490 /* must be last */
1491 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1492};
1493
1494static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
1495{
1496#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
1497 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
1498#endif
1499 return false;
1500}
1501
1502/**
1503 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
1504 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
1505 *
1506 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1507 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
1508 *
1509 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1510 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1511 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1512 */
1513struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
1514
1515/**
1516 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
1517 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
1518 *
1519 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
1520 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
1521 *
1522 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
1523 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
1524 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
1525 */
1526struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
1527
1528/**
1529 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
1530 *
1531 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
1532 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
1533 *
1534 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
1535 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
1536 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
1537 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
1538 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
1539 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
1540 * generation in software.
1541 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
1542 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
1543 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
1544 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
1545 * (MFP) to be done in software.
1546 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
1547 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
1548 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
1549 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
1550 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
1551 * MIC.
1552 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
1553 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
1554 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
1555 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
1556 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
1557 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
1558 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
1559 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
1560 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
1561 * only for managment frames (MFP).
1562 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
1563 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
1564 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
1565 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
1566 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
1567 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
1568 */
1569enum ieee80211_key_flags {
1570 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
1571 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
1572 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
1573 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
1574 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
1575 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
1576 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
1577 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
1578 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
1579};
1580
1581/**
1582 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
1583 *
1584 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
1585 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
1586 *
1587 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
1588 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
1589 * encrypted in hardware.
1590 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
1591 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
1592 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
1593 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
1594 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
1595 * @keylen: key material length
1596 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
1597 * data block:
1598 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
1599 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
1600 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
1601 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
1602 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
1603 */
1604struct ieee80211_key_conf {
1605 atomic64_t tx_pn;
1606 u32 cipher;
1607 u8 icv_len;
1608 u8 iv_len;
1609 u8 hw_key_idx;
1610 s8 keyidx;
1611 u16 flags;
1612 u8 keylen;
1613 u8 key[0];
1614};
1615
1616#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
1617
1618#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
1619#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
1620
1621/**
1622 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
1623 *
1624 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
1625 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1626 * reverse order than in packet)
1627 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1628 * reverse order than in packet)
1629 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1630 * reverse order than in packet)
1631 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
1632 * reverse order than in packet)
1633 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
1634 */
1635struct ieee80211_key_seq {
1636 union {
1637 struct {
1638 u32 iv32;
1639 u16 iv16;
1640 } tkip;
1641 struct {
1642 u8 pn[6];
1643 } ccmp;
1644 struct {
1645 u8 pn[6];
1646 } aes_cmac;
1647 struct {
1648 u8 pn[6];
1649 } aes_gmac;
1650 struct {
1651 u8 pn[6];
1652 } gcmp;
1653 struct {
1654 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
1655 u8 seq_len;
1656 } hw;
1657 };
1658};
1659
1660/**
1661 * struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme - cipher scheme
1662 *
1663 * This structure contains a cipher scheme information defining
1664 * the secure packet crypto handling.
1665 *
1666 * @cipher: a cipher suite selector
1667 * @iftype: a cipher iftype bit mask indicating an allowed cipher usage
1668 * @hdr_len: a length of a security header used the cipher
1669 * @pn_len: a length of a packet number in the security header
1670 * @pn_off: an offset of pn from the beginning of the security header
1671 * @key_idx_off: an offset of key index byte in the security header
1672 * @key_idx_mask: a bit mask of key_idx bits
1673 * @key_idx_shift: a bit shift needed to get key_idx
1674 * key_idx value calculation:
1675 * (sec_header_base[key_idx_off] & key_idx_mask) >> key_idx_shift
1676 * @mic_len: a mic length in bytes
1677 */
1678struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme {
1679 u32 cipher;
1680 u16 iftype;
1681 u8 hdr_len;
1682 u8 pn_len;
1683 u8 pn_off;
1684 u8 key_idx_off;
1685 u8 key_idx_mask;
1686 u8 key_idx_shift;
1687 u8 mic_len;
1688};
1689
1690/**
1691 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
1692 *
1693 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1694 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
1695 *
1696 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
1697 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
1698 */
1699enum set_key_cmd {
1700 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
1701};
1702
1703/**
1704 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
1705 *
1706 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
1707 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
1708 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
1709 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
1710 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
1711 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
1712 */
1713enum ieee80211_sta_state {
1714 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
1715 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
1716 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
1717 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
1718 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
1719 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
1720};
1721
1722/**
1723 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
1724 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
1725 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
1726 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
1727 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
1728 * (including 80+80 MHz)
1729 *
1730 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
1731 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
1732 */
1733enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
1734 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
1735 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
1736 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
1737 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
1738};
1739
1740/**
1741 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
1742 *
1743 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
1744 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
1745 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
1746 */
1747struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
1748 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
1749 struct {
1750 s8 idx;
1751 u8 count;
1752 u8 count_cts;
1753 u8 count_rts;
1754 u16 flags;
1755 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
1756};
1757
1758/**
1759 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
1760 *
1761 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
1762 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
1763 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
1764 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
1765 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
1766 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
1767 *
1768 * @addr: MAC address
1769 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
1770 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates (per band)
1771 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1772 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
1773 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
1774 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
1775 * Can be modified by driver.
1776 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
1777 * otherwise always false)
1778 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1779 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
1780 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
1781 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
1782 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
1783 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
1784 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
1785 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
1786 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
1787 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
1788 * the station moves to associated state.
1789 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
1790 * @rates: rate control selection table
1791 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
1792 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
1793 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
1794 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
1795 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
1796 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
1797 * unlimited.
1798 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
1799 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
1800 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues (if driver uses the TXQ abstraction)
1801 */
1802struct ieee80211_sta {
1803 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1804 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
1805 u16 aid;
1806 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
1807 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
1808 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
1809 bool wme;
1810 u8 uapsd_queues;
1811 u8 max_sp;
1812 u8 rx_nss;
1813 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
1814 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1815 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
1816 bool tdls;
1817 bool tdls_initiator;
1818 bool mfp;
1819 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
1820
1821 /**
1822 * @max_amsdu_len:
1823 * indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
1824 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
1825 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
1826 *
1827 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
1828 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
1829 * * If the skb is not part of a BA aggreement, the A-MSDU maximal
1830 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
1831 *
1832 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
1833 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
1834 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
1835 */
1836 u16 max_amsdu_len;
1837 bool support_p2p_ps;
1838 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
1839
1840 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
1841
1842 /* must be last */
1843 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1844};
1845
1846/**
1847 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
1848 *
1849 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
1850 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
1851 *
1852 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
1853 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
1854 */
1855enum sta_notify_cmd {
1856 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
1857};
1858
1859/**
1860 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
1861 *
1862 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
1863 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
1864 */
1865struct ieee80211_tx_control {
1866 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1867};
1868
1869/**
1870 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
1871 *
1872 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
1873 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
1874 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue)
1875 * @ac: the AC for this queue
1876 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
1877 *
1878 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
1879 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
1880 */
1881struct ieee80211_txq {
1882 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1883 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1884 u8 tid;
1885 u8 ac;
1886
1887 /* must be last */
1888 u8 drv_priv[0] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1889};
1890
1891/**
1892 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
1893 *
1894 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
1895 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
1896 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
1897 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
1898 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
1899 *
1900 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
1901 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
1902 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
1903 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
1904 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
1905 * algorithm.
1906 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
1907 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
1908 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
1909 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
1910 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
1911 * CCK frames.
1912 *
1913 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
1914 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
1915 * the FCS at the end.
1916 *
1917 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
1918 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
1919 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
1920 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
1921 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
1922 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
1923 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
1924 *
1925 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
1926 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
1927 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
1928 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
1929 *
1930 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
1931 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
1932 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
1933 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
1934 *
1935 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
1936 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
1937 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
1938 *
1939 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
1940 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
1941 *
1942 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
1943 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
1944 *
1945 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
1946 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
1947 * stack support for dynamic PS.
1948 *
1949 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
1950 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
1951 *
1952 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
1953 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
1954 *
1955 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
1956 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
1957 * the stack.
1958 *
1959 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
1960 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
1961 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
1962 *
1963 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
1964 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
1965 * dtim_period).
1966 *
1967 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
1968 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
1969 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
1970 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
1971 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
1972 * only in that case.
1973 *
1974 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
1975 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
1976 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
1977 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
1978 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
1979 * the PS mode of connected stations.
1980 *
1981 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
1982 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
1983 * software.
1984 *
1985 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
1986 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
1987 * active interfaces.
1988 *
1989 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
1990 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
1991 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
1992 *
1993 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
1994 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
1995 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
1996 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
1997 * supported cipher suites.
1998 *
1999 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2000 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2001 * for frames.
2002 *
2003 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2004 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2005 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2006 * control for more details.
2007 *
2008 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2009 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2010 *
2011 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2012 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2013 * is supported.
2014 *
2015 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2016 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2017 *
2018 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2019 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2020 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2021 *
2022 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2023 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2024 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2025 * CSA frame.
2026 *
2027 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2028 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2029 *
2030 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2031 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2032 *
2033 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2034 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2035 *
2036 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2037 * within A-MPDU.
2038 *
2039 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2040 * for sent beacons.
2041 *
2042 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2043 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2044 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2045 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2046 *
2047 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2048 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2049 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2050 * timeout.
2051 *
2052 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2053 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2054 *
2055 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2056 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2057 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2058 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2059 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2060 *
2061 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2062 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2063 *
2064 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2065 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2066 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2067 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2068 *
2069 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2070 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2071 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2072 *
2073 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2074 * TDLS links.
2075 *
2076 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2077 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2078 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2079 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2080 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2081 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2082 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2083 *
2084 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2085 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2086 *
2087 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2088 */
2089enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2090 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2091 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2092 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2093 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2094 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2095 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2096 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2097 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2098 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2099 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2100 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2101 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2102 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2103 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2104 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2105 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2106 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2107 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2108 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2109 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2110 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2111 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2112 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2113 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2114 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2115 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2116 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2117 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2118 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2119 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2120 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2121 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2122 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2123 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2124 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2125 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2126 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2127 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2128 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2129 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2130 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2131 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2132
2133 /* keep last, obviously */
2134 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2135};
2136
2137/**
2138 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2139 *
2140 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2141 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2142 *
2143 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2144 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2145 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2146 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2147 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2148 *
2149 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2150 *
2151 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2152 * along with this structure.
2153 *
2154 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2155 *
2156 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2157 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2158 *
2159 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2160 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2161 *
2162 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2163 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2164 *
2165 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2166 * that HW supports
2167 *
2168 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2169 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2170 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2171 *
2172 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2173 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2174 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2175 *
2176 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2177 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2178 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2179 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2180 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2181 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2182 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2183 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2184 *
2185 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2186 * can handle.
2187 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2188 * the hw can report back.
2189 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2190 *
2191 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2192 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2193 * aggregation.
2194 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2195 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2196 * it shouldn't be set.
2197 *
2198 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2199 * aggregate an HT driver will transmit. Though ADDBA will advertise
2200 * a constant value of 64 as some older APs can crash if the window
2201 * size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N with FW v1.0.07
2202 * build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2203 *
2204 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2205 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2206 *
2207 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2208 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2209 *
2210 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2211 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2212 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2213 * adding _BW is supported today.
2214 *
2215 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2216 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2217 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2218 *
2219 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2220 * 'units_pos' member is set to a non-negative value it must be set to
2221 * a combination of a IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2222 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value, and then the timestamp
2223 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2224 * device_timestamp. If the 'accuracy' member is non-negative, it's put
2225 * into the accuracy radiotap field and the accuracy known flag is set.
2226 *
2227 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2228 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2229 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2230 *
2231 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2232 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2233 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2234 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2235 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2236 * neither enabled.
2237 *
2238 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2239 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2240 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2241 *
2242 * @n_cipher_schemes: a size of an array of cipher schemes definitions.
2243 * @cipher_schemes: a pointer to an array of cipher scheme definitions
2244 * supported by HW.
2245 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2246 * device.
2247 */
2248struct ieee80211_hw {
2249 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2250 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2251 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2252 void *priv;
2253 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2254 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2255 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2256 int vif_data_size;
2257 int sta_data_size;
2258 int chanctx_data_size;
2259 int txq_data_size;
2260 u16 queues;
2261 u16 max_listen_interval;
2262 s8 max_signal;
2263 u8 max_rates;
2264 u8 max_report_rates;
2265 u8 max_rate_tries;
2266 u8 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2267 u8 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2268 u8 max_tx_fragments;
2269 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
2270 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
2271 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
2272 struct {
2273 int units_pos;
2274 s16 accuracy;
2275 } radiotap_timestamp;
2276 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
2277 u8 uapsd_queues;
2278 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
2279 u8 n_cipher_schemes;
2280 const struct ieee80211_cipher_scheme *cipher_schemes;
2281 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
2282};
2283
2284static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2285 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2286{
2287 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2288}
2289#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2290
2291static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2292 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
2293{
2294 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
2295}
2296#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
2297
2298/**
2299 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
2300 *
2301 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
2302 * @req: cfg80211 request.
2303 */
2304struct ieee80211_scan_request {
2305 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
2306
2307 /* Keep last */
2308 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
2309};
2310
2311/**
2312 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
2313 *
2314 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
2315 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
2316 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
2317 * @status: channel-switch response status
2318 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
2319 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2320 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
2321 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
2322 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
2323 */
2324struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
2325 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2326 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
2327 u8 action_code;
2328 u32 status;
2329 u32 timestamp;
2330 u16 switch_time;
2331 u16 switch_timeout;
2332 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
2333 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
2334};
2335
2336/**
2337 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
2338 *
2339 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
2340 *
2341 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
2342 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
2343 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
2344 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
2345 * is already used internally by mac80211.
2346 *
2347 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
2348 */
2349struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
2350
2351/**
2352 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
2353 *
2354 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
2355 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
2356 */
2357static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
2358{
2359 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
2360}
2361
2362/**
2363 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
2364 *
2365 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
2366 * @addr: the address to set
2367 */
2368static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
2369{
2370 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
2371}
2372
2373static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2374ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2375 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2376{
2377 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
2378 return NULL;
2379 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
2380}
2381
2382static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2383ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2384 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
2385{
2386 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
2387 return NULL;
2388 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
2389}
2390
2391static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
2392ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
2393 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
2394{
2395 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
2396 return NULL;
2397 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
2398}
2399
2400/**
2401 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
2402 * @hw: the hardware
2403 * @skb: the skb
2404 *
2405 * Free a transmit skb. Use this funtion when some failure
2406 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
2407 */
2408void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
2409
2410/**
2411 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
2412 *
2413 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
2414 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
2415 *
2416 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
2417 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
2418 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
2419 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
2420 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
2421 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
2422 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
2423 *
2424 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
2425 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
2426 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
2427 *
2428 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
2429 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
2430 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
2431 * hardware key index, you are free to use the full u8 range.
2432 *
2433 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
2434 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
2435 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
2436 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
2437 *
2438 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
2439 *
2440 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
2441 * for it has been uploaded to hardware, the stack will not make any
2442 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
2443 * based on the receive flags.
2444 *
2445 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
2446 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
2447 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
2448 * keys.
2449 *
2450 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
2451 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
2452 * handler.
2453 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
2454 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
2455 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
2456 * rekeying), it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
2457 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
2458 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
2459 *
2460 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
2461 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
2462 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
2463 */
2464
2465/**
2466 * DOC: Powersave support
2467 *
2468 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
2469 *
2470 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself,
2471 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
2472 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
2473 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
2474 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
2475 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
2476 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
2477 * it finds traffic directed to it.
2478 *
2479 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
2480 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
2481 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
2482 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
2483 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
2484 *
2485 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
2486 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
2487 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
2488 *
2489 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
2490 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
2491 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
2492 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
2493 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
2494 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
2495 * as best as it can, mac80211 is too slow to do that.
2496 *
2497 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
2498 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
2499 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
2500 * the next wakeup. It's compromise of getting good enough latency when
2501 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
2502 * periods.
2503 *
2504 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
2505 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
2506 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
2507 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
2508 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
2509 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
2510 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
2511 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
2512 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
2513 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
2514 *
2515 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
2516 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
2517 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
2518 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
2519 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
2520 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
2521 *
2522 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
2523 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
2524 */
2525
2526/**
2527 * DOC: Beacon filter support
2528 *
2529 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
2530 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
2531 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
2532 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
2533 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
2534 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
2535 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
2536 *
2537 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
2538 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
2539 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
2540 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
2541 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
2542 *
2543 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
2544 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
2545 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
2546 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
2547 *
2548 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
2549 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
2550 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
2551 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
2552 *
2553 * - a list of information element IDs
2554 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
2555 *
2556 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
2557 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
2558 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
2559 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
2560 * vendor information elements.
2561 *
2562 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
2563 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
2564 *
2565 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead, just make sure nothing
2566 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
2567 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
2568 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
2569 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
2570 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
2571 *
2572 *
2573 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
2574 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
2575 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
2576 * the received data packets). This can consist in notifying the host when
2577 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
2578 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
2579 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
2580 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
2581 *
2582 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
2583 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
2584 * signal strength threshold checking.
2585 */
2586
2587/**
2588 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
2589 *
2590 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
2591 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
2592 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
2593 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
2594 *
2595 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
2596 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
2597 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
2598 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
2599 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
2600 * hardware flags.
2601 *
2602 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
2603 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
2604 * turned off otherwise.
2605 *
2606 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
2607 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
2608 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
2609 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
2610 */
2611
2612/**
2613 * DOC: Frame filtering
2614 *
2615 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
2616 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
2617 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
2618 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
2619 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
2620 *
2621 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
2622 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
2623 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
2624 *
2625 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
2626 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
2627 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
2628 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
2629 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
2630 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
2631 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
2632 *
2633 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
2634 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
2635 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
2636 * or dropped.
2637 *
2638 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
2639 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
2640 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
2641 * the flag, but not clear it.
2642 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
2643 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
2644 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
2645 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
2646 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
2647 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
2648 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
2649 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
2650 */
2651
2652/**
2653 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
2654 *
2655 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
2656 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
2657 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
2658 *
2659 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
2660 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
2661 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
2662 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
2663 * the driver code.
2664 *
2665 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
2666 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
2667 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
2668 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
2669 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
2670 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
2671 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
2672 *
2673 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
2674 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
2675 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
2676 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
2677 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
2678 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
2679 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
2680 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
2681 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
2682 * @sta_notify callback.
2683 *
2684 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
2685 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
2686 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
2687 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
2688 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
2689 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
2690 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
2691 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
2692 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
2693 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
2694 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
2695 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
2696 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
2697 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
2698 *
2699 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
2700 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
2701 *
2702 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
2703 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
2704 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
2705 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
2706 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
2707 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
2708 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
2709 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
2710 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
2711 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
2712 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
2713 *
2714 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
2715 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
2716 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
2717 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
2718 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
2719 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
2720 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
2721 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
2722 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
2723 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames,
2724 * to help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
2725 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
2726 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
2727 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
2728 *
2729 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
2730 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
2731 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
2732 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
2733 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
2734 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
2735 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
2736 *
2737 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
2738 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
2739 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
2740 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
2741 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
2742 *
2743 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
2744 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
2745 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
2746 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
2747 */
2748
2749/**
2750 * DOC: HW queue control
2751 *
2752 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
2753 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
2754 * was problematic for a few reasons:
2755 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
2756 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
2757 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
2758 *
2759 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
2760 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
2761 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
2762 *
2763 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
2764 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
2765 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
2766 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
2767 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
2768 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
2769 * the hardware queue.
2770 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
2771 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
2772 *
2773 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed, multiple virtual
2774 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
2775 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
2776 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
2777 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
2778 *
2779 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
2780 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
2781 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
2782 * off-channel queue: 9
2783 *
2784 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
2785 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
2786 *
2787 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
2788 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
2789 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
2790 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
2791 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
2792 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2793 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
2794 *
2795 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
2796 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
2797 *
2798 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
2799 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
2800 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
2801 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
2802 */
2803
2804/**
2805 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
2806 *
2807 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
2808 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
2809 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
2810 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
2811 *
2812 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
2813 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
2814 * multicast address.
2815 *
2816 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
2817 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
2818 *
2819 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
2820 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
2821 *
2822 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
2823 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
2824 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
2825 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
2826 * honour this flag if possible.
2827 *
2828 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
2829 * station
2830 *
2831 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
2832 *
2833 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
2834 *
2835 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
2836 */
2837enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
2838 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
2839 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
2840 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
2841 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
2842 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
2843 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
2844 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
2845 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
2846};
2847
2848/**
2849 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
2850 *
2851 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
2852 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
2853 *
2854 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
2855 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
2856 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
2857 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
2858 *
2859 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
2860 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
2861 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation
2862 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
2863 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
2864 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
2865 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
2866 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
2867 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
2868 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
2869 * session is gone and removes the station.
2870 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
2871 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
2872 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
2873 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
2874 */
2875enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
2876 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
2877 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
2878 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
2879 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
2880 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
2881 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
2882 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
2883};
2884
2885/**
2886 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
2887 *
2888 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
2889 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
2890 * @tid: tid of the BA session
2891 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
2892 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
2893 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
2894 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
2895 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
2896 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2897 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
2898 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
2899 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
2900 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
2901 */
2902struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
2903 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
2904 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2905 u16 tid;
2906 u16 ssn;
2907 u8 buf_size;
2908 bool amsdu;
2909 u16 timeout;
2910};
2911
2912/**
2913 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
2914 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
2915 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
2916 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
2917 */
2918enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
2919 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
2920 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
2921};
2922
2923/**
2924 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
2925 *
2926 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
2927 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
2928 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
2929 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
2930 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
2931 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
2932 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
2933 * the peer.
2934 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
2935 * by the peer
2936 */
2937enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
2938 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
2939 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
2940 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
2941 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
2942};
2943
2944/**
2945 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
2946 *
2947 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
2948 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
2949 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vise versa).
2950 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
2951 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
2952 *
2953 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
2954 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
2955 * for sending managment frames offchannel.
2956 */
2957enum ieee80211_roc_type {
2958 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
2959 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
2960};
2961
2962/**
2963 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_complete_type - reconfig type
2964 *
2965 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
2966 * reconfiguration type was completed.
2967 *
2968 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
2969 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
2970 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
2971 * of wowlan configuration)
2972 */
2973enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
2974 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
2975 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
2976};
2977
2978/**
2979 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
2980 *
2981 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
2982 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
2983 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
2984 *
2985 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
2986 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
2987 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
2988 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
2989 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
2990 * Must be atomic.
2991 *
2992 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
2993 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
2994 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
2995 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
2996 * or zero.
2997 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
2998 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
2999 * is added.
3000 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3001 *
3002 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3003 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3004 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3005 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3006 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3007 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3008 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3009 *
3010 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3011 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3012 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3013 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3014 * reconfigured at resume time.
3015 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3016 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3017 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3018 * must return 1 from this function.
3019 *
3020 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3021 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3022 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3023 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3024 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3025 *
3026 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3027 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3028 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3029 * in suspend().
3030 *
3031 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3032 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3033 * and @stop must be implemented.
3034 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3035 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3036 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3037 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3038 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3039 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3040 *
3041 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3042 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3043 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3044 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3045 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3046 *
3047 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3048 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3049 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3050 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3051 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3052 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3053 * MAC address of the device going away.
3054 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3055 *
3056 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3057 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3058 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3059 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3060 *
3061 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3062 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3063 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3064 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3065 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3066 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3067 * can sleep.
3068 *
3069 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3070 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3071 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3072 *
3073 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3074 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3075 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3076 *
3077 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3078 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3079 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3080 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3081 * which flags are changed.
3082 * This callback can sleep.
3083 *
3084 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3085 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3086 *
3087 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3088 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3089 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3090 * is enabled.
3091 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3092 * The callback can sleep.
3093 *
3094 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3095 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3096 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3097 * The callback must be atomic.
3098 *
3099 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3100 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3101 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3102 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3103 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3104 *
3105 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3106 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3107 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3108 *
3109 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3110 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3111 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3112 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3113 * that power save is disabled.
3114 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3115 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3116 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3117 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3118 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3119 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3120 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3121 * The callback can sleep.
3122 *
3123 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3124 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3125 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3126 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3127 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3128 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3129 * The callback can sleep.
3130 *
3131 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3132 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3133 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3134 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3135 *
3136 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3137 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3138 *
3139 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3140 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3141 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3142 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3143 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3144 *
3145 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3146 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3147 * this notification.
3148 * The callback can sleep.
3149 *
3150 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3151 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3152 * The callback can sleep.
3153 *
3154 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3155 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3156 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3157 * The callback must be atomic.
3158 *
3159 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3160 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3161 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3162 * should be set as well.
3163 * The callback can sleep.
3164 *
3165 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3166 * The callback can sleep.
3167 *
3168 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3169 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3170 *
3171 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3172 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3173 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3174 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3175 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3176 * This callback can sleep.
3177 *
3178 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3179 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3180 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3181 * callback can sleep.
3182 *
3183 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3184 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3185 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
3186 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
3187 *
3188 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
3189 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
3190 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
3191 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
3192 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
3193 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
3194 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
3195 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3196 * The callback can sleep.
3197 *
3198 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
3199 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
3200 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
3201 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
3202 * in @sta_state.
3203 * The callback can sleep.
3204 *
3205 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
3206 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
3207 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
3208 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
3209 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
3210 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
3211 * Must be atomic.
3212 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
3213 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
3214 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
3215 *
3216 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
3217 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
3218 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
3219 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
3220 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
3221 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
3222 * The callback can sleep.
3223 *
3224 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
3225 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
3226 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3227 * The callback can sleep.
3228 *
3229 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
3230 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
3231 * required function.
3232 * The callback can sleep.
3233 *
3234 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
3235 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
3236 * required function.
3237 * The callback can sleep.
3238 *
3239 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
3240 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
3241 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
3242 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
3243 * The callback can sleep.
3244 *
3245 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
3246 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
3247 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
3248 * TSF synchronization.
3249 * The callback can sleep.
3250 *
3251 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
3252 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
3253 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
3254 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
3255 * The callback can sleep.
3256 *
3257 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
3258 *
3259 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
3260 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
3261 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
3262 * The callback can sleep.
3263 *
3264 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
3265 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
3266 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
3267 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
3268 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
3269 *
3270 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
3271 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
3272 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
3273 *
3274 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
3275 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
3276 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
3277 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
3278 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
3279 * Note that vif can be NULL.
3280 * The callback can sleep.
3281 *
3282 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
3283 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
3284 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
3285 * completion of the channel switch.
3286 *
3287 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
3288 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
3289 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
3290 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
3291 *
3292 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
3293 *
3294 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
3295 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
3296 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
3297 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
3298 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
3299 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
3300 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
3301 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
3302 * must be accepted in this case.
3303 * This callback may sleep.
3304 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
3305 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
3306 *
3307 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
3308 *
3309 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
3310 *
3311 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
3312 * queues before entering power save.
3313 *
3314 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
3315 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
3316 * The callback can sleep.
3317 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
3318 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
3319 * The callback must be atomic.
3320 *
3321 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
3322 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
3323 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
3324 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
3325 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
3326 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
3327 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
3328 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
3329 * more-data bit must always be set.
3330 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
3331 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
3332 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
3333 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
3334 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3335 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
3336 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
3337 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
3338 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
3339 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
3340 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
3341 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
3342 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
3343 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
3344 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
3345 * This callback must be atomic.
3346 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
3347 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
3348 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
3349 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
3350 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
3351 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
3352 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
3353 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
3354 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
3355 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
3356 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
3357 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
3358 * This callback must be atomic.
3359 *
3360 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
3361 *
3362 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
3363 *
3364 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
3365 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
3366 *
3367 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
3368 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
3369 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
3370 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
3371 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
3372 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
3373 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
3374 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
3375 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
3376 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
3377 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
3378 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
3379 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
3380 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
3381 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
3382 *
3383 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
3384 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
3385 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
3386 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
3387 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
3388 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
3389 * 2 * (DTIM period).
3390 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
3391 *
3392 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
3393 * This callback may sleep.
3394 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
3395 * This callback may sleep.
3396 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
3397 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
3398 * channel context with different settings
3399 * This callback may sleep.
3400 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
3401 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
3402 * This callback may sleep.
3403 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
3404 * unbound from vif.
3405 * This callback may sleep.
3406 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
3407 * another, as specified in the list of
3408 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
3409 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
3410 * This callback may sleep.
3411 *
3412 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
3413 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
3414 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
3415 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
3416 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
3417 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
3418 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
3419 *
3420 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
3421 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
3422 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
3423 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
3424 * This callback may sleep.
3425 *
3426 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
3427 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
3428 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
3429 *
3430 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
3431 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
3432 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
3433 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
3434 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
3435 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
3436 * 1 using ieee80211_csa_is_complete() after the beacon has been
3437 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
3438 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
3439 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
3440 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3441 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
3442 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
3443 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
3444 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
3445 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
3446 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
3447 *
3448 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
3449 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
3450 * channel context is bound before this is called.
3451 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
3452 *
3453 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
3454 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
3455 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
3456 *
3457 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
3458 * and hardware limits.
3459 *
3460 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
3461 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
3462 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
3463 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
3464 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
3465 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
3466 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
3467 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
3468 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
3469 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
3470 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
3471 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
3472 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
3473 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
3474 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
3475 * the function call.
3476 *
3477 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
3478 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
3479 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
3480 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
3481 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
3482 *
3483 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
3484 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
3485 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
3486 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
3487 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
3488 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
3489 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
3490 * changed parameters.
3491 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
3492 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
3493 * this call.
3494 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
3495 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
3496 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
3497 */
3498struct ieee80211_ops {
3499 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3500 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
3501 struct sk_buff *skb);
3502 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3503 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3504#ifdef CONFIG_PM
3505 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
3506 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3507 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
3508#endif
3509 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3510 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3511 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3512 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3513 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
3514 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3515 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3516 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
3517 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3518 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3519 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
3520 u32 changed);
3521
3522 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3523 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3524
3525 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3526 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
3527 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3528 unsigned int changed_flags,
3529 unsigned int *total_flags,
3530 u64 multicast);
3531 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3532 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3533 unsigned int filter_flags,
3534 unsigned int changed_flags);
3535 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3536 bool set);
3537 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
3538 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3539 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
3540 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3541 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3542 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
3543 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3544 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
3545 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3546 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3547 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
3548 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3549 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
3550 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3551 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
3552 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3553 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3554 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3555 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3556 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
3557 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
3558 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3559 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3560 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3561 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3562 const u8 *mac_addr);
3563 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3564 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3565 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3566 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
3567 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3568 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
3569 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
3570 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3571 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
3572 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3573 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3574 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3575 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3576#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
3577 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3578 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3579 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3580 struct dentry *dir);
3581#endif
3582 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3583 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3584 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3585 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3586 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
3587 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
3588 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3589 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3590 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3591 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3592 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3593 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3594 u32 changed);
3595 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3596 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3597 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3598 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3599 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3600 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3601 struct station_info *sinfo);
3602 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3603 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ac,
3604 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
3605 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3606 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3607 u64 tsf);
3608 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3609 s64 offset);
3610 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3611 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3612
3613 /**
3614 * @ampdu_action:
3615 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
3616 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
3617 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
3618 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3619 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
3620 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
3621 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
3622 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
3623 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
3624 *
3625 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
3626 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
3627 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
3628 *
3629 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
3630 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
3631 *
3632 * - ``TX: 1 or``
3633 * - ``TX: 18 or``
3634 * - ``TX: 81``
3635 *
3636 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
3637 *
3638 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
3639 * The callback can sleep.
3640 */
3641 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3642 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3643 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
3644 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
3645 struct survey_info *survey);
3646 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3647 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
3648#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
3649 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3650 void *data, int len);
3651 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
3652 struct netlink_callback *cb,
3653 void *data, int len);
3654#endif
3655 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3656 u32 queues, bool drop);
3657 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3658 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3659 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3660 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
3661 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
3662
3663 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3664 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3665 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
3666 int duration,
3667 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
3668 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3669 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
3670 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3671 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
3672 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3673 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3674 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
3675 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3676 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3677 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
3678
3679 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3680 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3681 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3682 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3683 bool more_data);
3684 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3685 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
3686 u16 tids, int num_frames,
3687 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
3688 bool more_data);
3689
3690 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3691 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
3692 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3693 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3694 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
3695 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3696 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3697 u32 sset, u8 *data);
3698
3699 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3700 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3701
3702 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3703 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3704
3705 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3706 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3707 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3708 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3709 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3710 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
3711 u32 changed);
3712 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3713 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3714 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3715 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3716 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3717 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
3718 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3719 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
3720 int n_vifs,
3721 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
3722
3723 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3724 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
3725
3726#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
3727 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3728 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3729 struct inet6_dev *idev);
3730#endif
3731 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3732 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3733 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
3734 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3735 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3736 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
3737
3738 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3739 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3740
3741 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3742 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3743 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3744 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3745 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3746 int *dbm);
3747
3748 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3749 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3750 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
3751 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
3752 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
3753 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3754 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3755 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
3756 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3757 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3758 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
3759
3760 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3761 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
3762 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3763
3764 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3765 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3766 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
3767 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3768 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
3769 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3770 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3771 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
3772 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3773 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3774 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
3775 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3776 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
3777 u8 instance_id);
3778};
3779
3780/**
3781 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
3782 *
3783 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3784 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3785 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3786 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3787 * @priv_data_len.
3788 *
3789 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3790 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3791 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
3792 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
3793 *
3794 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3795 */
3796struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
3797 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
3798 const char *requested_name);
3799
3800/**
3801 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
3802 *
3803 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
3804 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
3805 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
3806 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
3807 * @priv_data_len.
3808 *
3809 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
3810 * @ops: callbacks for this device
3811 *
3812 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
3813 */
3814static inline
3815struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
3816 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
3817{
3818 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
3819}
3820
3821/**
3822 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
3823 *
3824 * You must call this function before any other functions in
3825 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
3826 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
3827 *
3828 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
3829 *
3830 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
3831 */
3832int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3833
3834/**
3835 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
3836 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
3837 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
3838 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
3839 */
3840struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
3841 int throughput;
3842 int blink_time;
3843};
3844
3845/**
3846 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
3847 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
3848 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
3849 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
3850 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
3851 */
3852enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
3853 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
3854 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
3855 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
3856};
3857
3858#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3859const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3860const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3861const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3862const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3863const char *
3864__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3865 unsigned int flags,
3866 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3867 unsigned int blink_table_len);
3868#endif
3869/**
3870 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
3871 *
3872 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3873 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3874 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3875 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3876 *
3877 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3878 *
3879 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3880 */
3881static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3882{
3883#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3884 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
3885#else
3886 return NULL;
3887#endif
3888}
3889
3890/**
3891 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
3892 *
3893 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3894 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3895 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3896 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3897 *
3898 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3899 *
3900 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3901 */
3902static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3903{
3904#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3905 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
3906#else
3907 return NULL;
3908#endif
3909}
3910
3911/**
3912 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
3913 *
3914 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3915 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3916 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3917 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3918 *
3919 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3920 *
3921 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3922 */
3923static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3924{
3925#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3926 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
3927#else
3928 return NULL;
3929#endif
3930}
3931
3932/**
3933 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
3934 *
3935 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
3936 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
3937 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
3938 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
3939 *
3940 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
3941 *
3942 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
3943 */
3944static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
3945{
3946#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3947 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
3948#else
3949 return NULL;
3950#endif
3951}
3952
3953/**
3954 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
3955 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
3956 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
3957 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
3958 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
3959 *
3960 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
3961 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
3962 *
3963 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
3964 */
3965static inline const char *
3966ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
3967 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
3968 unsigned int blink_table_len)
3969{
3970#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
3971 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
3972 blink_table_len);
3973#else
3974 return NULL;
3975#endif
3976}
3977
3978/**
3979 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
3980 *
3981 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
3982 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
3983 *
3984 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
3985 */
3986void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3987
3988/**
3989 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
3990 *
3991 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
3992 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
3993 * before calling this function.
3994 *
3995 * @hw: the hardware to free
3996 */
3997void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
3998
3999/**
4000 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
4001 *
4002 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
4003 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
4004 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
4005 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
4006 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
4007 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
4008 *
4009 * @hw: the hardware to restart
4010 */
4011void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4012
4013/**
4014 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
4015 *
4016 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4017 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4018 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4019 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4020 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4021 *
4022 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4023 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4024 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4025 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4026 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4027 *
4028 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
4029 *
4030 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4031 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
4032 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4033 * @napi: the NAPI context
4034 */
4035void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4036 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
4037
4038/**
4039 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
4040 *
4041 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
4042 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
4043 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
4044 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
4045 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
4046 *
4047 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4048 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
4049 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
4050 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4051 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4052 *
4053 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
4054 *
4055 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4056 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4057 */
4058static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
4059{
4060 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
4061}
4062
4063/**
4064 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
4065 *
4066 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
4067 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4068 *
4069 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
4070 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
4071 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4072 *
4073 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4074 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4075 */
4076void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
4077
4078/**
4079 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
4080 *
4081 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
4082 * (internally disables bottom halves).
4083 *
4084 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
4085 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4086 * ieee80211_tx_status() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
4087 *
4088 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
4089 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
4090 */
4091static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4092 struct sk_buff *skb)
4093{
4094 local_bh_disable();
4095 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
4096 local_bh_enable();
4097}
4098
4099/**
4100 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
4101 *
4102 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
4103 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
4104 * entering/leaving PS mode.
4105 *
4106 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
4107 *
4108 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
4109 * each other.
4110 *
4111 * @sta: currently connected sta
4112 * @start: start or stop PS
4113 *
4114 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
4115 */
4116int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
4117
4118/**
4119 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
4120 * (in process context)
4121 *
4122 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
4123 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
4124 * applies.
4125 *
4126 * @sta: currently connected sta
4127 * @start: start or stop PS
4128 *
4129 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
4130 */
4131static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4132 bool start)
4133{
4134 int ret;
4135
4136 local_bh_disable();
4137 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
4138 local_bh_enable();
4139
4140 return ret;
4141}
4142
4143/**
4144 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
4145 * @sta: currently connected station
4146 *
4147 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4148 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
4149 * connected station was received.
4150 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4151 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
4152 * be serialized.
4153 */
4154void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4155
4156/**
4157 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
4158 * @sta: currently connected station
4159 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
4160 *
4161 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
4162 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
4163 * from a connected station was received.
4164 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
4165 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
4166 * serialized.
4167 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
4168 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
4169 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
4170 * checks.
4171 */
4172void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
4173
4174/*
4175 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
4176 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
4177 */
4178#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
4179
4180/**
4181 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
4182 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
4183 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
4184 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
4185 *
4186 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
4187 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
4188 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
4189 *
4190 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
4191 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
4192 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
4193 * call! Beware of the locking!)
4194 *
4195 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
4196 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
4197 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
4198 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
4199 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
4200 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
4201 *
4202 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
4203 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
4204 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
4205 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
4206 * use this API.
4207 */
4208void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4209 u8 tid, bool buffered);
4210
4211/**
4212 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
4213 *
4214 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
4215 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
4216 * rate selection table for the station entry.
4217 *
4218 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4219 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
4220 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
4221 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
4222 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
4223 */
4224void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4225 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4226 struct sk_buff *skb,
4227 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
4228 int max_rates);
4229
4230/**
4231 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
4232 *
4233 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
4234 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
4235 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
4236 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
4237 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
4238 * slow stations to starve).
4239 *
4240 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
4241 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
4242 */
4243void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
4244 u32 thr);
4245
4246/**
4247 * ieee80211_tx_status - transmit status callback
4248 *
4249 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
4250 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
4251 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
4252 *
4253 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
4254 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
4255 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
4256 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
4257 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
4258 *
4259 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4260 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4261 */
4262void ieee80211_tx_status(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4263 struct sk_buff *skb);
4264
4265/**
4266 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
4267 *
4268 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4269 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
4270 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
4271 *
4272 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4273 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4274 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4275 *
4276 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4277 * @status: tx status information
4278 */
4279void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4280 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
4281
4282/**
4283 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
4284 *
4285 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status
4286 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
4287 * specific skbs.
4288 *
4289 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
4290 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
4291 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4292 *
4293 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4294 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
4295 * (NULL for multicast packets)
4296 * @info: tx status information
4297 */
4298static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4299 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4300 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
4301{
4302 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
4303 .sta = sta,
4304 .info = info,
4305 };
4306
4307 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
4308}
4309
4310/**
4311 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
4312 *
4313 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in process context.
4314 *
4315 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4316 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
4317 * for a single hardware.
4318 *
4319 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4320 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4321 */
4322static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4323 struct sk_buff *skb)
4324{
4325 local_bh_disable();
4326 ieee80211_tx_status(hw, skb);
4327 local_bh_enable();
4328}
4329
4330/**
4331 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
4332 *
4333 * Like ieee80211_tx_status() but can be called in IRQ context
4334 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
4335 *
4336 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status() and
4337 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
4338 *
4339 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
4340 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
4341 */
4342void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4343 struct sk_buff *skb);
4344
4345/**
4346 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
4347 *
4348 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
4349 * connected STA.
4350 *
4351 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
4352 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
4353 */
4354void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
4355
4356#define IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM 2
4357
4358/**
4359 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
4360 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
4361 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
4362 * @csa_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
4363 * to CSA counters. This array can contain zero values which
4364 * should be ignored.
4365 */
4366struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
4367 u16 tim_offset;
4368 u16 tim_length;
4369
4370 u16 csa_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CSA_COUNTERS_NUM];
4371};
4372
4373/**
4374 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
4375 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4376 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4377 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
4378 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
4379 *
4380 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4381 * obtain the beacon template.
4382 *
4383 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
4384 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
4385 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
4386 * applicable, the CSA count.
4387 *
4388 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4389 *
4390 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4391 */
4392struct sk_buff *
4393ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4394 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4395 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs);
4396
4397/**
4398 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
4399 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4400 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4401 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
4402 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4403 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
4404 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
4405 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
4406 *
4407 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
4408 * obtain the beacon frame.
4409 *
4410 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4411 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
4412 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
4413 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
4414 *
4415 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
4416 *
4417 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
4418 */
4419struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4420 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4421 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length);
4422
4423/**
4424 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
4425 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4426 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4427 *
4428 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4429 *
4430 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
4431 */
4432static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4433 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
4434{
4435 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL);
4436}
4437
4438/**
4439 * ieee80211_csa_update_counter - request mac80211 to decrement the csa counter
4440 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4441 *
4442 * The csa counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
4443 * This function is called implicitly when
4444 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
4445 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
4446 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's csa counters.
4447 *
4448 * Return: new csa counter value
4449 */
4450u8 ieee80211_csa_update_counter(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4451
4452/**
4453 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
4454 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4455 *
4456 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
4457 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
4458 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
4459 */
4460void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4461
4462/**
4463 * ieee80211_csa_is_complete - find out if counters reached 1
4464 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4465 *
4466 * This function returns whether the channel switch counters reached zero.
4467 */
4468bool ieee80211_csa_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4469
4470
4471/**
4472 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
4473 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4474 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4475 *
4476 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4477 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
4478 *
4479 * Can only be called in AP mode.
4480 *
4481 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
4482 */
4483struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4484 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4485
4486/**
4487 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
4488 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4489 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4490 *
4491 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
4492 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4493 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
4494 *
4495 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4496 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
4497 *
4498 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
4499 */
4500struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4501 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4502
4503/**
4504 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
4505 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4506 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4507 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
4508 * if at all possible
4509 *
4510 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
4511 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
4512 * BSSID and address is used.
4513 *
4514 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
4515 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
4516 *
4517 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
4518 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
4519 *
4520 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
4521 */
4522struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4523 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4524 bool qos_ok);
4525
4526/**
4527 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
4528 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4529 * @src_addr: source MAC address
4530 * @ssid: SSID buffer
4531 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
4532 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
4533 *
4534 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
4535 * hardware.
4536 *
4537 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
4538 */
4539struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4540 const u8 *src_addr,
4541 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
4542 size_t tailroom);
4543
4544/**
4545 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
4546 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4547 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4548 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4549 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4550 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4551 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
4552 *
4553 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4554 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4555 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4556 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
4557 */
4558void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4559 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4560 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4561 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
4562
4563/**
4564 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
4565 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4566 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4567 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
4568 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4569 *
4570 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4571 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4572 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4573 *
4574 * Return: The duration.
4575 */
4576__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4577 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
4578 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4579
4580/**
4581 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
4582 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4583 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4584 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4585 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
4586 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4587 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
4588 *
4589 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
4590 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4591 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
4592 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
4593 */
4594void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4595 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4596 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
4597 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
4598 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
4599
4600/**
4601 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
4602 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4603 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4604 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
4605 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
4606 *
4607 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
4608 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
4609 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
4610 *
4611 * Return: The duration.
4612 */
4613__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4614 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4615 size_t frame_len,
4616 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
4617
4618/**
4619 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
4620 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4621 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4622 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
4623 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
4624 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
4625 *
4626 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
4627 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
4628 *
4629 * Return: The duration.
4630 */
4631__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4632 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4633 enum nl80211_band band,
4634 size_t frame_len,
4635 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
4636
4637/**
4638 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
4639 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4640 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
4641 *
4642 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
4643 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
4644 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
4645 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
4646 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
4647 *
4648 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
4649 * frames are available.
4650 *
4651 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
4652 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
4653 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
4654 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
4655 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
4656 * use common code for all beacons.
4657 */
4658struct sk_buff *
4659ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4660
4661/**
4662 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
4663 *
4664 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
4665 *
4666 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4667 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4668 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4669 */
4670void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4671 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4672
4673/**
4674 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
4675 *
4676 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
4677 * from the given packet.
4678 *
4679 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4680 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
4681 * with this P1K
4682 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4683 */
4684static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4685 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
4686{
4687 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
4688 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
4689 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
4690
4691 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
4692}
4693
4694/**
4695 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
4696 *
4697 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
4698 * and transmitter address.
4699 *
4700 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4701 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
4702 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
4703 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
4704 */
4705void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4706 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
4707
4708/**
4709 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
4710 *
4711 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
4712 * in the packet.
4713 *
4714 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4715 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
4716 * encrypted with this key
4717 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
4718 */
4719void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4720 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
4721
4722/**
4723 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
4724 *
4725 * @pos: start of crypto header
4726 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4727 * @pn: PN to add
4728 *
4729 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
4730 * the packet payload)
4731 *
4732 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
4733 * point to the crypto header)
4734 */
4735u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
4736
4737/**
4738 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
4739 *
4740 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4741 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
4742 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4743 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4744 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
4745 *
4746 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
4747 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
4748 * by the device and not by mac80211.
4749 *
4750 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4751 * can be done concurrently.
4752 */
4753void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4754 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4755
4756/**
4757 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
4758 *
4759 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4760 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
4761 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
4762 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
4763 * @seq: new sequence data
4764 *
4765 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
4766 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
4767 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
4768 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
4769 *
4770 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
4771 * can be done concurrently.
4772 */
4773void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
4774 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4775
4776/**
4777 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
4778 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
4779 *
4780 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
4781 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
4782 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
4783 *
4784 * Note that due to locking considerations this function can (currently)
4785 * only be called during key iteration (ieee80211_iter_keys().)
4786 */
4787void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4788
4789/**
4790 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
4791 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
4792 * @keyconf: new key data
4793 *
4794 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
4795 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
4796 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
4797 *
4798 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
4799 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
4800 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
4801 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
4802 *
4803 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
4804 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
4805 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
4806 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
4807 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
4808 * of the reconfiguration.
4809 *
4810 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
4811 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
4812 *
4813 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
4814 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
4815 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
4816 * the key that's being replaced.
4817 */
4818struct ieee80211_key_conf *
4819ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4820 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
4821
4822/**
4823 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
4824 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
4825 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
4826 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
4827 * @gfp: allocation flags
4828 */
4829void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
4830 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
4831
4832/**
4833 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
4834 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4835 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4836 *
4837 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4838 */
4839void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4840
4841/**
4842 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
4843 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4844 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4845 *
4846 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4847 */
4848void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4849
4850/**
4851 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
4852 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4853 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
4854 *
4855 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4856 *
4857 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
4858 */
4859
4860int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
4861
4862/**
4863 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
4864 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4865 *
4866 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
4867 */
4868void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4869
4870/**
4871 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
4872 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
4873 *
4874 * Drivers should use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
4875 */
4876void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4877
4878/**
4879 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
4880 *
4881 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
4882 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
4883 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
4884 * any context, including hardirq context.
4885 *
4886 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
4887 * @info: information about the completed scan
4888 */
4889void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4890 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
4891
4892/**
4893 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
4894 *
4895 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
4896 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
4897 *
4898 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4899 */
4900void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4901
4902/**
4903 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
4904 *
4905 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
4906 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
4907 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
4908 * while associating, for instance.
4909 *
4910 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
4911 */
4912void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4913
4914/**
4915 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
4916 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
4917 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
4918 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
4919 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
4920 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4921 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
4922 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
4923 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
4924 */
4925enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
4926 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
4927 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
4928 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
4929};
4930
4931/**
4932 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
4933 *
4934 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4935 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
4936 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
4937 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4938 *
4939 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4940 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4941 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4942 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4943 */
4944void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4945 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4946 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4947 void *data);
4948
4949/**
4950 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
4951 *
4952 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4953 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4954 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
4955 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
4956 * be used.
4957 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4958 *
4959 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4960 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4961 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
4962 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4963 */
4964static inline void
4965ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
4966 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
4967 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4968 void *data)
4969{
4970 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
4971 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
4972 iterator, data);
4973}
4974
4975/**
4976 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
4977 *
4978 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
4979 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
4980 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
4981 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
4982 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
4983 *
4984 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
4985 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
4986 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
4987 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
4988 */
4989void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4990 u32 iter_flags,
4991 void (*iterator)(void *data,
4992 u8 *mac,
4993 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
4994 void *data);
4995
4996/**
4997 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl - iterate active interfaces
4998 *
4999 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
5000 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
5001 * This version can only be used while holding the RTNL.
5002 *
5003 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5004 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
5005 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5006 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5007 */
5008void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_rtnl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5009 u32 iter_flags,
5010 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5011 u8 *mac,
5012 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
5013 void *data);
5014
5015/**
5016 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
5017 *
5018 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
5019 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
5020 * function for them.
5021 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
5022 *
5023 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
5024 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
5025 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
5026 */
5027void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5028 void (*iterator)(void *data,
5029 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
5030 void *data);
5031/**
5032 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5033 *
5034 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
5035 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
5036 *
5037 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5038 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
5039 */
5040void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
5041
5042/**
5043 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
5044 *
5045 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
5046 * workqueue.
5047 *
5048 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
5049 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
5050 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
5051 */
5052void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5053 struct delayed_work *dwork,
5054 unsigned long delay);
5055
5056/**
5057 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
5058 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
5059 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5060 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
5061 *
5062 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
5063 *
5064 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5065 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5066 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5067 */
5068int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
5069 u16 timeout);
5070
5071/**
5072 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
5073 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5074 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5075 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
5076 *
5077 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5078 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
5079 * from any context.
5080 */
5081void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5082 u16 tid);
5083
5084/**
5085 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
5086 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
5087 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
5088 *
5089 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
5090 *
5091 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
5092 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
5093 * will be managed by the mac80211.
5094 */
5095int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
5096
5097/**
5098 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
5099 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5100 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
5101 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
5102 *
5103 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
5104 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
5105 * can be called from any context.
5106 */
5107void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
5108 u16 tid);
5109
5110/**
5111 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
5112 *
5113 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
5114 * @addr: station's address
5115 *
5116 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5117 *
5118 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5119 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5120 */
5121struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5122 const u8 *addr);
5123
5124/**
5125 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
5126 *
5127 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5128 * @addr: remote station's address
5129 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
5130 *
5131 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
5132 *
5133 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
5134 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
5135 *
5136 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
5137 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
5138 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
5139 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
5140 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
5141 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
5142 * is not reliable.
5143 *
5144 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
5145 */
5146struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5147 const u8 *addr,
5148 const u8 *localaddr);
5149
5150/**
5151 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
5152 * @hw: the hardware
5153 * @pubsta: the station
5154 * @block: whether to block or unblock
5155 *
5156 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
5157 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
5158 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
5159 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
5160 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
5161 *
5162 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
5163 * manner.
5164 *
5165 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
5166 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
5167 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
5168 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
5169 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
5170 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
5171 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
5172 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
5173 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
5174 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
5175 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
5176 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
5177 * woke up while blocked or not.
5178 */
5179void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5180 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
5181
5182/**
5183 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
5184 * @pubsta: the station
5185 *
5186 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
5187 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
5188 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
5189 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
5190 *
5191 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
5192 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
5193 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
5194 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
5195 *
5196 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
5197 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
5198 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
5199 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
5200 */
5201void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
5202
5203/**
5204 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
5205 * @pubsta: the station
5206 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
5207 *
5208 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
5209 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
5210 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
5211 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
5212 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
5213 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
5214 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
5215 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
5216 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
5217 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
5218 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
5219 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
5220 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
5221 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
5222 */
5223void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
5224
5225/**
5226 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
5227 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5228 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5229 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5230 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5231 *
5232 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5233 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5234 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
5235 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend. Note that due
5236 * to locking reasons, it is also only safe to call this at few
5237 * spots since it must hold the RTNL and be able to sleep.
5238 *
5239 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
5240 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
5241 * set_key callback.
5242 */
5243void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5244 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5245 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5246 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5247 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5248 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5249 void *data),
5250 void *iter_data);
5251
5252/**
5253 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
5254 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5255 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
5256 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
5257 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
5258 *
5259 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
5260 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
5261 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
5262 * in removal process will be skipped.
5263 *
5264 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
5265 * and thus iter must be atomic.
5266 */
5267void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5268 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5269 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5270 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5271 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5272 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
5273 void *data),
5274 void *iter_data);
5275
5276/**
5277 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
5278 * @hw: pointre obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5279 * @iter: iterator function
5280 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
5281 *
5282 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
5283 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
5284 * places while calling into the driver.
5285 *
5286 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
5287 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
5288 * removed.
5289 *
5290 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
5291 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
5292 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
5293 * or not.
5294 */
5295void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
5296 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5297 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5298 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
5299 void *data),
5300 void *iter_data);
5301
5302/**
5303 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5304 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5305 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5306 *
5307 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5308 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
5309 * information. This function must only be called from within the
5310 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
5311 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
5312 * %NULL.
5313 *
5314 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5315 */
5316struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5317 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5318
5319/**
5320 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
5321 *
5322 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5323 *
5324 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
5325 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
5326 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
5327 */
5328void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5329
5330/**
5331 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
5332 *
5333 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5334 *
5335 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
5336 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
5337 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
5338 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
5339 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
5340 *
5341 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
5342 * without connection recovery attempts.
5343 */
5344void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5345
5346/**
5347 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
5348 *
5349 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5350 *
5351 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
5352 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
5353 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
5354 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
5355 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
5356 *
5357 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
5358 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
5359 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
5360 * disconnect normally later.
5361 *
5362 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
5363 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
5364 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
5365 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
5366 */
5367void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5368
5369/**
5370 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
5371 * rssi threshold triggered
5372 *
5373 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5374 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
5375 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
5376 * @gfp: context flags
5377 *
5378 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
5379 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
5380 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
5381 */
5382void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5383 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
5384 s32 rssi_level,
5385 gfp_t gfp);
5386
5387/**
5388 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
5389 *
5390 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5391 * @gfp: context flags
5392 */
5393void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
5394
5395/**
5396 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
5397 *
5398 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5399 */
5400void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5401
5402/**
5403 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
5404 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5405 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
5406 *
5407 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
5408 * and wake up the suspended queues.
5409 */
5410void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success);
5411
5412/**
5413 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
5414 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5415 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
5416 *
5417 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
5418 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
5419 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
5420 */
5421void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5422 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
5423
5424/**
5425 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
5426 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5427 */
5428void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5429
5430/**
5431 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
5432 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5433 */
5434void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5435
5436/**
5437 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
5438 *
5439 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
5440 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
5441 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
5442 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
5443 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
5444 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
5445 *
5446 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5447 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
5448 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
5449 */
5450void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
5451 const u8 *addr);
5452
5453/**
5454 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
5455 * @pubsta: station struct
5456 * @tid: the session's TID
5457 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
5458 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
5459 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
5460 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
5461 *
5462 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
5463 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
5464 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
5465 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
5466 */
5467void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
5468 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
5469 u16 received_mpdus);
5470
5471/**
5472 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
5473 *
5474 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
5475 * buffer.
5476 *
5477 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5478 * @ra: the peer's destination address
5479 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
5480 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
5481 */
5482void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
5483
5484/**
5485 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
5486 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5487 * @addr: station mac address
5488 * @tid: the rx tid
5489 */
5490void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
5491 unsigned int tid);
5492
5493/**
5494 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
5495 *
5496 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5497 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5498 * reordering.
5499 *
5500 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5501 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
5502 *
5503 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5504 * @addr: station mac address
5505 * @tid: the rx tid
5506 */
5507static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5508 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5509{
5510 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5511 return;
5512 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
5513}
5514
5515/**
5516 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
5517 *
5518 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
5519 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
5520 * reordering.
5521 *
5522 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
5523 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
5524 *
5525 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5526 * @addr: station mac address
5527 * @tid: the rx tid
5528 */
5529static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5530 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
5531{
5532 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
5533 return;
5534 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
5535}
5536
5537/**
5538 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
5539 *
5540 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
5541 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
5542 *
5543 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
5544 *
5545 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
5546 * @addr: station mac address
5547 * @tid: the rx tid
5548 */
5549void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5550 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
5551
5552/* Rate control API */
5553
5554/**
5555 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
5556 *
5557 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
5558 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
5559 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
5560 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
5561 * to be filled in
5562 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
5563 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
5564 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
5565 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
5566 * RTS threshold
5567 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
5568 * if the selected rate supports it
5569 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
5570 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
5571 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
5572 */
5573struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
5574 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
5575 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
5576 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
5577 struct sk_buff *skb;
5578 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
5579 bool rts, short_preamble;
5580 u32 rate_idx_mask;
5581 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
5582 bool bss;
5583};
5584
5585struct rate_control_ops {
5586 const char *name;
5587 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct dentry *debugfsdir);
5588 void (*free)(void *priv);
5589
5590 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
5591 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5592 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5593 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
5594 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5595 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
5596 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5597 u32 changed);
5598 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5599 void *priv_sta);
5600
5601 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
5602 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5603 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
5604 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5605 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5606 struct sk_buff *skb);
5607 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
5608 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5609
5610 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
5611 struct dentry *dir);
5612 void (*remove_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta);
5613
5614 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
5615};
5616
5617static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5618 enum nl80211_band band,
5619 int index)
5620{
5621 return (sta == NULL || sta->supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
5622}
5623
5624/**
5625 * rate_control_send_low - helper for drivers for management/no-ack frames
5626 *
5627 * Rate control algorithms that agree to use the lowest rate to
5628 * send management frames and NO_ACK data with the respective hw
5629 * retries should use this in the beginning of their mac80211 get_rate
5630 * callback. If true is returned the rate control can simply return.
5631 * If false is returned we guarantee that sta and sta and priv_sta is
5632 * not null.
5633 *
5634 * Rate control algorithms wishing to do more intelligent selection of
5635 * rate for multicast/broadcast frames may choose to not use this.
5636 *
5637 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination. Note
5638 * that this may be null.
5639 * @priv_sta: private rate control structure. This may be null.
5640 * @txrc: rate control information we sholud populate for mac80211.
5641 */
5642bool rate_control_send_low(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5643 void *priv_sta,
5644 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
5645
5646
5647static inline s8
5648rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5649 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5650{
5651 int i;
5652
5653 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5654 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5655 return i;
5656
5657 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
5658 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
5659
5660 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
5661 return 0;
5662}
5663
5664static inline
5665bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
5666 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
5667{
5668 unsigned int i;
5669
5670 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
5671 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
5672 return true;
5673 return false;
5674}
5675
5676/**
5677 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
5678 *
5679 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
5680 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
5681 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
5682 * the most recent rate control module decision.
5683 *
5684 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5685 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
5686 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
5687 */
5688int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5689 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5690 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
5691
5692int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5693void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
5694
5695static inline bool
5696conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5697{
5698 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
5699}
5700
5701static inline bool
5702conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5703{
5704 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5705 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
5706}
5707
5708static inline bool
5709conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5710{
5711 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
5712 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
5713}
5714
5715static inline bool
5716conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5717{
5718 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
5719}
5720
5721static inline bool
5722conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
5723{
5724 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
5725 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
5726 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
5727}
5728
5729static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5730ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
5731{
5732 if (p2p) {
5733 switch (type) {
5734 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
5735 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
5736 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
5737 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
5738 default:
5739 break;
5740 }
5741 }
5742 return type;
5743}
5744
5745static inline enum nl80211_iftype
5746ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
5747{
5748 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
5749}
5750
5751/**
5752 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
5753 *
5754 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5755 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
5756 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
5757 *
5758 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
5759 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
5760 * matching GroupId management frame.
5761 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
5762 */
5763void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5764 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
5765
5766void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5767 int rssi_min_thold,
5768 int rssi_max_thold);
5769
5770void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5771
5772/**
5773 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
5774 *
5775 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
5776 *
5777 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
5778 *
5779 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
5780 * applicable.
5781 */
5782int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5783
5784/**
5785 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
5786 * @vif: virtual interface
5787 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
5788 * @gfp: allocation flags
5789 *
5790 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
5791 */
5792void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5793 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
5794 gfp_t gfp);
5795
5796/**
5797 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
5798 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5799 * @vif: virtual interface
5800 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
5801 * @band: the band to transmit on
5802 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
5803 *
5804 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
5805 */
5806bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5807 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
5808 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
5809
5810/**
5811 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
5812 *
5813 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
5814 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
5815 *
5816 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
5817 *
5818 * private:
5819 *
5820 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
5821 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
5822 */
5823struct ieee80211_noa_data {
5824 u32 next_tsf;
5825 bool has_next_tsf;
5826
5827 u8 absent;
5828
5829 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5830 struct {
5831 u32 start;
5832 u32 duration;
5833 u32 interval;
5834 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
5835};
5836
5837/**
5838 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
5839 *
5840 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
5841 * @data: NoA tracking data
5842 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5843 *
5844 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
5845 */
5846int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
5847 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5848
5849/**
5850 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
5851 *
5852 * @data: NoA tracking data
5853 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
5854 */
5855void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
5856
5857/**
5858 * ieee80211_tdls_oper - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
5859 * @vif: virtual interface
5860 * @peer: the peer's destination address
5861 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
5862 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
5863 * @gfp: allocation flags
5864 *
5865 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
5866 */
5867void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
5868 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
5869 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
5870
5871/**
5872 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
5873 *
5874 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
5875 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
5876 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
5877 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
5878 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
5879 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
5880 *
5881 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
5882 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
5883 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5884 *
5885 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
5886 * @tid: the TID to reserve
5887 *
5888 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
5889 */
5890int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5891
5892/**
5893 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
5894 *
5895 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
5896 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
5897 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
5898 *
5899 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
5900 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
5901 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
5902 *
5903 * @sta: the station
5904 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
5905 */
5906void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5907
5908/**
5909 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
5910 *
5911 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
5912 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5913 *
5914 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
5915 */
5916struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5917 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
5918
5919/**
5920 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
5921 *
5922 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
5923 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
5924 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
5925 *
5926 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
5927 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
5928 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
5929 */
5930void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
5931 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
5932 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
5933
5934/**
5935 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
5936 *
5937 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
5938 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5939 *
5940 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5941 * @inst_id: the local instance id
5942 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
5943 * @gfp: allocation flags
5944 */
5945void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5946 u8 inst_id,
5947 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
5948 gfp_t gfp);
5949
5950/**
5951 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
5952 *
5953 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
5954 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
5955 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
5956 *
5957 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5958 * @match: match event information
5959 * @gfp: allocation flags
5960 */
5961void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5962 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
5963 gfp_t gfp);
5964
5965#endif /* MAC80211_H */
1/* SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0-only */
2/*
3 * mac80211 <-> driver interface
4 *
5 * Copyright 2002-2005, Devicescape Software, Inc.
6 * Copyright 2006-2007 Jiri Benc <jbenc@suse.cz>
7 * Copyright 2007-2010 Johannes Berg <johannes@sipsolutions.net>
8 * Copyright 2013-2014 Intel Mobile Communications GmbH
9 * Copyright (C) 2015 - 2017 Intel Deutschland GmbH
10 * Copyright (C) 2018 - 2024 Intel Corporation
11 */
12
13#ifndef MAC80211_H
14#define MAC80211_H
15
16#include <linux/bug.h>
17#include <linux/kernel.h>
18#include <linux/if_ether.h>
19#include <linux/skbuff.h>
20#include <linux/ieee80211.h>
21#include <linux/lockdep.h>
22#include <net/cfg80211.h>
23#include <net/codel.h>
24#include <net/ieee80211_radiotap.h>
25#include <asm/unaligned.h>
26
27/**
28 * DOC: Introduction
29 *
30 * mac80211 is the Linux stack for 802.11 hardware that implements
31 * only partial functionality in hard- or firmware. This document
32 * defines the interface between mac80211 and low-level hardware
33 * drivers.
34 */
35
36/**
37 * DOC: Calling mac80211 from interrupts
38 *
39 * Only ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() can be
40 * called in hardware interrupt context. The low-level driver must not call any
41 * other functions in hardware interrupt context. If there is a need for such
42 * call, the low-level driver should first ACK the interrupt and perform the
43 * IEEE 802.11 code call after this, e.g. from a scheduled workqueue or even
44 * tasklet function.
45 *
46 * NOTE: If the driver opts to use the _irqsafe() functions, it may not also
47 * use the non-IRQ-safe functions!
48 */
49
50/**
51 * DOC: Warning
52 *
53 * If you're reading this document and not the header file itself, it will
54 * be incomplete because not all documentation has been converted yet.
55 */
56
57/**
58 * DOC: Frame format
59 *
60 * As a general rule, when frames are passed between mac80211 and the driver,
61 * they start with the IEEE 802.11 header and include the same octets that are
62 * sent over the air except for the FCS which should be calculated by the
63 * hardware.
64 *
65 * There are, however, various exceptions to this rule for advanced features:
66 *
67 * The first exception is for hardware encryption and decryption offload
68 * where the IV/ICV may or may not be generated in hardware.
69 *
70 * Secondly, when the hardware handles fragmentation, the frame handed to
71 * the driver from mac80211 is the MSDU, not the MPDU.
72 */
73
74/**
75 * DOC: mac80211 workqueue
76 *
77 * mac80211 provides its own workqueue for drivers and internal mac80211 use.
78 * The workqueue is a single threaded workqueue and can only be accessed by
79 * helpers for sanity checking. Drivers must ensure all work added onto the
80 * mac80211 workqueue should be cancelled on the driver stop() callback.
81 *
82 * mac80211 will flush the workqueue upon interface removal and during
83 * suspend.
84 *
85 * All work performed on the mac80211 workqueue must not acquire the RTNL lock.
86 *
87 */
88
89/**
90 * DOC: mac80211 software tx queueing
91 *
92 * mac80211 uses an intermediate queueing implementation, designed to allow the
93 * driver to keep hardware queues short and to provide some fairness between
94 * different stations/interfaces.
95 *
96 * Drivers must provide the .wake_tx_queue driver operation by either
97 * linking it to ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() or implementing a custom
98 * handler.
99 *
100 * Intermediate queues (struct ieee80211_txq) are kept per-sta per-tid, with
101 * another per-sta for non-data/non-mgmt and bufferable management frames, and
102 * a single per-vif queue for multicast data frames.
103 *
104 * The driver is expected to initialize its private per-queue data for stations
105 * and interfaces in the .add_interface and .sta_add ops.
106 *
107 * The driver can't access the internal TX queues (iTXQs) directly.
108 * Whenever mac80211 adds a new frame to a queue, it calls the .wake_tx_queue
109 * driver op.
110 * Drivers implementing a custom .wake_tx_queue op can get them by calling
111 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue(). Drivers using ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue() will
112 * simply get the individual frames pushed via the .tx driver operation.
113 *
114 * Drivers can optionally delegate responsibility for scheduling queues to
115 * mac80211, to take advantage of airtime fairness accounting. In this case, to
116 * obtain the next queue to pull frames from, the driver calls
117 * ieee80211_next_txq(). The driver is then expected to return the txq using
118 * ieee80211_return_txq().
119 *
120 * For AP powersave TIM handling, the driver only needs to indicate if it has
121 * buffered packets in the driver specific data structures by calling
122 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(). For frames buffered in the ieee80211_txq
123 * struct, mac80211 sets the appropriate TIM PVB bits and calls
124 * .release_buffered_frames().
125 * In that callback the driver is therefore expected to release its own
126 * buffered frames and afterwards also frames from the ieee80211_txq (obtained
127 * via the usual ieee80211_tx_dequeue).
128 */
129
130/**
131 * DOC: HW timestamping
132 *
133 * Timing Measurement and Fine Timing Measurement require accurate timestamps
134 * of the action frames TX/RX and their respective acks.
135 *
136 * To report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine Timing
137 * Measurement frame RX, the low level driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp
138 * field to the frame RX timestamp and report the ack TX timestamp in the
139 * ieee80211_rx_status struct.
140 *
141 * Similarly, to report hardware timestamps for Timing Measurement or Fine
142 * Timing Measurement frame TX, the driver should set the SKB's hwtstamp field
143 * to the frame TX timestamp and report the ack RX timestamp in the
144 * ieee80211_tx_status struct.
145 */
146struct device;
147
148/**
149 * enum ieee80211_max_queues - maximum number of queues
150 *
151 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES: Maximum number of regular device queues.
152 * @IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP: bitmap with maximum queues set
153 */
154enum ieee80211_max_queues {
155 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES = 16,
156 IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUE_MAP = BIT(IEEE80211_MAX_QUEUES) - 1,
157};
158
159#define IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE 0xff
160
161/**
162 * enum ieee80211_ac_numbers - AC numbers as used in mac80211
163 * @IEEE80211_AC_VO: voice
164 * @IEEE80211_AC_VI: video
165 * @IEEE80211_AC_BE: best effort
166 * @IEEE80211_AC_BK: background
167 */
168enum ieee80211_ac_numbers {
169 IEEE80211_AC_VO = 0,
170 IEEE80211_AC_VI = 1,
171 IEEE80211_AC_BE = 2,
172 IEEE80211_AC_BK = 3,
173};
174
175/**
176 * struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params - transmit queue configuration
177 *
178 * The information provided in this structure is required for QoS
179 * transmit queue configuration. Cf. IEEE 802.11 7.3.2.29.
180 *
181 * @aifs: arbitration interframe space [0..255]
182 * @cw_min: minimum contention window [a value of the form
183 * 2^n-1 in the range 1..32767]
184 * @cw_max: maximum contention window [like @cw_min]
185 * @txop: maximum burst time in units of 32 usecs, 0 meaning disabled
186 * @acm: is mandatory admission control required for the access category
187 * @uapsd: is U-APSD mode enabled for the queue
188 * @mu_edca: is the MU EDCA configured
189 * @mu_edca_param_rec: MU EDCA Parameter Record for HE
190 */
191struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params {
192 u16 txop;
193 u16 cw_min;
194 u16 cw_max;
195 u8 aifs;
196 bool acm;
197 bool uapsd;
198 bool mu_edca;
199 struct ieee80211_he_mu_edca_param_ac_rec mu_edca_param_rec;
200};
201
202struct ieee80211_low_level_stats {
203 unsigned int dot11ACKFailureCount;
204 unsigned int dot11RTSFailureCount;
205 unsigned int dot11FCSErrorCount;
206 unsigned int dot11RTSSuccessCount;
207};
208
209/**
210 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_change - change flag for channel context
211 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH: The channel width changed
212 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS: The number of RX chains changed
213 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR: radar detection flag changed
214 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL: switched to another operating channel,
215 * this is used only with channel switching with CSA
216 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH: The min required channel width changed
217 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP: The AP channel definition changed, so (wider
218 * bandwidth) OFDMA settings need to be changed
219 * @IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING: The punctured channel(s) bitmap
220 * was changed.
221 */
222enum ieee80211_chanctx_change {
223 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_WIDTH = BIT(0),
224 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RX_CHAINS = BIT(1),
225 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_RADAR = BIT(2),
226 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(3),
227 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_MIN_WIDTH = BIT(4),
228 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_AP = BIT(5),
229 IEEE80211_CHANCTX_CHANGE_PUNCTURING = BIT(6),
230};
231
232/**
233 * struct ieee80211_chan_req - A channel "request"
234 * @oper: channel definition to use for operation
235 * @ap: the channel definition of the AP, if any
236 * (otherwise the chan member is %NULL)
237 */
238struct ieee80211_chan_req {
239 struct cfg80211_chan_def oper;
240 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap;
241};
242
243/**
244 * struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf - channel context that vifs may be tuned to
245 *
246 * This is the driver-visible part. The ieee80211_chanctx
247 * that contains it is visible in mac80211 only.
248 *
249 * @def: the channel definition
250 * @min_def: the minimum channel definition currently required.
251 * @ap: the channel definition the AP actually is operating as,
252 * for use with (wider bandwidth) OFDMA
253 * @rx_chains_static: The number of RX chains that must always be
254 * active on the channel to receive MIMO transmissions
255 * @rx_chains_dynamic: The number of RX chains that must be enabled
256 * after RTS/CTS handshake to receive SMPS MIMO transmissions;
257 * this will always be >= @rx_chains_static.
258 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled on this channel.
259 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
260 * sizeof(void *), size is determined in hw information.
261 */
262struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf {
263 struct cfg80211_chan_def def;
264 struct cfg80211_chan_def min_def;
265 struct cfg80211_chan_def ap;
266
267 u8 rx_chains_static, rx_chains_dynamic;
268
269 bool radar_enabled;
270
271 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
272};
273
274/**
275 * enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode - channel context switch mode
276 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF: Both old and new contexts already
277 * exist (and will continue to exist), but the virtual interface
278 * needs to be switched from one to the other.
279 * @CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS: The old context exists but will stop
280 * to exist with this call, the new context doesn't exist but
281 * will be active after this call, the virtual interface switches
282 * from the old to the new (note that the driver may of course
283 * implement this as an on-the-fly chandef switch of the existing
284 * hardware context, but the mac80211 pointer for the old context
285 * will cease to exist and only the new one will later be used
286 * for changes/removal.)
287 */
288enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode {
289 CHANCTX_SWMODE_REASSIGN_VIF,
290 CHANCTX_SWMODE_SWAP_CONTEXTS,
291};
292
293/**
294 * struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch - vif chanctx switch information
295 *
296 * This is structure is used to pass information about a vif that
297 * needs to switch from one chanctx to another. The
298 * &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode defines how the switch should be
299 * done.
300 *
301 * @vif: the vif that should be switched from old_ctx to new_ctx
302 * @link_conf: the link conf that's switching
303 * @old_ctx: the old context to which the vif was assigned
304 * @new_ctx: the new context to which the vif must be assigned
305 */
306struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch {
307 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
308 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf;
309 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *old_ctx;
310 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *new_ctx;
311};
312
313/**
314 * enum ieee80211_bss_change - BSS change notification flags
315 *
316 * These flags are used with the bss_info_changed(), link_info_changed()
317 * and vif_cfg_changed() callbacks to indicate which parameter(s) changed.
318 *
319 * @BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC: association status changed (associated/disassociated),
320 * also implies a change in the AID.
321 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT: CTS protection changed
322 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE: preamble changed
323 * @BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT: slot timing changed
324 * @BSS_CHANGED_HT: 802.11n parameters changed
325 * @BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES: Basic rateset changed
326 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT: Beacon interval changed
327 * @BSS_CHANGED_BSSID: BSSID changed, for whatever
328 * reason (IBSS and managed mode)
329 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON: Beacon data changed, retrieve
330 * new beacon (beaconing modes)
331 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED: Beaconing should be
332 * enabled/disabled (beaconing modes)
333 * @BSS_CHANGED_CQM: Connection quality monitor config changed
334 * @BSS_CHANGED_IBSS: IBSS join status changed
335 * @BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER: Hardware ARP filter address list or state changed.
336 * @BSS_CHANGED_QOS: QoS for this association was enabled/disabled. Note
337 * that it is only ever disabled for station mode.
338 * @BSS_CHANGED_IDLE: Idle changed for this BSS/interface.
339 * @BSS_CHANGED_SSID: SSID changed for this BSS (AP and IBSS mode)
340 * @BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP: Probe Response changed for this BSS (AP mode)
341 * @BSS_CHANGED_PS: PS changed for this BSS (STA mode)
342 * @BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER: TX power setting changed for this interface
343 * @BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS: P2P powersave settings (CTWindow, opportunistic PS)
344 * changed
345 * @BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO: Data from the AP's beacon became available:
346 * currently dtim_period only is under consideration.
347 * @BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH: The bandwidth used by this interface changed,
348 * note that this is only called when it changes after the channel
349 * context had been assigned.
350 * @BSS_CHANGED_OCB: OCB join status changed
351 * @BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS: VHT MU-MIMO group id or user position changed
352 * @BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE: keep alive options (idle period or protected
353 * keep alive) changed.
354 * @BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE: Multicast Rate setting changed for this interface
355 * @BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER: fine timing measurement request responder
356 * functionality changed for this BSS (AP mode).
357 * @BSS_CHANGED_TWT: TWT status changed
358 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD: OBSS Packet Detection status changed.
359 * @BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR: BSS Color has changed
360 * @BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY: FILS discovery status changed.
361 * @BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
362 * status changed.
363 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS: MLD valid links status changed.
364 * @BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM: TID to link mapping was changed
365 */
366enum ieee80211_bss_change {
367 BSS_CHANGED_ASSOC = 1<<0,
368 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_CTS_PROT = 1<<1,
369 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_PREAMBLE = 1<<2,
370 BSS_CHANGED_ERP_SLOT = 1<<3,
371 BSS_CHANGED_HT = 1<<4,
372 BSS_CHANGED_BASIC_RATES = 1<<5,
373 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INT = 1<<6,
374 BSS_CHANGED_BSSID = 1<<7,
375 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON = 1<<8,
376 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_ENABLED = 1<<9,
377 BSS_CHANGED_CQM = 1<<10,
378 BSS_CHANGED_IBSS = 1<<11,
379 BSS_CHANGED_ARP_FILTER = 1<<12,
380 BSS_CHANGED_QOS = 1<<13,
381 BSS_CHANGED_IDLE = 1<<14,
382 BSS_CHANGED_SSID = 1<<15,
383 BSS_CHANGED_AP_PROBE_RESP = 1<<16,
384 BSS_CHANGED_PS = 1<<17,
385 BSS_CHANGED_TXPOWER = 1<<18,
386 BSS_CHANGED_P2P_PS = 1<<19,
387 BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO = 1<<20,
388 BSS_CHANGED_BANDWIDTH = 1<<21,
389 BSS_CHANGED_OCB = 1<<22,
390 BSS_CHANGED_MU_GROUPS = 1<<23,
391 BSS_CHANGED_KEEP_ALIVE = 1<<24,
392 BSS_CHANGED_MCAST_RATE = 1<<25,
393 BSS_CHANGED_FTM_RESPONDER = 1<<26,
394 BSS_CHANGED_TWT = 1<<27,
395 BSS_CHANGED_HE_OBSS_PD = 1<<28,
396 BSS_CHANGED_HE_BSS_COLOR = 1<<29,
397 BSS_CHANGED_FILS_DISCOVERY = 1<<30,
398 BSS_CHANGED_UNSOL_BCAST_PROBE_RESP = 1<<31,
399 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_VALID_LINKS = BIT_ULL(33),
400 BSS_CHANGED_MLD_TTLM = BIT_ULL(34),
401
402 /* when adding here, make sure to change ieee80211_reconfig */
403};
404
405/*
406 * The maximum number of IPv4 addresses listed for ARP filtering. If the number
407 * of addresses for an interface increase beyond this value, hardware ARP
408 * filtering will be disabled.
409 */
410#define IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN 4
411
412/**
413 * enum ieee80211_event_type - event to be notified to the low level driver
414 * @RSSI_EVENT: AP's rssi crossed the a threshold set by the driver.
415 * @MLME_EVENT: event related to MLME
416 * @BAR_RX_EVENT: a BAR was received
417 * @BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT: Frames were released from the reordering buffer because
418 * they timed out. This won't be called for each frame released, but only
419 * once each time the timeout triggers.
420 */
421enum ieee80211_event_type {
422 RSSI_EVENT,
423 MLME_EVENT,
424 BAR_RX_EVENT,
425 BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT,
426};
427
428/**
429 * enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data - relevant when event type is %RSSI_EVENT
430 * @RSSI_EVENT_HIGH: AP's rssi went below the threshold set by the driver.
431 * @RSSI_EVENT_LOW: AP's rssi went above the threshold set by the driver.
432 */
433enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data {
434 RSSI_EVENT_HIGH,
435 RSSI_EVENT_LOW,
436};
437
438/**
439 * struct ieee80211_rssi_event - data attached to an %RSSI_EVENT
440 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data
441 */
442struct ieee80211_rssi_event {
443 enum ieee80211_rssi_event_data data;
444};
445
446/**
447 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
448 * @AUTH_EVENT: the MLME operation is authentication
449 * @ASSOC_EVENT: the MLME operation is association
450 * @DEAUTH_RX_EVENT: deauth received..
451 * @DEAUTH_TX_EVENT: deauth sent.
452 */
453enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data {
454 AUTH_EVENT,
455 ASSOC_EVENT,
456 DEAUTH_RX_EVENT,
457 DEAUTH_TX_EVENT,
458};
459
460/**
461 * enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status - relevant when event type is %MLME_EVENT
462 * @MLME_SUCCESS: the MLME operation completed successfully.
463 * @MLME_DENIED: the MLME operation was denied by the peer.
464 * @MLME_TIMEOUT: the MLME operation timed out.
465 */
466enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status {
467 MLME_SUCCESS,
468 MLME_DENIED,
469 MLME_TIMEOUT,
470};
471
472/**
473 * struct ieee80211_mlme_event - data attached to an %MLME_EVENT
474 * @data: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data
475 * @status: See &enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status
476 * @reason: the reason code if applicable
477 */
478struct ieee80211_mlme_event {
479 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_data data;
480 enum ieee80211_mlme_event_status status;
481 u16 reason;
482};
483
484/**
485 * struct ieee80211_ba_event - data attached for BlockAck related events
486 * @sta: pointer to the &ieee80211_sta to which this event relates
487 * @tid: the tid
488 * @ssn: the starting sequence number (for %BAR_RX_EVENT)
489 */
490struct ieee80211_ba_event {
491 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
492 u16 tid;
493 u16 ssn;
494};
495
496/**
497 * struct ieee80211_event - event to be sent to the driver
498 * @type: The event itself. See &enum ieee80211_event_type.
499 * @u.rssi: relevant if &type is %RSSI_EVENT
500 * @u.mlme: relevant if &type is %AUTH_EVENT
501 * @u.ba: relevant if &type is %BAR_RX_EVENT or %BA_FRAME_TIMEOUT
502 * @u:union holding the fields above
503 */
504struct ieee80211_event {
505 enum ieee80211_event_type type;
506 union {
507 struct ieee80211_rssi_event rssi;
508 struct ieee80211_mlme_event mlme;
509 struct ieee80211_ba_event ba;
510 } u;
511};
512
513/**
514 * struct ieee80211_mu_group_data - STA's VHT MU-MIMO group data
515 *
516 * This structure describes the group id data of VHT MU-MIMO
517 *
518 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
519 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
520 */
521struct ieee80211_mu_group_data {
522 u8 membership[WLAN_MEMBERSHIP_LEN];
523 u8 position[WLAN_USER_POSITION_LEN];
524};
525
526/**
527 * struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params - FTM responder parameters
528 *
529 * @lci: LCI subelement content
530 * @civicloc: CIVIC location subelement content
531 * @lci_len: LCI data length
532 * @civicloc_len: Civic data length
533 */
534struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params {
535 const u8 *lci;
536 const u8 *civicloc;
537 size_t lci_len;
538 size_t civicloc_len;
539};
540
541/**
542 * struct ieee80211_fils_discovery - FILS discovery parameters from
543 * IEEE Std 802.11ai-2016, Annex C.3 MIB detail.
544 *
545 * @min_interval: Minimum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
546 * @max_interval: Maximum packet interval in TUs (0 - 10000)
547 */
548struct ieee80211_fils_discovery {
549 u32 min_interval;
550 u32 max_interval;
551};
552
553/**
554 * struct ieee80211_bss_conf - holds the BSS's changing parameters
555 *
556 * This structure keeps information about a BSS (and an association
557 * to that BSS) that can change during the lifetime of the BSS.
558 *
559 * @vif: reference to owning VIF
560 * @bss: the cfg80211 bss descriptor. Valid only for a station, and only
561 * when associated. Note: This contains information which is not
562 * necessarily authenticated. For example, information coming from probe
563 * responses.
564 * @addr: (link) address used locally
565 * @link_id: link ID, or 0 for non-MLO
566 * @htc_trig_based_pkt_ext: default PE in 4us units, if BSS supports HE
567 * @uora_exists: is the UORA element advertised by AP
568 * @uora_ocw_range: UORA element's OCW Range field
569 * @frame_time_rts_th: HE duration RTS threshold, in units of 32us
570 * @he_support: does this BSS support HE
571 * @twt_requester: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
572 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
573 * @twt_responder: does this BSS support TWT requester (relevant for managed
574 * mode only, set if the AP advertises TWT responder role)
575 * @twt_protected: does this BSS support protected TWT frames
576 * @twt_broadcast: does this BSS support broadcast TWT
577 * @use_cts_prot: use CTS protection
578 * @use_short_preamble: use 802.11b short preamble
579 * @use_short_slot: use short slot time (only relevant for ERP)
580 * @dtim_period: num of beacons before the next DTIM, for beaconing,
581 * valid in station mode only if after the driver was notified
582 * with the %BSS_CHANGED_BEACON_INFO flag, will be non-zero then.
583 * @sync_tsf: last beacon's/probe response's TSF timestamp (could be old
584 * as it may have been received during scanning long ago). If the
585 * HW flag %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY is set, then this can
586 * only come from a beacon, but might not become valid until after
587 * association when a beacon is received (which is notified with the
588 * %BSS_CHANGED_DTIM flag.). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
589 * @sync_device_ts: the device timestamp corresponding to the sync_tsf,
590 * the driver/device can use this to calculate synchronisation
591 * (see @sync_tsf). See also sync_dtim_count important notice.
592 * @sync_dtim_count: Only valid when %IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY
593 * is requested, see @sync_tsf/@sync_device_ts.
594 * IMPORTANT: These three sync_* parameters would possibly be out of sync
595 * by the time the driver will use them. The synchronized view is currently
596 * guaranteed only in certain callbacks.
597 * Note also that this is not used with MLD associations, mac80211 doesn't
598 * know how to track beacons for all of the links for this.
599 * @beacon_int: beacon interval
600 * @assoc_capability: capabilities taken from assoc resp
601 * @basic_rates: bitmap of basic rates, each bit stands for an
602 * index into the rate table configured by the driver in
603 * the current band.
604 * @beacon_rate: associated AP's beacon TX rate
605 * @mcast_rate: per-band multicast rate index + 1 (0: disabled)
606 * @bssid: The BSSID for this BSS
607 * @enable_beacon: whether beaconing should be enabled or not
608 * @chanreq: Channel request for this BSS -- the hardware might be
609 * configured a higher bandwidth than this BSS uses, for example.
610 * @mu_group: VHT MU-MIMO group membership data
611 * @ht_operation_mode: HT operation mode like in &struct ieee80211_ht_operation.
612 * This field is only valid when the channel is a wide HT/VHT channel.
613 * Note that with TDLS this can be the case (channel is HT, protection must
614 * be used from this field) even when the BSS association isn't using HT.
615 * @cqm_rssi_thold: Connection quality monitor RSSI threshold, a zero value
616 * implies disabled. As with the cfg80211 callback, a change here should
617 * cause an event to be sent indicating where the current value is in
618 * relation to the newly configured threshold.
619 * @cqm_rssi_low: Connection quality monitor RSSI lower threshold, a zero value
620 * implies disabled. This is an alternative mechanism to the single
621 * threshold event and can't be enabled simultaneously with it.
622 * @cqm_rssi_high: Connection quality monitor RSSI upper threshold.
623 * @cqm_rssi_hyst: Connection quality monitor RSSI hysteresis
624 * @qos: This is a QoS-enabled BSS.
625 * @hidden_ssid: The SSID of the current vif is hidden. Only valid in AP-mode.
626 * @txpower: TX power in dBm. INT_MIN means not configured.
627 * @txpower_type: TX power adjustment used to control per packet Transmit
628 * Power Control (TPC) in lower driver for the current vif. In particular
629 * TPC is enabled if value passed in %txpower_type is
630 * NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED (allow using less than specified from
631 * userspace), whereas TPC is disabled if %txpower_type is set to
632 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED (use value configured from userspace)
633 * @p2p_noa_attr: P2P NoA attribute for P2P powersave
634 * @allow_p2p_go_ps: indication for AP or P2P GO interface, whether it's allowed
635 * to use P2P PS mechanism or not. AP/P2P GO is not allowed to use P2P PS
636 * if it has associated clients without P2P PS support.
637 * @max_idle_period: the time period during which the station can refrain from
638 * transmitting frames to its associated AP without being disassociated.
639 * In units of 1000 TUs. Zero value indicates that the AP did not include
640 * a (valid) BSS Max Idle Period Element.
641 * @protected_keep_alive: if set, indicates that the station should send an RSN
642 * protected frame to the AP to reset the idle timer at the AP for the
643 * station.
644 * @ftm_responder: whether to enable or disable fine timing measurement FTM
645 * responder functionality.
646 * @ftmr_params: configurable lci/civic parameter when enabling FTM responder.
647 * @nontransmitted: this BSS is a nontransmitted BSS profile
648 * @transmitter_bssid: the address of transmitter AP
649 * @bssid_index: index inside the multiple BSSID set
650 * @bssid_indicator: 2^bssid_indicator is the maximum number of APs in set
651 * @ema_ap: AP supports enhancements of discovery and advertisement of
652 * nontransmitted BSSIDs
653 * @profile_periodicity: the least number of beacon frames need to be received
654 * in order to discover all the nontransmitted BSSIDs in the set.
655 * @he_oper: HE operation information of the BSS (AP/Mesh) or of the AP we are
656 * connected to (STA)
657 * @he_obss_pd: OBSS Packet Detection parameters.
658 * @he_bss_color: BSS coloring settings, if BSS supports HE
659 * @fils_discovery: FILS discovery configuration
660 * @unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval: Unsolicited broadcast probe response
661 * interval.
662 * @beacon_tx_rate: The configured beacon transmit rate that needs to be passed
663 * to driver when rate control is offloaded to firmware.
664 * @power_type: power type of BSS for 6 GHz
665 * @tx_pwr_env: transmit power envelope array of BSS.
666 * @tx_pwr_env_num: number of @tx_pwr_env.
667 * @pwr_reduction: power constraint of BSS.
668 * @eht_support: does this BSS support EHT
669 * @csa_active: marks whether a channel switch is going on.
670 * @mu_mimo_owner: indicates interface owns MU-MIMO capability
671 * @chanctx_conf: The channel context this interface is assigned to, or %NULL
672 * when it is not assigned. This pointer is RCU-protected due to the TX
673 * path needing to access it; even though the netdev carrier will always
674 * be off when it is %NULL there can still be races and packets could be
675 * processed after it switches back to %NULL.
676 * @color_change_active: marks whether a color change is ongoing.
677 * @color_change_color: the bss color that will be used after the change.
678 * @ht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HT LDPC capability.
679 * @vht_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has VHT LDPC capability.
680 * @he_ldpc: in AP mode, indicates interface has HE LDPC capability.
681 * @vht_su_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU
682 * beamformer
683 * @vht_su_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT SU
684 * beamformee
685 * @vht_mu_beamformer: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU
686 * beamformer
687 * @vht_mu_beamformee: in AP mode, does this BSS support operation as an VHT MU
688 * beamformee
689 * @he_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU
690 * beamformer
691 * @he_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE SU
692 * beamformee
693 * @he_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS support operation as an HE MU
694 * beamformer
695 * @he_full_ul_mumimo: does this BSS support the reception (AP) or transmission
696 * (non-AP STA) of an HE TB PPDU on an RU that spans the entire PPDU
697 * bandwidth
698 * @eht_su_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU
699 * beamformer
700 * @eht_su_beamformee: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT SU
701 * beamformee
702 * @eht_mu_beamformer: in AP-mode, does this BSS enable operation as an EHT MU
703 * beamformer
704 */
705struct ieee80211_bss_conf {
706 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
707 struct cfg80211_bss *bss;
708
709 const u8 *bssid;
710 unsigned int link_id;
711 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
712 u8 htc_trig_based_pkt_ext;
713 bool uora_exists;
714 u8 uora_ocw_range;
715 u16 frame_time_rts_th;
716 bool he_support;
717 bool twt_requester;
718 bool twt_responder;
719 bool twt_protected;
720 bool twt_broadcast;
721 /* erp related data */
722 bool use_cts_prot;
723 bool use_short_preamble;
724 bool use_short_slot;
725 bool enable_beacon;
726 u8 dtim_period;
727 u16 beacon_int;
728 u16 assoc_capability;
729 u64 sync_tsf;
730 u32 sync_device_ts;
731 u8 sync_dtim_count;
732 u32 basic_rates;
733 struct ieee80211_rate *beacon_rate;
734 int mcast_rate[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
735 u16 ht_operation_mode;
736 s32 cqm_rssi_thold;
737 u32 cqm_rssi_hyst;
738 s32 cqm_rssi_low;
739 s32 cqm_rssi_high;
740 struct ieee80211_chan_req chanreq;
741 struct ieee80211_mu_group_data mu_group;
742 bool qos;
743 bool hidden_ssid;
744 int txpower;
745 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting txpower_type;
746 struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr p2p_noa_attr;
747 bool allow_p2p_go_ps;
748 u16 max_idle_period;
749 bool protected_keep_alive;
750 bool ftm_responder;
751 struct ieee80211_ftm_responder_params *ftmr_params;
752 /* Multiple BSSID data */
753 bool nontransmitted;
754 u8 transmitter_bssid[ETH_ALEN];
755 u8 bssid_index;
756 u8 bssid_indicator;
757 bool ema_ap;
758 u8 profile_periodicity;
759 struct {
760 u32 params;
761 u16 nss_set;
762 } he_oper;
763 struct ieee80211_he_obss_pd he_obss_pd;
764 struct cfg80211_he_bss_color he_bss_color;
765 struct ieee80211_fils_discovery fils_discovery;
766 u32 unsol_bcast_probe_resp_interval;
767 struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask beacon_tx_rate;
768 enum ieee80211_ap_reg_power power_type;
769 struct ieee80211_tx_pwr_env tx_pwr_env[IEEE80211_TPE_MAX_IE_COUNT];
770 u8 tx_pwr_env_num;
771 u8 pwr_reduction;
772 bool eht_support;
773
774 bool csa_active;
775
776 bool mu_mimo_owner;
777 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf __rcu *chanctx_conf;
778
779 bool color_change_active;
780 u8 color_change_color;
781
782 bool ht_ldpc;
783 bool vht_ldpc;
784 bool he_ldpc;
785 bool vht_su_beamformer;
786 bool vht_su_beamformee;
787 bool vht_mu_beamformer;
788 bool vht_mu_beamformee;
789 bool he_su_beamformer;
790 bool he_su_beamformee;
791 bool he_mu_beamformer;
792 bool he_full_ul_mumimo;
793 bool eht_su_beamformer;
794 bool eht_su_beamformee;
795 bool eht_mu_beamformer;
796};
797
798/**
799 * enum mac80211_tx_info_flags - flags to describe transmission information/status
800 *
801 * These flags are used with the @flags member of &ieee80211_tx_info.
802 *
803 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS: require TX status callback for this frame.
804 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ: The driver has to assign a sequence
805 * number to this frame, taking care of not overwriting the fragment
806 * number and increasing the sequence number only when the
807 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT flag is set. mac80211 will properly
808 * assign sequence numbers to QoS-data frames but cannot do so correctly
809 * for non-QoS-data and management frames because beacons need them from
810 * that counter as well and mac80211 cannot guarantee proper sequencing.
811 * If this flag is set, the driver should instruct the hardware to
812 * assign a sequence number to the frame or assign one itself. Cf. IEEE
813 * 802.11-2007 7.1.3.4.1 paragraph 3. This flag will always be set for
814 * beacons and always be clear for frames without a sequence number field.
815 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK: tell the low level not to wait for an ack
816 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT: clear powersave filter for destination
817 * station
818 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT: this is a first fragment of the frame
819 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM: send this frame after DTIM beacon
820 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU: this frame should be sent as part of an A-MPDU
821 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED: Frame was injected, internal to mac80211.
822 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED: The frame was not transmitted
823 * because the destination STA was in powersave mode. Note that to
824 * avoid race conditions, the filter must be set by the hardware or
825 * firmware upon receiving a frame that indicates that the station
826 * went to sleep (must be done on device to filter frames already on
827 * the queue) and may only be unset after mac80211 gives the OK for
828 * that by setting the IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT (see above),
829 * since only then is it guaranteed that no more frames are in the
830 * hardware queue.
831 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK: Frame was acknowledged
832 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU: The frame was aggregated, so status
833 * is for the whole aggregation.
834 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK: no block ack was returned,
835 * so consider using block ack request (BAR).
836 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE: internal to mac80211, can be
837 * set by rate control algorithms to indicate probe rate, will
838 * be cleared for fragmented frames (except on the last fragment)
839 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK: Internal to mac80211. Used to indicate
840 * that a frame can be transmitted while the queues are stopped for
841 * off-channel operation.
842 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP: This frame uses hardware encapsulation
843 * (header conversion)
844 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED: completely internal to mac80211,
845 * used to indicate that a frame was already retried due to PS
846 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT: completely internal to mac80211,
847 * used to indicate frame should not be encrypted
848 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER: This frame is a response to a poll
849 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD) or a non-bufferable MMPDU and must
850 * be sent although the station is in powersave mode.
851 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES: More frames will be passed to the
852 * transmit function after the current frame, this can be used
853 * by drivers to kick the DMA queue only if unset or when the
854 * queue gets full.
855 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION: This frame is being retransmitted
856 * after TX status because the destination was asleep, it must not
857 * be modified again (no seqno assignment, crypto, etc.)
858 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX: This frame was transmitted by the MLME
859 * code for connection establishment, this indicates that its status
860 * should kick the MLME state machine.
861 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX: Frame was requested through nl80211
862 * MLME command (internal to mac80211 to figure out whether to send TX
863 * status to user space)
864 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC: tells the driver to use LDPC for this frame
865 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC: Enables Space-Time Block Coding (STBC) for this
866 * frame and selects the maximum number of streams that it can use.
867 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN: Marks this packet to be transmitted on
868 * the off-channel channel when a remain-on-channel offload is done
869 * in hardware -- normal packets still flow and are expected to be
870 * handled properly by the device.
871 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE: Marks this packet to be used for TKIP
872 * testing. It will be sent out with incorrect Michael MIC key to allow
873 * TKIP countermeasures to be tested.
874 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE: This frame will be sent at non CCK rate.
875 * This flag is actually used for management frame especially for P2P
876 * frames not being sent at CCK rate in 2GHz band.
877 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP: This packet marks the end of service period,
878 * when its status is reported the service period ends. For frames in
879 * an SP that mac80211 transmits, it is already set; for driver frames
880 * the driver may set this flag. It is also used to do the same for
881 * PS-Poll responses.
882 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE: This frame will be sent at lowest rate.
883 * This flag is used to send nullfunc frame at minimum rate when
884 * the nullfunc is used for connection monitoring purpose.
885 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG: Don't fragment this packet even if it
886 * would be fragmented by size (this is optional, only used for
887 * monitor injection).
888 * @IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED: A frame that was marked with
889 * IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK has been successfully transmitted without
890 * any errors (like issues specific to the driver/HW).
891 * This flag must not be set for frames that don't request no-ack
892 * behaviour with IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK.
893 *
894 * Note: If you have to add new flags to the enumeration, then don't
895 * forget to update %IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS when necessary.
896 */
897enum mac80211_tx_info_flags {
898 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS = BIT(0),
899 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_ASSIGN_SEQ = BIT(1),
900 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK = BIT(2),
901 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT = BIT(3),
902 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT = BIT(4),
903 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM = BIT(5),
904 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU = BIT(6),
905 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_INJECTED = BIT(7),
906 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED = BIT(8),
907 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK = BIT(9),
908 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU = BIT(10),
909 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK = BIT(11),
910 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE = BIT(12),
911 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_OFFCHAN_TX_OK = BIT(13),
912 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP = BIT(14),
913 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRIED = BIT(15),
914 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_DONT_ENCRYPT = BIT(16),
915 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER = BIT(17),
916 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES = BIT(18),
917 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_RETRANSMISSION = BIT(19),
918 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_MLME_CONN_TX = BIT(20),
919 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_NL80211_FRAME_TX = BIT(21),
920 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC = BIT(22),
921 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC = BIT(23) | BIT(24),
922 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN = BIT(25),
923 IEEE80211_TX_INTFL_TKIP_MIC_FAILURE = BIT(26),
924 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_CCK_RATE = BIT(27),
925 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP = BIT(28),
926 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_USE_MINRATE = BIT(29),
927 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_DONTFRAG = BIT(30),
928 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_NOACK_TRANSMITTED = BIT(31),
929};
930
931#define IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC_SHIFT 23
932
933#define IEEE80211_TX_RC_S1G_MCS IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS
934
935/**
936 * enum mac80211_tx_control_flags - flags to describe transmit control
937 *
938 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO: this frame is a port control
939 * protocol frame (e.g. EAP)
940 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE: This frame is a response to a poll
941 * frame (PS-Poll or uAPSD).
942 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT: This frame is injected with rate information
943 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU: This frame is an A-MSDU frame
944 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT: This frame is going through the fast_xmit path
945 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP: This frame skips mesh path lookup
946 * @IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING: completely internal to mac80211,
947 * used to indicate that a pending frame requires TX processing before
948 * it can be sent out.
949 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO: Do not overwrite the sequence number that
950 * has already been assigned to this frame.
951 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER: This frame should not be reordered
952 * relative to other frames that have this flag set, independent
953 * of their QoS TID or other priority field values.
954 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX: first MLO TX, used mostly internally
955 * for sequence number assignment
956 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SCAN_TX: Indicates that this frame is transmitted
957 * due to scanning, not in normal operation on the interface.
958 * @IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK: If not @IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, this
959 * frame should be transmitted on the specific link. This really is
960 * only relevant for frames that do not have data present, and is
961 * also not used for 802.3 format frames. Note that even if the frame
962 * is on a specific link, address translation might still apply if
963 * it's intended for an MLD.
964 *
965 * These flags are used in tx_info->control.flags.
966 */
967enum mac80211_tx_control_flags {
968 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PORT_CTRL_PROTO = BIT(0),
969 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_PS_RESPONSE = BIT(1),
970 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_RATE_INJECT = BIT(2),
971 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_AMSDU = BIT(3),
972 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_FAST_XMIT = BIT(4),
973 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SKIP_MPATH_LOOKUP = BIT(5),
974 IEEE80211_TX_INTCFL_NEED_TXPROCESSING = BIT(6),
975 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_NO_SEQNO = BIT(7),
976 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_DONT_REORDER = BIT(8),
977 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MCAST_MLO_FIRST_TX = BIT(9),
978 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_SCAN_TX = BIT(10),
979 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK = 0xf0000000,
980};
981
982#define IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED 0xf
983#define IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK_UNSPEC \
984 u32_encode_bits(IEEE80211_LINK_UNSPECIFIED, \
985 IEEE80211_TX_CTRL_MLO_LINK)
986
987/**
988 * enum mac80211_tx_status_flags - flags to describe transmit status
989 *
990 * @IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID: ACK signal is valid
991 *
992 * These flags are used in tx_info->status.flags.
993 */
994enum mac80211_tx_status_flags {
995 IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_ACK_SIGNAL_VALID = BIT(0),
996};
997
998/*
999 * This definition is used as a mask to clear all temporary flags, which are
1000 * set by the tx handlers for each transmission attempt by the mac80211 stack.
1001 */
1002#define IEEE80211_TX_TEMPORARY_FLAGS (IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_ACK | \
1003 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_CLEAR_PS_FILT | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_FIRST_FRAGMENT | \
1004 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_SEND_AFTER_DTIM | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_AMPDU | \
1005 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_ACK | \
1006 IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU | IEEE80211_TX_STAT_AMPDU_NO_BACK | \
1007 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_RATE_CTRL_PROBE | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER | \
1008 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_MORE_FRAMES | IEEE80211_TX_CTL_LDPC | \
1009 IEEE80211_TX_CTL_STBC | IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
1010
1011/**
1012 * enum mac80211_rate_control_flags - per-rate flags set by the
1013 * Rate Control algorithm.
1014 *
1015 * These flags are set by the Rate control algorithm for each rate during tx,
1016 * in the @flags member of struct ieee80211_tx_rate.
1017 *
1018 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS: Use RTS/CTS exchange for this rate.
1019 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT: CTS-to-self protection is required.
1020 * This is set if the current BSS requires ERP protection.
1021 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE: Use short preamble.
1022 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS: HT rate.
1023 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS: VHT MCS rate, in this case the idx field is split
1024 * into a higher 4 bits (Nss) and lower 4 bits (MCS number)
1025 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD: Indicates whether this rate should be used in
1026 * Greenfield mode.
1027 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates if the Channel Width should be 40 MHz.
1028 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 80 MHz transmission
1029 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH: Indicates 160 MHz transmission
1030 * (80+80 isn't supported yet)
1031 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA: The frame should be transmitted on both of the
1032 * adjacent 20 MHz channels, if the current channel type is
1033 * NL80211_CHAN_HT40MINUS or NL80211_CHAN_HT40PLUS.
1034 * @IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI: Short Guard interval should be used for this rate.
1035 */
1036enum mac80211_rate_control_flags {
1037 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_RTS_CTS = BIT(0),
1038 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_CTS_PROTECT = BIT(1),
1039 IEEE80211_TX_RC_USE_SHORT_PREAMBLE = BIT(2),
1040
1041 /* rate index is an HT/VHT MCS instead of an index */
1042 IEEE80211_TX_RC_MCS = BIT(3),
1043 IEEE80211_TX_RC_GREEN_FIELD = BIT(4),
1044 IEEE80211_TX_RC_40_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(5),
1045 IEEE80211_TX_RC_DUP_DATA = BIT(6),
1046 IEEE80211_TX_RC_SHORT_GI = BIT(7),
1047 IEEE80211_TX_RC_VHT_MCS = BIT(8),
1048 IEEE80211_TX_RC_80_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(9),
1049 IEEE80211_TX_RC_160_MHZ_WIDTH = BIT(10),
1050};
1051
1052
1053/* there are 40 bytes if you don't need the rateset to be kept */
1054#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 40
1055
1056/* if you do need the rateset, then you have less space */
1057#define IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE 24
1058
1059/* maximum number of rate stages */
1060#define IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES 4
1061
1062/* maximum number of rate table entries */
1063#define IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE 4
1064
1065/**
1066 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate - rate selection/status
1067 *
1068 * @idx: rate index to attempt to send with
1069 * @flags: rate control flags (&enum mac80211_rate_control_flags)
1070 * @count: number of tries in this rate before going to the next rate
1071 *
1072 * A value of -1 for @idx indicates an invalid rate and, if used
1073 * in an array of retry rates, that no more rates should be tried.
1074 *
1075 * When used for transmit status reporting, the driver should
1076 * always report the rate along with the flags it used.
1077 *
1078 * &struct ieee80211_tx_info contains an array of these structs
1079 * in the control information, and it will be filled by the rate
1080 * control algorithm according to what should be sent. For example,
1081 * if this array contains, in the format { <idx>, <count> } the
1082 * information::
1083 *
1084 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 4 }, { -1, 0 }, { -1, 0 }
1085 *
1086 * then this means that the frame should be transmitted
1087 * up to twice at rate 3, up to twice at rate 2, and up to four
1088 * times at rate 1 if it doesn't get acknowledged. Say it gets
1089 * acknowledged by the peer after the fifth attempt, the status
1090 * information should then contain::
1091 *
1092 * { 3, 2 }, { 2, 2 }, { 1, 1 }, { -1, 0 } ...
1093 *
1094 * since it was transmitted twice at rate 3, twice at rate 2
1095 * and once at rate 1 after which we received an acknowledgement.
1096 */
1097struct ieee80211_tx_rate {
1098 s8 idx;
1099 u16 count:5,
1100 flags:11;
1101} __packed;
1102
1103#define IEEE80211_MAX_TX_RETRY 31
1104
1105static inline bool ieee80211_rate_valid(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1106{
1107 return rate->idx >= 0 && rate->count > 0;
1108}
1109
1110static inline void ieee80211_rate_set_vht(struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate,
1111 u8 mcs, u8 nss)
1112{
1113 WARN_ON(mcs & ~0xF);
1114 WARN_ON((nss - 1) & ~0x7);
1115 rate->idx = ((nss - 1) << 4) | mcs;
1116}
1117
1118static inline u8
1119ieee80211_rate_get_vht_mcs(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1120{
1121 return rate->idx & 0xF;
1122}
1123
1124static inline u8
1125ieee80211_rate_get_vht_nss(const struct ieee80211_tx_rate *rate)
1126{
1127 return (rate->idx >> 4) + 1;
1128}
1129
1130/**
1131 * struct ieee80211_tx_info - skb transmit information
1132 *
1133 * This structure is placed in skb->cb for three uses:
1134 * (1) mac80211 TX control - mac80211 tells the driver what to do
1135 * (2) driver internal use (if applicable)
1136 * (3) TX status information - driver tells mac80211 what happened
1137 *
1138 * @flags: transmit info flags, defined above
1139 * @band: the band to transmit on (use e.g. for checking for races),
1140 * not valid if the interface is an MLD since we won't know which
1141 * link the frame will be transmitted on
1142 * @hw_queue: HW queue to put the frame on, skb_get_queue_mapping() gives the AC
1143 * @status_data: internal data for TX status handling, assigned privately,
1144 * see also &enum ieee80211_status_data for the internal documentation
1145 * @status_data_idr: indicates status data is IDR allocated ID for ack frame
1146 * @tx_time_est: TX time estimate in units of 4us, used internally
1147 * @control: union part for control data
1148 * @control.rates: TX rates array to try
1149 * @control.rts_cts_rate_idx: rate for RTS or CTS
1150 * @control.use_rts: use RTS
1151 * @control.use_cts_prot: use RTS/CTS
1152 * @control.short_preamble: use short preamble (CCK only)
1153 * @control.skip_table: skip externally configured rate table
1154 * @control.jiffies: timestamp for expiry on powersave clients
1155 * @control.vif: virtual interface (may be NULL)
1156 * @control.hw_key: key to encrypt with (may be NULL)
1157 * @control.flags: control flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_control_flags
1158 * @control.enqueue_time: enqueue time (for iTXQs)
1159 * @driver_rates: alias to @control.rates to reserve space
1160 * @pad: padding
1161 * @rate_driver_data: driver use area if driver needs @control.rates
1162 * @status: union part for status data
1163 * @status.rates: attempted rates
1164 * @status.ack_signal: ACK signal
1165 * @status.ampdu_ack_len: AMPDU ack length
1166 * @status.ampdu_len: AMPDU length
1167 * @status.antenna: (legacy, kept only for iwlegacy)
1168 * @status.tx_time: airtime consumed for transmission; note this is only
1169 * used for WMM AC, not for airtime fairness
1170 * @status.flags: status flags, see &enum mac80211_tx_status_flags
1171 * @status.status_driver_data: driver use area
1172 * @ack: union part for pure ACK data
1173 * @ack.cookie: cookie for the ACK
1174 * @driver_data: array of driver_data pointers
1175 */
1176struct ieee80211_tx_info {
1177 /* common information */
1178 u32 flags;
1179 u32 band:3,
1180 status_data_idr:1,
1181 status_data:13,
1182 hw_queue:4,
1183 tx_time_est:10;
1184 /* 1 free bit */
1185
1186 union {
1187 struct {
1188 union {
1189 /* rate control */
1190 struct {
1191 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[
1192 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1193 s8 rts_cts_rate_idx;
1194 u8 use_rts:1;
1195 u8 use_cts_prot:1;
1196 u8 short_preamble:1;
1197 u8 skip_table:1;
1198
1199 /* for injection only (bitmap) */
1200 u8 antennas:2;
1201
1202 /* 14 bits free */
1203 };
1204 /* only needed before rate control */
1205 unsigned long jiffies;
1206 };
1207 /* NB: vif can be NULL for injected frames */
1208 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
1209 struct ieee80211_key_conf *hw_key;
1210 u32 flags;
1211 codel_time_t enqueue_time;
1212 } control;
1213 struct {
1214 u64 cookie;
1215 } ack;
1216 struct {
1217 struct ieee80211_tx_rate rates[IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1218 s32 ack_signal;
1219 u8 ampdu_ack_len;
1220 u8 ampdu_len;
1221 u8 antenna;
1222 u8 pad;
1223 u16 tx_time;
1224 u8 flags;
1225 u8 pad2;
1226 void *status_driver_data[16 / sizeof(void *)];
1227 } status;
1228 struct {
1229 struct ieee80211_tx_rate driver_rates[
1230 IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES];
1231 u8 pad[4];
1232
1233 void *rate_driver_data[
1234 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_RATE_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1235 };
1236 void *driver_data[
1237 IEEE80211_TX_INFO_DRIVER_DATA_SIZE / sizeof(void *)];
1238 };
1239};
1240
1241static inline u16
1242ieee80211_info_set_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info, u16 tx_time_est)
1243{
1244 /* We only have 10 bits in tx_time_est, so store airtime
1245 * in increments of 4us and clamp the maximum to 2**12-1
1246 */
1247 info->tx_time_est = min_t(u16, tx_time_est, 4095) >> 2;
1248 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1249}
1250
1251static inline u16
1252ieee80211_info_get_tx_time_est(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1253{
1254 return info->tx_time_est << 2;
1255}
1256
1257/***
1258 * struct ieee80211_rate_status - mrr stage for status path
1259 *
1260 * This struct is used in struct ieee80211_tx_status to provide drivers a
1261 * dynamic way to report about used rates and power levels per packet.
1262 *
1263 * @rate_idx The actual used rate.
1264 * @try_count How often the rate was tried.
1265 * @tx_power_idx An idx into the ieee80211_hw->tx_power_levels list of the
1266 * corresponding wifi hardware. The idx shall point to the power level
1267 * that was used when sending the packet.
1268 */
1269struct ieee80211_rate_status {
1270 struct rate_info rate_idx;
1271 u8 try_count;
1272 u8 tx_power_idx;
1273};
1274
1275/**
1276 * struct ieee80211_tx_status - extended tx status info for rate control
1277 *
1278 * @sta: Station that the packet was transmitted for
1279 * @info: Basic tx status information
1280 * @skb: Packet skb (can be NULL if not provided by the driver)
1281 * @rates: Mrr stages that were used when sending the packet
1282 * @n_rates: Number of mrr stages (count of instances for @rates)
1283 * @free_list: list where processed skbs are stored to be free'd by the driver
1284 * @ack_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp of the received ack in nanoseconds
1285 * Only needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action
1286 * frames. Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1287 */
1288struct ieee80211_tx_status {
1289 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
1290 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info;
1291 struct sk_buff *skb;
1292 struct ieee80211_rate_status *rates;
1293 ktime_t ack_hwtstamp;
1294 u8 n_rates;
1295
1296 struct list_head *free_list;
1297};
1298
1299/**
1300 * struct ieee80211_scan_ies - descriptors for different blocks of IEs
1301 *
1302 * This structure is used to point to different blocks of IEs in HW scan
1303 * and scheduled scan. These blocks contain the IEs passed by userspace
1304 * and the ones generated by mac80211.
1305 *
1306 * @ies: pointers to band specific IEs.
1307 * @len: lengths of band_specific IEs.
1308 * @common_ies: IEs for all bands (especially vendor specific ones)
1309 * @common_ie_len: length of the common_ies
1310 */
1311struct ieee80211_scan_ies {
1312 const u8 *ies[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1313 size_t len[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
1314 const u8 *common_ies;
1315 size_t common_ie_len;
1316};
1317
1318
1319static inline struct ieee80211_tx_info *IEEE80211_SKB_CB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1320{
1321 return (struct ieee80211_tx_info *)skb->cb;
1322}
1323
1324static inline struct ieee80211_rx_status *IEEE80211_SKB_RXCB(struct sk_buff *skb)
1325{
1326 return (struct ieee80211_rx_status *)skb->cb;
1327}
1328
1329/**
1330 * ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status - clear TX status
1331 *
1332 * @info: The &struct ieee80211_tx_info to be cleared.
1333 *
1334 * When the driver passes an skb back to mac80211, it must report
1335 * a number of things in TX status. This function clears everything
1336 * in the TX status but the rate control information (it does clear
1337 * the count since you need to fill that in anyway).
1338 *
1339 * NOTE: While the rates array is kept intact, this will wipe all of the
1340 * driver_data fields in info, so it's up to the driver to restore
1341 * any fields it needs after calling this helper.
1342 */
1343static inline void
1344ieee80211_tx_info_clear_status(struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
1345{
1346 int i;
1347
1348 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1349 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, control.rates));
1350 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) !=
1351 offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, driver_rates));
1352 BUILD_BUG_ON(offsetof(struct ieee80211_tx_info, status.rates) != 8);
1353 /* clear the rate counts */
1354 for (i = 0; i < IEEE80211_TX_MAX_RATES; i++)
1355 info->status.rates[i].count = 0;
1356 memset_after(&info->status, 0, rates);
1357}
1358
1359
1360/**
1361 * enum mac80211_rx_flags - receive flags
1362 *
1363 * These flags are used with the @flag member of &struct ieee80211_rx_status.
1364 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR: Michael MIC error was reported on this frame.
1365 * Use together with %RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED.
1366 * @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED: This frame was decrypted in hardware.
1367 * @RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED: the Michael MIC is stripped off this frame,
1368 * verification has been done by the hardware.
1369 * @RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED: The IV and ICV are stripped from this frame.
1370 * If this flag is set, the stack cannot do any replay detection
1371 * hence the driver or hardware will have to do that.
1372 * @RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED: Currently only valid for CCMP/GCMP frames, this
1373 * flag indicates that the PN was verified for replay protection.
1374 * Note that this flag is also currently only supported when a frame
1375 * is also decrypted (ie. @RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED must be set)
1376 * @RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED: The driver should set this flag if it did
1377 * de-duplication by itself.
1378 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC: Set this flag if the FCS check failed on
1379 * the frame.
1380 * @RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC: Set this flag if the PCLP check failed on
1381 * the frame.
1382 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1383 * field) is valid if this field is non-zero, and the position
1384 * where the timestamp was sampled depends on the value.
1385 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1386 * field) is valid and contains the time the first symbol of the MPDU
1387 * was received. This is useful in monitor mode and for proper IBSS
1388 * merging.
1389 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1390 * field) is valid and contains the time the last symbol of the MPDU
1391 * (including FCS) was received.
1392 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START: The timestamp passed in the RX status (@mactime
1393 * field) is valid and contains the time the SYNC preamble was received.
1394 * @RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64: The timestamp passed in the RX status @mactime
1395 * is only for use in the radiotap timestamp header, not otherwise a valid
1396 * @mactime value. Note this is a separate flag so that we continue to see
1397 * %RX_FLAG_MACTIME as unset. Also note that in this case the timestamp is
1398 * reported to be 64 bits wide, not just 32.
1399 * @RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL: The signal strength value is not present.
1400 * Valid only for data frames (mainly A-MPDU)
1401 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS: A-MPDU details are known, in particular the reference
1402 * number (@ampdu_reference) must be populated and be a distinct number for
1403 * each A-MPDU
1404 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN: last subframe is known, should be set on all
1405 * subframes of a single A-MPDU
1406 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST: this subframe is the last subframe of the A-MPDU
1407 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR: A delimiter CRC error has been detected
1408 * on this subframe
1409 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN: The delimiter CRC field is known (the CRC
1410 * is stored in the @ampdu_delimiter_crc field)
1411 * @RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED: The mic was stripped of this packet. Decryption was
1412 * done by the hardware
1413 * @RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR: Report frame only to monitor interfaces without
1414 * processing it in any regular way.
1415 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1416 * them for sniffing purposes.
1417 * @RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR: Process and report frame to all interfaces except
1418 * monitor interfaces.
1419 * This is useful if drivers offload some frames but still want to report
1420 * them for sniffing purposes.
1421 * @RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE: Some drivers may prefer to report separate A-MSDU
1422 * subframes instead of a one huge frame for performance reasons.
1423 * All, but the last MSDU from an A-MSDU should have this flag set. E.g.
1424 * if an A-MSDU has 3 frames, the first 2 must have the flag set, while
1425 * the 3rd (last) one must not have this flag set. The flag is used to
1426 * deal with retransmission/duplication recovery properly since A-MSDU
1427 * subframes share the same sequence number. Reported subframes can be
1428 * either regular MSDU or singly A-MSDUs. Subframes must not be
1429 * interleaved with other frames.
1430 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END: This frame contains radiotap TLVs in the
1431 * skb->data (before the 802.11 header).
1432 * If used, the SKB's mac_header pointer must be set to point
1433 * to the 802.11 header after the TLVs, and any padding added after TLV
1434 * data to align to 4 must be cleared by the driver putting the TLVs
1435 * in the skb.
1436 * @RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN: Allow the same PN as same packet before.
1437 * This is used for AMSDU subframes which can have the same PN as
1438 * the first subframe.
1439 * @RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED: The ICV is stripped from this frame. CRC checking must
1440 * be done in the hardware.
1441 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT: Value of the EOF bit in the A-MPDU delimiter for this
1442 * frame
1443 * @RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN: The EOF value is known
1444 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE: HE radiotap data is present
1445 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he, mac80211 will fill in
1446 *
1447 * - DATA3_DATA_MCS
1448 * - DATA3_DATA_DCM
1449 * - DATA3_CODING
1450 * - DATA5_GI
1451 * - DATA5_DATA_BW_RU_ALLOC
1452 * - DATA6_NSTS
1453 * - DATA3_STBC
1454 *
1455 * from the RX info data, so leave those zeroed when building this data)
1456 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU: HE MU radiotap data is present
1457 * (&struct ieee80211_radiotap_he_mu)
1458 * @RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG: L-SIG radiotap data is present
1459 * @RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU: use the frame only for radiotap reporting, with
1460 * the "0-length PSDU" field included there. The value for it is
1461 * in &struct ieee80211_rx_status. Note that if this value isn't
1462 * known the frame shouldn't be reported.
1463 * @RX_FLAG_8023: the frame has an 802.3 header (decap offload performed by
1464 * hardware or driver)
1465 */
1466enum mac80211_rx_flags {
1467 RX_FLAG_MMIC_ERROR = BIT(0),
1468 RX_FLAG_DECRYPTED = BIT(1),
1469 RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR = BIT(2),
1470 RX_FLAG_MMIC_STRIPPED = BIT(3),
1471 RX_FLAG_IV_STRIPPED = BIT(4),
1472 RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC = BIT(5),
1473 RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC = BIT(6),
1474 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_IS_RTAP_TS64 = BIT(7),
1475 RX_FLAG_NO_SIGNAL_VAL = BIT(8),
1476 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DETAILS = BIT(9),
1477 RX_FLAG_PN_VALIDATED = BIT(10),
1478 RX_FLAG_DUP_VALIDATED = BIT(11),
1479 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_LAST_KNOWN = BIT(12),
1480 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_IS_LAST = BIT(13),
1481 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_ERROR = BIT(14),
1482 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_DELIM_CRC_KNOWN = BIT(15),
1483 RX_FLAG_MACTIME = BIT(16) | BIT(17),
1484 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_PLCP_START = 1 << 16,
1485 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_START = 2 << 16,
1486 RX_FLAG_MACTIME_END = 3 << 16,
1487 RX_FLAG_SKIP_MONITOR = BIT(18),
1488 RX_FLAG_AMSDU_MORE = BIT(19),
1489 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_TLV_AT_END = BIT(20),
1490 RX_FLAG_MIC_STRIPPED = BIT(21),
1491 RX_FLAG_ALLOW_SAME_PN = BIT(22),
1492 RX_FLAG_ICV_STRIPPED = BIT(23),
1493 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT = BIT(24),
1494 RX_FLAG_AMPDU_EOF_BIT_KNOWN = BIT(25),
1495 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE = BIT(26),
1496 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_HE_MU = BIT(27),
1497 RX_FLAG_RADIOTAP_LSIG = BIT(28),
1498 RX_FLAG_NO_PSDU = BIT(29),
1499 RX_FLAG_8023 = BIT(30),
1500};
1501
1502/**
1503 * enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags - MCS & bandwidth flags
1504 *
1505 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE: Short preamble was used for this frame
1506 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI: Short guard interval was used
1507 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF: This frame was received in a HT-greenfield transmission,
1508 * if the driver fills this value it should add
1509 * %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_FMT
1510 * to @hw.radiotap_mcs_details to advertise that fact.
1511 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC: LDPC was used
1512 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK: STBC 2 bit bitmask. 1 - Nss=1, 2 - Nss=2, 3 - Nss=3
1513 * @RX_ENC_FLAG_BF: packet was beamformed
1514 */
1515enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags {
1516 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORTPRE = BIT(0),
1517 RX_ENC_FLAG_SHORT_GI = BIT(2),
1518 RX_ENC_FLAG_HT_GF = BIT(3),
1519 RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_MASK = BIT(4) | BIT(5),
1520 RX_ENC_FLAG_LDPC = BIT(6),
1521 RX_ENC_FLAG_BF = BIT(7),
1522};
1523
1524#define RX_ENC_FLAG_STBC_SHIFT 4
1525
1526enum mac80211_rx_encoding {
1527 RX_ENC_LEGACY = 0,
1528 RX_ENC_HT,
1529 RX_ENC_VHT,
1530 RX_ENC_HE,
1531 RX_ENC_EHT,
1532};
1533
1534/**
1535 * struct ieee80211_rx_status - receive status
1536 *
1537 * The low-level driver should provide this information (the subset
1538 * supported by hardware) to the 802.11 code with each received
1539 * frame, in the skb's control buffer (cb).
1540 *
1541 * @mactime: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization Function
1542 * (TSF) timer when the first data symbol (MPDU) arrived at the hardware.
1543 * @boottime_ns: CLOCK_BOOTTIME timestamp the frame was received at, this is
1544 * needed only for beacons and probe responses that update the scan cache.
1545 * @ack_tx_hwtstamp: Hardware timestamp for the ack TX in nanoseconds. Only
1546 * needed for Timing measurement and Fine timing measurement action frames.
1547 * Only reported by devices that have timestamping enabled.
1548 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, mac80211 doesn't use
1549 * it but can store it and pass it back to the driver for synchronisation
1550 * @band: the active band when this frame was received
1551 * @freq: frequency the radio was tuned to when receiving this frame, in MHz
1552 * This field must be set for management frames, but isn't strictly needed
1553 * for data (other) frames - for those it only affects radiotap reporting.
1554 * @freq_offset: @freq has a positive offset of 500Khz.
1555 * @signal: signal strength when receiving this frame, either in dBm, in dB or
1556 * unspecified depending on the hardware capabilities flags
1557 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_*
1558 * @chains: bitmask of receive chains for which separate signal strength
1559 * values were filled.
1560 * @chain_signal: per-chain signal strength, in dBm (unlike @signal, doesn't
1561 * support dB or unspecified units)
1562 * @antenna: antenna used
1563 * @rate_idx: index of data rate into band's supported rates or MCS index if
1564 * HT or VHT is used (%RX_FLAG_HT/%RX_FLAG_VHT)
1565 * @nss: number of streams (VHT, HE and EHT only)
1566 * @flag: %RX_FLAG_\*
1567 * @encoding: &enum mac80211_rx_encoding
1568 * @bw: &enum rate_info_bw
1569 * @enc_flags: uses bits from &enum mac80211_rx_encoding_flags
1570 * @he_ru: HE RU, from &enum nl80211_he_ru_alloc
1571 * @he_gi: HE GI, from &enum nl80211_he_gi
1572 * @he_dcm: HE DCM value
1573 * @eht: EHT specific rate information
1574 * @eht.ru: EHT RU, from &enum nl80211_eht_ru_alloc
1575 * @eht.gi: EHT GI, from &enum nl80211_eht_gi
1576 * @rx_flags: internal RX flags for mac80211
1577 * @ampdu_reference: A-MPDU reference number, must be a different value for
1578 * each A-MPDU but the same for each subframe within one A-MPDU
1579 * @ampdu_delimiter_crc: A-MPDU delimiter CRC
1580 * @zero_length_psdu_type: radiotap type of the 0-length PSDU
1581 * @link_valid: if the link which is identified by @link_id is valid. This flag
1582 * is set only when connection is MLO.
1583 * @link_id: id of the link used to receive the packet. This is used along with
1584 * @link_valid.
1585 */
1586struct ieee80211_rx_status {
1587 u64 mactime;
1588 union {
1589 u64 boottime_ns;
1590 ktime_t ack_tx_hwtstamp;
1591 };
1592 u32 device_timestamp;
1593 u32 ampdu_reference;
1594 u32 flag;
1595 u16 freq: 13, freq_offset: 1;
1596 u8 enc_flags;
1597 u8 encoding:3, bw:4;
1598 union {
1599 struct {
1600 u8 he_ru:3;
1601 u8 he_gi:2;
1602 u8 he_dcm:1;
1603 };
1604 struct {
1605 u8 ru:4;
1606 u8 gi:2;
1607 } eht;
1608 };
1609 u8 rate_idx;
1610 u8 nss;
1611 u8 rx_flags;
1612 u8 band;
1613 u8 antenna;
1614 s8 signal;
1615 u8 chains;
1616 s8 chain_signal[IEEE80211_MAX_CHAINS];
1617 u8 ampdu_delimiter_crc;
1618 u8 zero_length_psdu_type;
1619 u8 link_valid:1, link_id:4;
1620};
1621
1622static inline u32
1623ieee80211_rx_status_to_khz(struct ieee80211_rx_status *rx_status)
1624{
1625 return MHZ_TO_KHZ(rx_status->freq) +
1626 (rx_status->freq_offset ? 500 : 0);
1627}
1628
1629/**
1630 * enum ieee80211_conf_flags - configuration flags
1631 *
1632 * Flags to define PHY configuration options
1633 *
1634 * @IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR: there's a monitor interface present -- use this
1635 * to determine for example whether to calculate timestamps for packets
1636 * or not, do not use instead of filter flags!
1637 * @IEEE80211_CONF_PS: Enable 802.11 power save mode (managed mode only).
1638 * This is the power save mode defined by IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2,
1639 * meaning that the hardware still wakes up for beacons, is able to
1640 * transmit frames and receive the possible acknowledgment frames.
1641 * Not to be confused with hardware specific wakeup/sleep states,
1642 * driver is responsible for that. See the section "Powersave support"
1643 * for more.
1644 * @IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE: The device is running, but idle; if the flag is set
1645 * the driver should be prepared to handle configuration requests but
1646 * may turn the device off as much as possible. Typically, this flag will
1647 * be set when an interface is set UP but not associated or scanning, but
1648 * it can also be unset in that case when monitor interfaces are active.
1649 * @IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL: The device is currently not on its main
1650 * operating channel.
1651 */
1652enum ieee80211_conf_flags {
1653 IEEE80211_CONF_MONITOR = (1<<0),
1654 IEEE80211_CONF_PS = (1<<1),
1655 IEEE80211_CONF_IDLE = (1<<2),
1656 IEEE80211_CONF_OFFCHANNEL = (1<<3),
1657};
1658
1659
1660/**
1661 * enum ieee80211_conf_changed - denotes which configuration changed
1662 *
1663 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL: the listen interval changed
1664 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR: the monitor flag changed
1665 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS: the PS flag or dynamic PS timeout changed
1666 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER: the TX power changed
1667 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL: the channel/channel_type changed
1668 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS: retry limits changed
1669 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE: Idle flag changed
1670 * @IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS: Spatial multiplexing powersave mode changed
1671 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1672 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1673 */
1674enum ieee80211_conf_changed {
1675 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_SMPS = BIT(1),
1676 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_LISTEN_INTERVAL = BIT(2),
1677 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_MONITOR = BIT(3),
1678 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_PS = BIT(4),
1679 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_POWER = BIT(5),
1680 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_CHANNEL = BIT(6),
1681 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_RETRY_LIMITS = BIT(7),
1682 IEEE80211_CONF_CHANGE_IDLE = BIT(8),
1683};
1684
1685/**
1686 * enum ieee80211_smps_mode - spatial multiplexing power save mode
1687 *
1688 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC: automatic
1689 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF: off
1690 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC: static
1691 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC: dynamic
1692 * @IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES: internal, don't use
1693 */
1694enum ieee80211_smps_mode {
1695 IEEE80211_SMPS_AUTOMATIC,
1696 IEEE80211_SMPS_OFF,
1697 IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC,
1698 IEEE80211_SMPS_DYNAMIC,
1699
1700 /* keep last */
1701 IEEE80211_SMPS_NUM_MODES,
1702};
1703
1704/**
1705 * struct ieee80211_conf - configuration of the device
1706 *
1707 * This struct indicates how the driver shall configure the hardware.
1708 *
1709 * @flags: configuration flags defined above
1710 *
1711 * @listen_interval: listen interval in units of beacon interval
1712 * @ps_dtim_period: The DTIM period of the AP we're connected to, for use
1713 * in power saving. Power saving will not be enabled until a beacon
1714 * has been received and the DTIM period is known.
1715 * @dynamic_ps_timeout: The dynamic powersave timeout (in ms), see the
1716 * powersave documentation below. This variable is valid only when
1717 * the CONF_PS flag is set.
1718 *
1719 * @power_level: requested transmit power (in dBm), backward compatibility
1720 * value only that is set to the minimum of all interfaces
1721 *
1722 * @chandef: the channel definition to tune to
1723 * @radar_enabled: whether radar detection is enabled
1724 *
1725 * @long_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "long" frame
1726 * (a frame not RTS protected), called "dot11LongRetryLimit" in 802.11,
1727 * but actually means the number of transmissions not the number of retries
1728 * @short_frame_max_tx_count: Maximum number of transmissions for a "short"
1729 * frame, called "dot11ShortRetryLimit" in 802.11, but actually means the
1730 * number of transmissions not the number of retries
1731 *
1732 * @smps_mode: spatial multiplexing powersave mode; note that
1733 * %IEEE80211_SMPS_STATIC is used when the device is not
1734 * configured for an HT channel.
1735 * Note that this is only valid if channel contexts are not used,
1736 * otherwise each channel context has the number of chains listed.
1737 */
1738struct ieee80211_conf {
1739 u32 flags;
1740 int power_level, dynamic_ps_timeout;
1741
1742 u16 listen_interval;
1743 u8 ps_dtim_period;
1744
1745 u8 long_frame_max_tx_count, short_frame_max_tx_count;
1746
1747 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1748 bool radar_enabled;
1749 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
1750};
1751
1752/**
1753 * struct ieee80211_channel_switch - holds the channel switch data
1754 *
1755 * The information provided in this structure is required for channel switch
1756 * operation.
1757 *
1758 * @timestamp: value in microseconds of the 64-bit Time Synchronization
1759 * Function (TSF) timer when the frame containing the channel switch
1760 * announcement was received. This is simply the rx.mactime parameter
1761 * the driver passed into mac80211.
1762 * @device_timestamp: arbitrary timestamp for the device, this is the
1763 * rx.device_timestamp parameter the driver passed to mac80211.
1764 * @block_tx: Indicates whether transmission must be blocked before the
1765 * scheduled channel switch, as indicated by the AP.
1766 * @chandef: the new channel to switch to
1767 * @count: the number of TBTT's until the channel switch event
1768 * @delay: maximum delay between the time the AP transmitted the last beacon in
1769 * current channel and the expected time of the first beacon in the new
1770 * channel, expressed in TU.
1771 * @link_id: the link ID of the link doing the channel switch, 0 for non-MLO
1772 */
1773struct ieee80211_channel_switch {
1774 u64 timestamp;
1775 u32 device_timestamp;
1776 bool block_tx;
1777 struct cfg80211_chan_def chandef;
1778 u8 count;
1779 u8 link_id;
1780 u32 delay;
1781};
1782
1783/**
1784 * enum ieee80211_vif_flags - virtual interface flags
1785 *
1786 * @IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER: the device performs beacon filtering
1787 * on this virtual interface to avoid unnecessary CPU wakeups
1788 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI: the device can do connection quality
1789 * monitoring on this virtual interface -- i.e. it can monitor
1790 * connection quality related parameters, such as the RSSI level and
1791 * provide notifications if configured trigger levels are reached.
1792 * @IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD: The device can do U-APSD for this
1793 * interface. This flag should be set during interface addition,
1794 * but may be set/cleared as late as authentication to an AP. It is
1795 * only valid for managed/station mode interfaces.
1796 * @IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE: request to handle NOA attributes
1797 * and send P2P_PS notification to the driver if NOA changed, even
1798 * this is not pure P2P vif.
1799 * @IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE: The driver indicates that EML operation is
1800 * enabled for the interface.
1801 * @IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW: Ignore wider bandwidth OFDMA
1802 * operation on this interface and request a channel context without
1803 * the AP definition. Use this e.g. because the device is able to
1804 * handle OFDMA (downlink and trigger for uplink) on a per-AP basis.
1805 */
1806enum ieee80211_vif_flags {
1807 IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER = BIT(0),
1808 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI = BIT(1),
1809 IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD = BIT(2),
1810 IEEE80211_VIF_GET_NOA_UPDATE = BIT(3),
1811 IEEE80211_VIF_EML_ACTIVE = BIT(4),
1812 IEEE80211_VIF_IGNORE_OFDMA_WIDER_BW = BIT(5),
1813};
1814
1815
1816/**
1817 * enum ieee80211_offload_flags - virtual interface offload flags
1818 *
1819 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED: tx encapsulation offload is enabled
1820 * The driver supports sending frames passed as 802.3 frames by mac80211.
1821 * It must also support sending 802.11 packets for the same interface.
1822 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR: support 4-address mode encapsulation offload
1823 * @IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED: rx encapsulation offload is enabled
1824 * The driver supports passing received 802.11 frames as 802.3 frames to
1825 * mac80211.
1826 */
1827
1828enum ieee80211_offload_flags {
1829 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_ENABLED = BIT(0),
1830 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_ENCAP_4ADDR = BIT(1),
1831 IEEE80211_OFFLOAD_DECAP_ENABLED = BIT(2),
1832};
1833
1834/**
1835 * struct ieee80211_vif_cfg - interface configuration
1836 * @assoc: association status
1837 * @ibss_joined: indicates whether this station is part of an IBSS or not
1838 * @ibss_creator: indicates if a new IBSS network is being created
1839 * @ps: power-save mode (STA only). This flag is NOT affected by
1840 * offchannel/dynamic_ps operations.
1841 * @aid: association ID number, valid only when @assoc is true
1842 * @eml_cap: EML capabilities as described in P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001j.
1843 * @eml_med_sync_delay: Medium Synchronization delay as described in
1844 * P802.11be_D4.1 Figure 9-1001i.
1845 * @mld_capa_op: MLD Capabilities and Operations per P802.11be_D4.1
1846 * Figure 9-1001k
1847 * @arp_addr_list: List of IPv4 addresses for hardware ARP filtering. The
1848 * may filter ARP queries targeted for other addresses than listed here.
1849 * The driver must allow ARP queries targeted for all address listed here
1850 * to pass through. An empty list implies no ARP queries need to pass.
1851 * @arp_addr_cnt: Number of addresses currently on the list. Note that this
1852 * may be larger than %IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN (the arp_addr_list
1853 * array size), it's up to the driver what to do in that case.
1854 * @ssid: The SSID of the current vif. Valid in AP and IBSS mode.
1855 * @ssid_len: Length of SSID given in @ssid.
1856 * @s1g: BSS is S1G BSS (affects Association Request format).
1857 * @idle: This interface is idle. There's also a global idle flag in the
1858 * hardware config which may be more appropriate depending on what
1859 * your driver/device needs to do.
1860 * @ap_addr: AP MLD address, or BSSID for non-MLO connections
1861 * (station mode only)
1862 */
1863struct ieee80211_vif_cfg {
1864 /* association related data */
1865 bool assoc, ibss_joined;
1866 bool ibss_creator;
1867 bool ps;
1868 u16 aid;
1869 u16 eml_cap;
1870 u16 eml_med_sync_delay;
1871 u16 mld_capa_op;
1872
1873 __be32 arp_addr_list[IEEE80211_BSS_ARP_ADDR_LIST_LEN];
1874 int arp_addr_cnt;
1875 u8 ssid[IEEE80211_MAX_SSID_LEN];
1876 size_t ssid_len;
1877 bool s1g;
1878 bool idle;
1879 u8 ap_addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1880};
1881
1882#define IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS 8
1883
1884/**
1885 * struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm - negotiated TID to link map info
1886 *
1887 * @downlink: bitmap of active links per TID for downlink, or 0 if mapping for
1888 * this TID is not included.
1889 * @uplink: bitmap of active links per TID for uplink, or 0 if mapping for this
1890 * TID is not included.
1891 * @valid: info is valid or not.
1892 */
1893struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm {
1894 u16 downlink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS];
1895 u16 uplink[IEEE80211_TTLM_NUM_TIDS];
1896 bool valid;
1897};
1898
1899/**
1900 * enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res - return value for negotiated TTLM handling
1901 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT: accept the request
1902 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT: reject the request
1903 * @NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED: reject and suggest a new mapping
1904 */
1905enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res {
1906 NEG_TTLM_RES_ACCEPT,
1907 NEG_TTLM_RES_REJECT,
1908 NEG_TTLM_RES_SUGGEST_PREFERRED
1909};
1910
1911/**
1912 * struct ieee80211_vif - per-interface data
1913 *
1914 * Data in this structure is continually present for driver
1915 * use during the life of a virtual interface.
1916 *
1917 * @type: type of this virtual interface
1918 * @cfg: vif configuration, see &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg
1919 * @bss_conf: BSS configuration for this interface, either our own
1920 * or the BSS we're associated to
1921 * @link_conf: in case of MLD, the per-link BSS configuration,
1922 * indexed by link ID
1923 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1924 * @active_links: The bitmap of active links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1925 * The driver shouldn't change this directly, but use the
1926 * API calls meant for that purpose.
1927 * @dormant_links: bitmap of valid but disabled links, or 0 for non-MLO.
1928 * Must be a subset of valid_links.
1929 * @suspended_links: subset of dormant_links representing links that are
1930 * suspended.
1931 * 0 for non-MLO.
1932 * @neg_ttlm: negotiated TID to link mapping info.
1933 * see &struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm.
1934 * @addr: address of this interface
1935 * @p2p: indicates whether this AP or STA interface is a p2p
1936 * interface, i.e. a GO or p2p-sta respectively
1937 * @netdev_features: tx netdev features supported by the hardware for this
1938 * vif. mac80211 initializes this to hw->netdev_features, and the driver
1939 * can mask out specific tx features. mac80211 will handle software fixup
1940 * for masked offloads (GSO, CSUM)
1941 * @driver_flags: flags/capabilities the driver has for this interface,
1942 * these need to be set (or cleared) when the interface is added
1943 * or, if supported by the driver, the interface type is changed
1944 * at runtime, mac80211 will never touch this field
1945 * @offload_flags: hardware offload capabilities/flags for this interface.
1946 * These are initialized by mac80211 before calling .add_interface,
1947 * .change_interface or .update_vif_offload and updated by the driver
1948 * within these ops, based on supported features or runtime change
1949 * restrictions.
1950 * @hw_queue: hardware queue for each AC
1951 * @cab_queue: content-after-beacon (DTIM beacon really) queue, AP mode only
1952 * @debugfs_dir: debugfs dentry, can be used by drivers to create own per
1953 * interface debug files. Note that it will be NULL for the virtual
1954 * monitor interface (if that is requested.)
1955 * @probe_req_reg: probe requests should be reported to mac80211 for this
1956 * interface.
1957 * @rx_mcast_action_reg: multicast Action frames should be reported to mac80211
1958 * for this interface.
1959 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
1960 * sizeof(void \*).
1961 * @txq: the multicast data TX queue
1962 * @offload_flags: 802.3 -> 802.11 enapsulation offload flags, see
1963 * &enum ieee80211_offload_flags.
1964 * @mbssid_tx_vif: Pointer to the transmitting interface if MBSSID is enabled.
1965 */
1966struct ieee80211_vif {
1967 enum nl80211_iftype type;
1968 struct ieee80211_vif_cfg cfg;
1969 struct ieee80211_bss_conf bss_conf;
1970 struct ieee80211_bss_conf __rcu *link_conf[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
1971 u16 valid_links, active_links, dormant_links, suspended_links;
1972 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm neg_ttlm;
1973 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN] __aligned(2);
1974 bool p2p;
1975
1976 u8 cab_queue;
1977 u8 hw_queue[IEEE80211_NUM_ACS];
1978
1979 struct ieee80211_txq *txq;
1980
1981 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
1982 u32 driver_flags;
1983 u32 offload_flags;
1984
1985#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
1986 struct dentry *debugfs_dir;
1987#endif
1988
1989 bool probe_req_reg;
1990 bool rx_mcast_action_reg;
1991
1992 struct ieee80211_vif *mbssid_tx_vif;
1993
1994 /* must be last */
1995 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
1996};
1997
1998/**
1999 * ieee80211_vif_usable_links - Return the usable links for the vif
2000 * @vif: the vif for which the usable links are requested
2001 * Return: the usable link bitmap
2002 */
2003static inline u16 ieee80211_vif_usable_links(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
2004{
2005 return vif->valid_links & ~vif->dormant_links;
2006}
2007
2008/**
2009 * ieee80211_vif_is_mld - Returns true iff the vif is an MLD one
2010 * @vif: the vif
2011 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD, %false otherwise.
2012 */
2013static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mld(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
2014{
2015 /* valid_links != 0 indicates this vif is an MLD */
2016 return vif->valid_links != 0;
2017}
2018
2019/**
2020 * ieee80211_vif_link_active - check if a given link is active
2021 * @vif: the vif
2022 * @link_id: the link ID to check
2023 * Return: %true if the vif is an MLD and the link is active, or if
2024 * the vif is not an MLD and the link ID is 0; %false otherwise.
2025 */
2026static inline bool ieee80211_vif_link_active(const struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
2027 unsigned int link_id)
2028{
2029 if (!ieee80211_vif_is_mld(vif))
2030 return link_id == 0;
2031 return vif->active_links & BIT(link_id);
2032}
2033
2034#define for_each_vif_active_link(vif, link, link_id) \
2035 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((vif)->link_conf); link_id++) \
2036 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \
2037 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \
2038 (link = link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id)))
2039
2040static inline bool ieee80211_vif_is_mesh(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
2041{
2042#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_MESH
2043 return vif->type == NL80211_IFTYPE_MESH_POINT;
2044#endif
2045 return false;
2046}
2047
2048/**
2049 * wdev_to_ieee80211_vif - return a vif struct from a wdev
2050 * @wdev: the wdev to get the vif for
2051 *
2052 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
2053 * (like the vendor commands) that get a wdev.
2054 *
2055 * Note that this function may return %NULL if the given wdev isn't
2056 * associated with a vif that the driver knows about (e.g. monitor
2057 * or AP_VLAN interfaces.)
2058 */
2059struct ieee80211_vif *wdev_to_ieee80211_vif(struct wireless_dev *wdev);
2060
2061/**
2062 * ieee80211_vif_to_wdev - return a wdev struct from a vif
2063 * @vif: the vif to get the wdev for
2064 *
2065 * This can be used by mac80211 drivers with direct cfg80211 APIs
2066 * (like the vendor commands) that needs to get the wdev for a vif.
2067 * This can also be useful to get the netdev associated to a vif.
2068 */
2069struct wireless_dev *ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
2070
2071static inline bool lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
2072{
2073 return lockdep_is_held(&ieee80211_vif_to_wdev(vif)->wiphy->mtx);
2074}
2075
2076#define link_conf_dereference_protected(vif, link_id) \
2077 rcu_dereference_protected((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \
2078 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif))
2079
2080#define link_conf_dereference_check(vif, link_id) \
2081 rcu_dereference_check((vif)->link_conf[link_id], \
2082 lockdep_vif_wiphy_mutex_held(vif))
2083
2084/**
2085 * enum ieee80211_key_flags - key flags
2086 *
2087 * These flags are used for communication about keys between the driver
2088 * and mac80211, with the @flags parameter of &struct ieee80211_key_conf.
2089 *
2090 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV: This flag should be set by the
2091 * driver to indicate that it requires IV generation for this
2092 * particular key. Setting this flag does not necessarily mean that SKBs
2093 * will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or MIC.
2094 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC: This flag should be set by
2095 * the driver for a TKIP key if it requires Michael MIC
2096 * generation in software.
2097 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE: Set by mac80211, this flag indicates
2098 * that the key is pairwise rather then a shared key.
2099 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX: This flag should be set by the driver for a
2100 * CCMP/GCMP key if it requires CCMP/GCMP encryption of management frames
2101 * (MFP) to be done in software.
2102 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver
2103 * if space should be prepared for the IV, but the IV
2104 * itself should not be generated. Do not set together with
2105 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV on the same key. Setting this flag does
2106 * not necessarily mean that SKBs will have sufficient tailroom for ICV or
2107 * MIC.
2108 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT: This key will be used to decrypt received
2109 * management frames. The flag can help drivers that have a hardware
2110 * crypto implementation that doesn't deal with management frames
2111 * properly by allowing them to not upload the keys to hardware and
2112 * fall back to software crypto. Note that this flag deals only with
2113 * RX, if your crypto engine can't deal with TX you can also set the
2114 * %IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX flag to encrypt such frames in SW.
2115 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT: This flag should be set by the
2116 * driver for a CCMP/GCMP key to indicate that is requires IV generation
2117 * only for management frames (MFP).
2118 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM: This flag should be set by the
2119 * driver for a key to indicate that sufficient tailroom must always
2120 * be reserved for ICV or MIC, even when HW encryption is enabled.
2121 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE: This flag should be set by the driver for
2122 * a TKIP key if it only requires MIC space. Do not set together with
2123 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC on the same key.
2124 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX: Key needs explicit Tx activation.
2125 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE: This flag should be set by the driver
2126 * for a AES_CMAC key to indicate that it requires sequence number
2127 * generation only
2128 * @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU: SPP A-MSDUs can be used with this key
2129 * (set by mac80211 from the sta->spp_amsdu flag)
2130 */
2131enum ieee80211_key_flags {
2132 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV_MGMT = BIT(0),
2133 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV = BIT(1),
2134 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIC = BIT(2),
2135 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PAIRWISE = BIT(3),
2136 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SW_MGMT_TX = BIT(4),
2137 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_IV_SPACE = BIT(5),
2138 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RX_MGMT = BIT(6),
2139 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_RESERVE_TAILROOM = BIT(7),
2140 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_PUT_MIC_SPACE = BIT(8),
2141 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_NO_AUTO_TX = BIT(9),
2142 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_MMIE = BIT(10),
2143 IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_SPP_AMSDU = BIT(11),
2144};
2145
2146/**
2147 * struct ieee80211_key_conf - key information
2148 *
2149 * This key information is given by mac80211 to the driver by
2150 * the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops.
2151 *
2152 * @hw_key_idx: To be set by the driver, this is the key index the driver
2153 * wants to be given when a frame is transmitted and needs to be
2154 * encrypted in hardware.
2155 * @cipher: The key's cipher suite selector.
2156 * @tx_pn: PN used for TX keys, may be used by the driver as well if it
2157 * needs to do software PN assignment by itself (e.g. due to TSO)
2158 * @flags: key flags, see &enum ieee80211_key_flags.
2159 * @keyidx: the key index (0-3)
2160 * @keylen: key material length
2161 * @key: key material. For ALG_TKIP the key is encoded as a 256-bit (32 byte)
2162 * data block:
2163 * - Temporal Encryption Key (128 bits)
2164 * - Temporal Authenticator Tx MIC Key (64 bits)
2165 * - Temporal Authenticator Rx MIC Key (64 bits)
2166 * @icv_len: The ICV length for this key type
2167 * @iv_len: The IV length for this key type
2168 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, or -1 for non-MLO or pairwise keys
2169 */
2170struct ieee80211_key_conf {
2171 atomic64_t tx_pn;
2172 u32 cipher;
2173 u8 icv_len;
2174 u8 iv_len;
2175 u8 hw_key_idx;
2176 s8 keyidx;
2177 u16 flags;
2178 s8 link_id;
2179 u8 keylen;
2180 u8 key[];
2181};
2182
2183#define IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN 16
2184
2185#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV16(pn) ((u16)(pn & 0xffff))
2186#define TKIP_PN_TO_IV32(pn) ((u32)((pn >> 16) & 0xffffffff))
2187
2188/**
2189 * struct ieee80211_key_seq - key sequence counter
2190 *
2191 * @tkip: TKIP data, containing IV32 and IV16 in host byte order
2192 * @ccmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2193 * reverse order than in packet)
2194 * @aes_cmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2195 * reverse order than in packet)
2196 * @aes_gmac: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2197 * reverse order than in packet)
2198 * @gcmp: PN data, most significant byte first (big endian,
2199 * reverse order than in packet)
2200 * @hw: data for HW-only (e.g. cipher scheme) keys
2201 */
2202struct ieee80211_key_seq {
2203 union {
2204 struct {
2205 u32 iv32;
2206 u16 iv16;
2207 } tkip;
2208 struct {
2209 u8 pn[6];
2210 } ccmp;
2211 struct {
2212 u8 pn[6];
2213 } aes_cmac;
2214 struct {
2215 u8 pn[6];
2216 } aes_gmac;
2217 struct {
2218 u8 pn[6];
2219 } gcmp;
2220 struct {
2221 u8 seq[IEEE80211_MAX_PN_LEN];
2222 u8 seq_len;
2223 } hw;
2224 };
2225};
2226
2227/**
2228 * enum set_key_cmd - key command
2229 *
2230 * Used with the set_key() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2231 * indicates whether a key is being removed or added.
2232 *
2233 * @SET_KEY: a key is set
2234 * @DISABLE_KEY: a key must be disabled
2235 */
2236enum set_key_cmd {
2237 SET_KEY, DISABLE_KEY,
2238};
2239
2240/**
2241 * enum ieee80211_sta_state - station state
2242 *
2243 * @IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST: station doesn't exist at all,
2244 * this is a special state for add/remove transitions
2245 * @IEEE80211_STA_NONE: station exists without special state
2246 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTH: station is authenticated
2247 * @IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC: station is associated
2248 * @IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED: station is authorized (802.1X)
2249 */
2250enum ieee80211_sta_state {
2251 /* NOTE: These need to be ordered correctly! */
2252 IEEE80211_STA_NOTEXIST,
2253 IEEE80211_STA_NONE,
2254 IEEE80211_STA_AUTH,
2255 IEEE80211_STA_ASSOC,
2256 IEEE80211_STA_AUTHORIZED,
2257};
2258
2259/**
2260 * enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth - station RX bandwidth
2261 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20: station can only receive 20 MHz
2262 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40: station can receive up to 40 MHz
2263 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80: station can receive up to 80 MHz
2264 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160: station can receive up to 160 MHz
2265 * (including 80+80 MHz)
2266 * @IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320: station can receive up to 320 MHz
2267 *
2268 * Implementation note: 20 must be zero to be initialized
2269 * correctly, the values must be sorted.
2270 */
2271enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth {
2272 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_20 = 0,
2273 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_40,
2274 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_80,
2275 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_160,
2276 IEEE80211_STA_RX_BW_320,
2277};
2278
2279/**
2280 * struct ieee80211_sta_rates - station rate selection table
2281 *
2282 * @rcu_head: RCU head used for freeing the table on update
2283 * @rate: transmit rates/flags to be used by default.
2284 * Overriding entries per-packet is possible by using cb tx control.
2285 */
2286struct ieee80211_sta_rates {
2287 struct rcu_head rcu_head;
2288 struct {
2289 s8 idx;
2290 u8 count;
2291 u8 count_cts;
2292 u8 count_rts;
2293 u16 flags;
2294 } rate[IEEE80211_TX_RATE_TABLE_SIZE];
2295};
2296
2297/**
2298 * struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr - station txpower configuration
2299 *
2300 * Used to configure txpower for station.
2301 *
2302 * @power: indicates the tx power, in dBm, to be used when sending data frames
2303 * to the STA.
2304 * @type: In particular if TPC %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_LIMITED then tx power
2305 * will be less than or equal to specified from userspace, whereas if TPC
2306 * %type is NL80211_TX_POWER_AUTOMATIC then it indicates default tx power.
2307 * NL80211_TX_POWER_FIXED is not a valid configuration option for
2308 * per peer TPC.
2309 */
2310struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr {
2311 s16 power;
2312 enum nl80211_tx_power_setting type;
2313};
2314
2315/**
2316 * struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates - info that is aggregated from active links
2317 *
2318 * Used for any per-link data that needs to be aggregated and updated in the
2319 * main &struct ieee80211_sta when updated or the active links change.
2320 *
2321 * @max_amsdu_len: indicates the maximal length of an A-MSDU in bytes.
2322 * This field is always valid for packets with a VHT preamble.
2323 * For packets with a HT preamble, additional limits apply:
2324 *
2325 * * If the skb is transmitted as part of a BA agreement, the
2326 * A-MSDU maximal size is min(max_amsdu_len, 4065) bytes.
2327 * * If the skb is not part of a BA agreement, the A-MSDU maximal
2328 * size is min(max_amsdu_len, 7935) bytes.
2329 *
2330 * Both additional HT limits must be enforced by the low level
2331 * driver. This is defined by the spec (IEEE 802.11-2012 section
2332 * 8.3.2.2 NOTE 2).
2333 * @max_rc_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes recommended by rate control.
2334 * @max_tid_amsdu_len: Maximum A-MSDU size in bytes for this TID
2335 */
2336struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates {
2337 u16 max_amsdu_len;
2338
2339 u16 max_rc_amsdu_len;
2340 u16 max_tid_amsdu_len[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS];
2341};
2342
2343/**
2344 * struct ieee80211_link_sta - station Link specific info
2345 * All link specific info for a STA link for a non MLD STA(single)
2346 * or a MLD STA(multiple entries) are stored here.
2347 *
2348 * @sta: reference to owning STA
2349 * @addr: MAC address of the Link STA. For non-MLO STA this is same as the addr
2350 * in ieee80211_sta. For MLO Link STA this addr can be same or different
2351 * from addr in ieee80211_sta (representing MLD STA addr)
2352 * @link_id: the link ID for this link STA (0 for deflink)
2353 * @smps_mode: current SMPS mode (off, static or dynamic)
2354 * @supp_rates: Bitmap of supported rates
2355 * @ht_cap: HT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2356 * @vht_cap: VHT capabilities of this STA; restricted to our own capabilities
2357 * @he_cap: HE capabilities of this STA
2358 * @he_6ghz_capa: on 6 GHz, holds the HE 6 GHz band capabilities
2359 * @eht_cap: EHT capabilities of this STA
2360 * @agg: per-link data for multi-link aggregation
2361 * @bandwidth: current bandwidth the station can receive with
2362 * @rx_nss: in HT/VHT, the maximum number of spatial streams the
2363 * station can receive at the moment, changed by operating mode
2364 * notifications and capabilities. The value is only valid after
2365 * the station moves to associated state.
2366 * @txpwr: the station tx power configuration
2367 *
2368 */
2369struct ieee80211_link_sta {
2370 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2371
2372 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2373 u8 link_id;
2374 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode;
2375
2376 u32 supp_rates[NUM_NL80211_BANDS];
2377 struct ieee80211_sta_ht_cap ht_cap;
2378 struct ieee80211_sta_vht_cap vht_cap;
2379 struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap he_cap;
2380 struct ieee80211_he_6ghz_capa he_6ghz_capa;
2381 struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap eht_cap;
2382
2383 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates agg;
2384
2385 u8 rx_nss;
2386 enum ieee80211_sta_rx_bandwidth bandwidth;
2387 struct ieee80211_sta_txpwr txpwr;
2388};
2389
2390/**
2391 * struct ieee80211_sta - station table entry
2392 *
2393 * A station table entry represents a station we are possibly
2394 * communicating with. Since stations are RCU-managed in
2395 * mac80211, any ieee80211_sta pointer you get access to must
2396 * either be protected by rcu_read_lock() explicitly or implicitly,
2397 * or you must take good care to not use such a pointer after a
2398 * call to your sta_remove callback that removed it.
2399 * This also represents the MLD STA in case of MLO association
2400 * and holds pointers to various link STA's
2401 *
2402 * @addr: MAC address
2403 * @aid: AID we assigned to the station if we're an AP
2404 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximal amount of frames in a single AMPDU
2405 * that this station is allowed to transmit to us.
2406 * Can be modified by driver.
2407 * @wme: indicates whether the STA supports QoS/WME (if local devices does,
2408 * otherwise always false)
2409 * @drv_priv: data area for driver use, will always be aligned to
2410 * sizeof(void \*), size is determined in hw information.
2411 * @uapsd_queues: bitmap of queues configured for uapsd. Only valid
2412 * if wme is supported. The bits order is like in
2413 * IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_*.
2414 * @max_sp: max Service Period. Only valid if wme is supported.
2415 * @rates: rate control selection table
2416 * @tdls: indicates whether the STA is a TDLS peer
2417 * @tdls_initiator: indicates the STA is an initiator of the TDLS link. Only
2418 * valid if the STA is a TDLS peer in the first place.
2419 * @mfp: indicates whether the STA uses management frame protection or not.
2420 * @mlo: indicates whether the STA is MLO station.
2421 * @max_amsdu_subframes: indicates the maximal number of MSDUs in a single
2422 * A-MSDU. Taken from the Extended Capabilities element. 0 means
2423 * unlimited.
2424 * @cur: currently valid data as aggregated from the active links
2425 * For non MLO STA it will point to the deflink data. For MLO STA
2426 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates() must be called to update it.
2427 * @support_p2p_ps: indicates whether the STA supports P2P PS mechanism or not.
2428 * @txq: per-TID data TX queues; note that the last entry (%IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS)
2429 * is used for non-data frames
2430 * @deflink: This holds the default link STA information, for non MLO STA all link
2431 * specific STA information is accessed through @deflink or through
2432 * link[0] which points to address of @deflink. For MLO Link STA
2433 * the first added link STA will point to deflink.
2434 * @link: reference to Link Sta entries. For Non MLO STA, except 1st link,
2435 * i.e link[0] all links would be assigned to NULL by default and
2436 * would access link information via @deflink or link[0]. For MLO
2437 * STA, first link STA being added will point its link pointer to
2438 * @deflink address and remaining would be allocated and the address
2439 * would be assigned to link[link_id] where link_id is the id assigned
2440 * by the AP.
2441 * @valid_links: bitmap of valid links, or 0 for non-MLO
2442 * @spp_amsdu: indicates whether the STA uses SPP A-MSDU or not.
2443 */
2444struct ieee80211_sta {
2445 u8 addr[ETH_ALEN];
2446 u16 aid;
2447 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2448 bool wme;
2449 u8 uapsd_queues;
2450 u8 max_sp;
2451 struct ieee80211_sta_rates __rcu *rates;
2452 bool tdls;
2453 bool tdls_initiator;
2454 bool mfp;
2455 bool mlo;
2456 bool spp_amsdu;
2457 u8 max_amsdu_subframes;
2458
2459 struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates *cur;
2460
2461 bool support_p2p_ps;
2462
2463 struct ieee80211_txq *txq[IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS + 1];
2464
2465 u16 valid_links;
2466 struct ieee80211_link_sta deflink;
2467 struct ieee80211_link_sta __rcu *link[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS];
2468
2469 /* must be last */
2470 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2471};
2472
2473#ifdef CONFIG_LOCKDEP
2474bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
2475#else
2476static inline bool lockdep_sta_mutex_held(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta)
2477{
2478 return true;
2479}
2480#endif
2481
2482#define link_sta_dereference_protected(sta, link_id) \
2483 rcu_dereference_protected((sta)->link[link_id], \
2484 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta))
2485
2486#define link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id) \
2487 rcu_dereference_check((sta)->link[link_id], \
2488 lockdep_sta_mutex_held(sta))
2489
2490#define for_each_sta_active_link(vif, sta, link_sta, link_id) \
2491 for (link_id = 0; link_id < ARRAY_SIZE((sta)->link); link_id++) \
2492 if ((!(vif)->active_links || \
2493 (vif)->active_links & BIT(link_id)) && \
2494 ((link_sta) = link_sta_dereference_check(sta, link_id)))
2495
2496/**
2497 * enum sta_notify_cmd - sta notify command
2498 *
2499 * Used with the sta_notify() callback in &struct ieee80211_ops, this
2500 * indicates if an associated station made a power state transition.
2501 *
2502 * @STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP: a station is now sleeping
2503 * @STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE: a sleeping station woke up
2504 */
2505enum sta_notify_cmd {
2506 STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP, STA_NOTIFY_AWAKE,
2507};
2508
2509/**
2510 * struct ieee80211_tx_control - TX control data
2511 *
2512 * @sta: station table entry, this sta pointer may be NULL and
2513 * it is not allowed to copy the pointer, due to RCU.
2514 */
2515struct ieee80211_tx_control {
2516 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2517};
2518
2519/**
2520 * struct ieee80211_txq - Software intermediate tx queue
2521 *
2522 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
2523 * @sta: station table entry, %NULL for per-vif queue
2524 * @tid: the TID for this queue (unused for per-vif queue),
2525 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS for non-data (if enabled)
2526 * @ac: the AC for this queue
2527 * @drv_priv: driver private area, sized by hw->txq_data_size
2528 *
2529 * The driver can obtain packets from this queue by calling
2530 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue().
2531 */
2532struct ieee80211_txq {
2533 struct ieee80211_vif *vif;
2534 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
2535 u8 tid;
2536 u8 ac;
2537
2538 /* must be last */
2539 u8 drv_priv[] __aligned(sizeof(void *));
2540};
2541
2542/**
2543 * enum ieee80211_hw_flags - hardware flags
2544 *
2545 * These flags are used to indicate hardware capabilities to
2546 * the stack. Generally, flags here should have their meaning
2547 * done in a way that the simplest hardware doesn't need setting
2548 * any particular flags. There are some exceptions to this rule,
2549 * however, so you are advised to review these flags carefully.
2550 *
2551 * @IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL:
2552 * The hardware or firmware includes rate control, and cannot be
2553 * controlled by the stack. As such, no rate control algorithm
2554 * should be instantiated, and the TX rate reported to userspace
2555 * will be taken from the TX status instead of the rate control
2556 * algorithm.
2557 * Note that this requires that the driver implement a number of
2558 * callbacks so it has the correct information, it needs to have
2559 * the @set_rts_threshold callback and must look at the BSS config
2560 * @use_cts_prot for G/N protection, @use_short_slot for slot
2561 * timing in 2.4 GHz and @use_short_preamble for preambles for
2562 * CCK frames.
2563 *
2564 * @IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS:
2565 * Indicates that received frames passed to the stack include
2566 * the FCS at the end.
2567 *
2568 * @IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING:
2569 * Some wireless LAN chipsets buffer broadcast/multicast frames
2570 * for power saving stations in the hardware/firmware and others
2571 * rely on the host system for such buffering. This option is used
2572 * to configure the IEEE 802.11 upper layer to buffer broadcast and
2573 * multicast frames when there are power saving stations so that
2574 * the driver can fetch them with ieee80211_get_buffered_bc().
2575 *
2576 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC:
2577 * Hardware can provide signal values but we don't know its units. We
2578 * expect values between 0 and @max_signal.
2579 * If possible please provide dB or dBm instead.
2580 *
2581 * @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM:
2582 * Hardware gives signal values in dBm, decibel difference from
2583 * one milliwatt. This is the preferred method since it is standardized
2584 * between different devices. @max_signal does not need to be set.
2585 *
2586 * @IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT:
2587 * Hardware supports spectrum management defined in 802.11h
2588 * Measurement, Channel Switch, Quieting, TPC
2589 *
2590 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION:
2591 * Hardware supports 11n A-MPDU aggregation.
2592 *
2593 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS:
2594 * Hardware has power save support (i.e. can go to sleep).
2595 *
2596 * @IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK:
2597 * Hardware requires nullfunc frame handling in stack, implies
2598 * stack support for dynamic PS.
2599 *
2600 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS:
2601 * Hardware has support for dynamic PS.
2602 *
2603 * @IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE:
2604 * Hardware supports management frame protection (MFP, IEEE 802.11w).
2605 *
2606 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS:
2607 * Hardware can provide ack status reports of Tx frames to
2608 * the stack.
2609 *
2610 * @IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR:
2611 * The hardware performs its own connection monitoring, including
2612 * periodic keep-alives to the AP and probing the AP on beacon loss.
2613 *
2614 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC:
2615 * This device needs to get data from beacon before association (i.e.
2616 * dtim_period).
2617 *
2618 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK: The device's crypto engine supports
2619 * per-station GTKs as used by IBSS RSN or during fast transition. If
2620 * the device doesn't support per-station GTKs, but can be asked not
2621 * to decrypt group addressed frames, then IBSS RSN support is still
2622 * possible but software crypto will be used. Advertise the wiphy flag
2623 * only in that case.
2624 *
2625 * @IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS: When operating in AP mode the device
2626 * autonomously manages the PS status of connected stations. When
2627 * this flag is set mac80211 will not trigger PS mode for connected
2628 * stations based on the PM bit of incoming frames.
2629 * Use ieee80211_start_ps()/ieee8021_end_ps() to manually configure
2630 * the PS mode of connected stations.
2631 *
2632 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW: The device handles TX A-MPDU session
2633 * setup strictly in HW. mac80211 should not attempt to do this in
2634 * software.
2635 *
2636 * @IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF: The driver would like to be informed of
2637 * a virtual monitor interface when monitor interfaces are the only
2638 * active interfaces.
2639 *
2640 * @IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF: The driver would like for no wlanX to
2641 * be created. It is expected user-space will create vifs as
2642 * desired (and thus have them named as desired).
2643 *
2644 * @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL: The driver wants to control which of the
2645 * crypto algorithms can be done in software - so don't automatically
2646 * try to fall back to it if hardware crypto fails, but do so only if
2647 * the driver returns 1. This also forces the driver to advertise its
2648 * supported cipher suites.
2649 *
2650 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT: The driver/hardware supports fast-xmit,
2651 * this currently requires only the ability to calculate the duration
2652 * for frames.
2653 *
2654 * @IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL: The driver wants to control per-interface
2655 * queue mapping in order to use different queues (not just one per AC)
2656 * for different virtual interfaces. See the doc section on HW queue
2657 * control for more details.
2658 *
2659 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE: The driver supports using a rate
2660 * selection table provided by the rate control algorithm.
2661 *
2662 * @IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF: Use the P2P Device address for any
2663 * P2P Interface. This will be honoured even if more than one interface
2664 * is supported.
2665 *
2666 * @IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY: Use sync timing from beacon frames
2667 * only, to allow getting TBTT of a DTIM beacon.
2668 *
2669 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES: Hardware supports mixing HT/CCK rates
2670 * and can cope with CCK rates in an aggregation session (e.g. by not
2671 * using aggregation for such frames.)
2672 *
2673 * @IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA: Support 802.11h based channel-switch (CSA)
2674 * for a single active channel while using channel contexts. When support
2675 * is not enabled the default action is to disconnect when getting the
2676 * CSA frame.
2677 *
2678 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS: The driver will never modify the payload
2679 * or tailroom of TX skbs without copying them first.
2680 *
2681 * @IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS: The HW supports scanning on all bands
2682 * in one command, mac80211 doesn't have to run separate scans per band.
2683 *
2684 * @IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW: The device/driver supports wider bandwidth
2685 * than then BSS bandwidth for a TDLS link on the base channel.
2686 *
2687 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU: The driver supports receiving A-MSDUs
2688 * within A-MPDU.
2689 *
2690 * @IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS: The device/driver provides TX status
2691 * for sent beacons.
2692 *
2693 * @IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR: Hardware (or driver) requires that each
2694 * station has a unique address, i.e. each station entry can be identified
2695 * by just its MAC address; this prevents, for example, the same station
2696 * from connecting to two virtual AP interfaces at the same time.
2697 *
2698 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER: Hardware (or driver) manages the
2699 * reordering buffer internally, guaranteeing mac80211 receives frames in
2700 * order and does not need to manage its own reorder buffer or BA session
2701 * timeout.
2702 *
2703 * @IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS: The device uses RSS and thus requires parallel RX,
2704 * which implies using per-CPU station statistics.
2705 *
2706 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU: Hardware (or driver) supports software aggregated
2707 * A-MSDU frames. Requires software tx queueing and fast-xmit support.
2708 * When not using minstrel/minstrel_ht rate control, the driver must
2709 * limit the maximum A-MSDU size based on the current tx rate by setting
2710 * max_rc_amsdu_len in struct ieee80211_sta.
2711 *
2712 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST: Hardware (or driver) supports sending frag_list
2713 * skbs, needed for zero-copy software A-MSDU.
2714 *
2715 * @IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK: The driver (or firmware) reports low ack event
2716 * by ieee80211_report_low_ack() based on its own algorithm. For such
2717 * drivers, mac80211 packet loss mechanism will not be triggered and driver
2718 * is completely depending on firmware event for station kickout.
2719 *
2720 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG: Hardware does fragmentation by itself.
2721 * The stack will not do fragmentation.
2722 * The callback for @set_frag_threshold should be set as well.
2723 *
2724 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA: Hardware supports buffer STA on
2725 * TDLS links.
2726 *
2727 * @IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP: The driver requires the
2728 * mgd_prepare_tx() callback to be called before transmission of a
2729 * deauthentication frame in case the association was completed but no
2730 * beacon was heard. This is required in multi-channel scenarios, where the
2731 * virtual interface might not be given air time for the transmission of
2732 * the frame, as it is not synced with the AP/P2P GO yet, and thus the
2733 * deauthentication frame might not be transmitted.
2734 *
2735 * @IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP: The driver (or firmware) doesn't
2736 * support QoS NDP for AP probing - that's most likely a driver bug.
2737 *
2738 * @IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ: use the TXQ for bufferable MMPDUs, this of
2739 * course requires the driver to use TXQs to start with.
2740 *
2741 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW: (Hardware) rate control supports VHT
2742 * extended NSS BW (dot11VHTExtendedNSSBWCapable). This flag will be set if
2743 * the selected rate control algorithm sets %RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW
2744 * but if the rate control is built-in then it must be set by the driver.
2745 * See also the documentation for that flag.
2746 *
2747 * @IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ: use the extra non-TID per-station TXQ for all
2748 * MMPDUs on station interfaces. This of course requires the driver to use
2749 * TXQs to start with.
2750 *
2751 * @IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN: Driver does not report accurate A-MPDU
2752 * length in tx status information
2753 *
2754 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2755 *
2756 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID: Hardware supports multi BSSID
2757 * only for HE APs. Applies if @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID is set.
2758 *
2759 * @IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT: The card and driver is only
2760 * aggregating MPDUs with the same keyid, allowing mac80211 to keep Tx
2761 * A-MPDU sessions active while rekeying with Extended Key ID.
2762 *
2763 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports tx encapsulation
2764 * offload
2765 *
2766 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD: Hardware supports rx decapsulation
2767 * offload
2768 *
2769 * @IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP: Hardware supports concurrent rx
2770 * decapsulation offload and passing raw 802.11 frames for monitor iface.
2771 * If this is supported, the driver must pass both 802.3 frames for real
2772 * usage and 802.11 frames with %RX_FLAG_ONLY_MONITOR set for monitor to
2773 * the stack.
2774 *
2775 * @IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION: HW/driver has support for BSS color
2776 * collision detection and doesn't need it in software.
2777 *
2778 * @IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX: Hardware/driver handles transmitting
2779 * multicast frames on all links, mac80211 should not do that.
2780 *
2781 * @IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING: HW requires disabling puncturing in EHT
2782 * and connecting with a lower bandwidth instead
2783 *
2784 * @IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA: HW/driver handles quieting for CSA, so
2785 * no need to stop queues. This really should be set by a driver that
2786 * implements MLO, so operation can continue on other links when one
2787 * link is switching.
2788 *
2789 * @NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS: number of hardware flags, used for sizing arrays
2790 */
2791enum ieee80211_hw_flags {
2792 IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL,
2793 IEEE80211_HW_RX_INCLUDES_FCS,
2794 IEEE80211_HW_HOST_BROADCAST_PS_BUFFERING,
2795 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC,
2796 IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DBM,
2797 IEEE80211_HW_NEED_DTIM_BEFORE_ASSOC,
2798 IEEE80211_HW_SPECTRUM_MGMT,
2799 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_AGGREGATION,
2800 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS,
2801 IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK,
2802 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS,
2803 IEEE80211_HW_MFP_CAPABLE,
2804 IEEE80211_HW_WANT_MONITOR_VIF,
2805 IEEE80211_HW_NO_AUTO_VIF,
2806 IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL,
2807 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORT_FAST_XMIT,
2808 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_TX_ACK_STATUS,
2809 IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR,
2810 IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL,
2811 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PER_STA_GTK,
2812 IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS,
2813 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMPDU_SETUP_IN_HW,
2814 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RC_TABLE,
2815 IEEE80211_HW_P2P_DEV_ADDR_FOR_INTF,
2816 IEEE80211_HW_TIMING_BEACON_ONLY,
2817 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_HT_CCK_RATES,
2818 IEEE80211_HW_CHANCTX_STA_CSA,
2819 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CLONED_SKBS,
2820 IEEE80211_HW_SINGLE_SCAN_ON_ALL_BANDS,
2821 IEEE80211_HW_TDLS_WIDER_BW,
2822 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_AMSDU_IN_AMPDU,
2823 IEEE80211_HW_BEACON_TX_STATUS,
2824 IEEE80211_HW_NEEDS_UNIQUE_STA_ADDR,
2825 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_REORDERING_BUFFER,
2826 IEEE80211_HW_USES_RSS,
2827 IEEE80211_HW_TX_AMSDU,
2828 IEEE80211_HW_TX_FRAG_LIST,
2829 IEEE80211_HW_REPORTS_LOW_ACK,
2830 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG,
2831 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TDLS_BUFFER_STA,
2832 IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP,
2833 IEEE80211_HW_DOESNT_SUPPORT_QOS_NDP,
2834 IEEE80211_HW_BUFF_MMPDU_TXQ,
2835 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW,
2836 IEEE80211_HW_STA_MMPDU_TXQ,
2837 IEEE80211_HW_TX_STATUS_NO_AMPDU_LEN,
2838 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_MULTI_BSSID,
2839 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_ONLY_HE_MULTI_BSSID,
2840 IEEE80211_HW_AMPDU_KEYBORDER_SUPPORT,
2841 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_ENCAP_OFFLOAD,
2842 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_RX_DECAP_OFFLOAD,
2843 IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_CONC_MON_RX_DECAP,
2844 IEEE80211_HW_DETECTS_COLOR_COLLISION,
2845 IEEE80211_HW_MLO_MCAST_MULTI_LINK_TX,
2846 IEEE80211_HW_DISALLOW_PUNCTURING,
2847 IEEE80211_HW_HANDLES_QUIET_CSA,
2848
2849 /* keep last, obviously */
2850 NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS
2851};
2852
2853/**
2854 * struct ieee80211_hw - hardware information and state
2855 *
2856 * This structure contains the configuration and hardware
2857 * information for an 802.11 PHY.
2858 *
2859 * @wiphy: This points to the &struct wiphy allocated for this
2860 * 802.11 PHY. You must fill in the @perm_addr and @dev
2861 * members of this structure using SET_IEEE80211_DEV()
2862 * and SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(). Additionally, all supported
2863 * bands (with channels, bitrates) are registered here.
2864 *
2865 * @conf: &struct ieee80211_conf, device configuration, don't use.
2866 *
2867 * @priv: pointer to private area that was allocated for driver use
2868 * along with this structure.
2869 *
2870 * @flags: hardware flags, see &enum ieee80211_hw_flags.
2871 *
2872 * @extra_tx_headroom: headroom to reserve in each transmit skb
2873 * for use by the driver (e.g. for transmit headers.)
2874 *
2875 * @extra_beacon_tailroom: tailroom to reserve in each beacon tx skb.
2876 * Can be used by drivers to add extra IEs.
2877 *
2878 * @max_signal: Maximum value for signal (rssi) in RX information, used
2879 * only when @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_UNSPEC or @IEEE80211_HW_SIGNAL_DB
2880 *
2881 * @max_listen_interval: max listen interval in units of beacon interval
2882 * that HW supports
2883 *
2884 * @queues: number of available hardware transmit queues for
2885 * data packets. WMM/QoS requires at least four, these
2886 * queues need to have configurable access parameters.
2887 *
2888 * @rate_control_algorithm: rate control algorithm for this hardware.
2889 * If unset (NULL), the default algorithm will be used. Must be
2890 * set before calling ieee80211_register_hw().
2891 *
2892 * @vif_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2893 * within &struct ieee80211_vif.
2894 * @sta_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2895 * within &struct ieee80211_sta.
2896 * @chanctx_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2897 * within &struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf.
2898 * @txq_data_size: size (in bytes) of the drv_priv data area
2899 * within @struct ieee80211_txq.
2900 *
2901 * @max_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages the hw
2902 * can handle.
2903 * @max_report_rates: maximum number of alternate rate retry stages
2904 * the hw can report back.
2905 * @max_rate_tries: maximum number of tries for each stage
2906 *
2907 * @max_rx_aggregation_subframes: maximum buffer size (number of
2908 * sub-frames) to be used for A-MPDU block ack receiver
2909 * aggregation.
2910 * This is only relevant if the device has restrictions on the
2911 * number of subframes, if it relies on mac80211 to do reordering
2912 * it shouldn't be set.
2913 *
2914 * @max_tx_aggregation_subframes: maximum number of subframes in an
2915 * aggregate an HT/HE device will transmit. In HT AddBA we'll
2916 * advertise a constant value of 64 as some older APs crash if
2917 * the window size is smaller (an example is LinkSys WRT120N
2918 * with FW v1.0.07 build 002 Jun 18 2012).
2919 * For AddBA to HE capable peers this value will be used.
2920 *
2921 * @max_tx_fragments: maximum number of tx buffers per (A)-MSDU, sum
2922 * of 1 + skb_shinfo(skb)->nr_frags for each skb in the frag_list.
2923 *
2924 * @offchannel_tx_hw_queue: HW queue ID to use for offchannel TX
2925 * (if %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL is set)
2926 *
2927 * @radiotap_mcs_details: lists which MCS information can the HW
2928 * reports, by default it is set to _MCS, _GI and _BW but doesn't
2929 * include _FMT. Use %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_MCS_HAVE_\* values, only
2930 * adding _BW is supported today.
2931 *
2932 * @radiotap_vht_details: lists which VHT MCS information the HW reports,
2933 * the default is _GI | _BANDWIDTH.
2934 * Use the %IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_VHT_KNOWN_\* values.
2935 *
2936 * @radiotap_timestamp: Information for the radiotap timestamp field; if the
2937 * @units_pos member is set to a non-negative value then the timestamp
2938 * field will be added and populated from the &struct ieee80211_rx_status
2939 * device_timestamp.
2940 * @radiotap_timestamp.units_pos: Must be set to a combination of a
2941 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_UNIT_* and a
2942 * IEEE80211_RADIOTAP_TIMESTAMP_SPOS_* value.
2943 * @radiotap_timestamp.accuracy: If non-negative, fills the accuracy in the
2944 * radiotap field and the accuracy known flag will be set.
2945 *
2946 * @netdev_features: netdev features to be set in each netdev created
2947 * from this HW. Note that not all features are usable with mac80211,
2948 * other features will be rejected during HW registration.
2949 *
2950 * @uapsd_queues: This bitmap is included in (re)association frame to indicate
2951 * for each access category if it is uAPSD trigger-enabled and delivery-
2952 * enabled. Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_AC_* to set this bitmap.
2953 * Each bit corresponds to different AC. Value '1' in specific bit means
2954 * that corresponding AC is both trigger- and delivery-enabled. '0' means
2955 * neither enabled.
2956 *
2957 * @uapsd_max_sp_len: maximum number of total buffered frames the WMM AP may
2958 * deliver to a WMM STA during any Service Period triggered by the WMM STA.
2959 * Use IEEE80211_WMM_IE_STA_QOSINFO_SP_* for correct values.
2960 *
2961 * @max_nan_de_entries: maximum number of NAN DE functions supported by the
2962 * device.
2963 *
2964 * @tx_sk_pacing_shift: Pacing shift to set on TCP sockets when frames from
2965 * them are encountered. The default should typically not be changed,
2966 * unless the driver has good reasons for needing more buffers.
2967 *
2968 * @weight_multiplier: Driver specific airtime weight multiplier used while
2969 * refilling deficit of each TXQ.
2970 *
2971 * @max_mtu: the max mtu could be set.
2972 *
2973 * @tx_power_levels: a list of power levels supported by the wifi hardware.
2974 * The power levels can be specified either as integer or fractions.
2975 * The power level at idx 0 shall be the maximum positive power level.
2976 *
2977 * @max_txpwr_levels_idx: the maximum valid idx of 'tx_power_levels' list.
2978 */
2979struct ieee80211_hw {
2980 struct ieee80211_conf conf;
2981 struct wiphy *wiphy;
2982 const char *rate_control_algorithm;
2983 void *priv;
2984 unsigned long flags[BITS_TO_LONGS(NUM_IEEE80211_HW_FLAGS)];
2985 unsigned int extra_tx_headroom;
2986 unsigned int extra_beacon_tailroom;
2987 int vif_data_size;
2988 int sta_data_size;
2989 int chanctx_data_size;
2990 int txq_data_size;
2991 u16 queues;
2992 u16 max_listen_interval;
2993 s8 max_signal;
2994 u8 max_rates;
2995 u8 max_report_rates;
2996 u8 max_rate_tries;
2997 u16 max_rx_aggregation_subframes;
2998 u16 max_tx_aggregation_subframes;
2999 u8 max_tx_fragments;
3000 u8 offchannel_tx_hw_queue;
3001 u8 radiotap_mcs_details;
3002 u16 radiotap_vht_details;
3003 struct {
3004 int units_pos;
3005 s16 accuracy;
3006 } radiotap_timestamp;
3007 netdev_features_t netdev_features;
3008 u8 uapsd_queues;
3009 u8 uapsd_max_sp_len;
3010 u8 max_nan_de_entries;
3011 u8 tx_sk_pacing_shift;
3012 u8 weight_multiplier;
3013 u32 max_mtu;
3014 const s8 *tx_power_levels;
3015 u8 max_txpwr_levels_idx;
3016};
3017
3018static inline bool _ieee80211_hw_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3019 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
3020{
3021 return test_bit(flg, hw->flags);
3022}
3023#define ieee80211_hw_check(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_check(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
3024
3025static inline void _ieee80211_hw_set(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3026 enum ieee80211_hw_flags flg)
3027{
3028 return __set_bit(flg, hw->flags);
3029}
3030#define ieee80211_hw_set(hw, flg) _ieee80211_hw_set(hw, IEEE80211_HW_##flg)
3031
3032/**
3033 * struct ieee80211_scan_request - hw scan request
3034 *
3035 * @ies: pointers different parts of IEs (in req.ie)
3036 * @req: cfg80211 request.
3037 */
3038struct ieee80211_scan_request {
3039 struct ieee80211_scan_ies ies;
3040
3041 /* Keep last */
3042 struct cfg80211_scan_request req;
3043};
3044
3045/**
3046 * struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params - TDLS channel switch parameters
3047 *
3048 * @sta: peer this TDLS channel-switch request/response came from
3049 * @chandef: channel referenced in a TDLS channel-switch request
3050 * @action_code: see &enum ieee80211_tdls_actioncode
3051 * @status: channel-switch response status
3052 * @timestamp: time at which the frame was received
3053 * @switch_time: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
3054 * @switch_timeout: switch-timing parameter received in the frame
3055 * @tmpl_skb: TDLS switch-channel response template
3056 * @ch_sw_tm_ie: offset of the channel-switch timing IE inside @tmpl_skb
3057 */
3058struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params {
3059 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3060 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef;
3061 u8 action_code;
3062 u32 status;
3063 u32 timestamp;
3064 u16 switch_time;
3065 u16 switch_timeout;
3066 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb;
3067 u32 ch_sw_tm_ie;
3068};
3069
3070/**
3071 * wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw - return a mac80211 driver hw struct from a wiphy
3072 *
3073 * @wiphy: the &struct wiphy which we want to query
3074 *
3075 * mac80211 drivers can use this to get to their respective
3076 * &struct ieee80211_hw. Drivers wishing to get to their own private
3077 * structure can then access it via hw->priv. Note that mac802111 drivers should
3078 * not use wiphy_priv() to try to get their private driver structure as this
3079 * is already used internally by mac80211.
3080 *
3081 * Return: The mac80211 driver hw struct of @wiphy.
3082 */
3083struct ieee80211_hw *wiphy_to_ieee80211_hw(struct wiphy *wiphy);
3084
3085/**
3086 * SET_IEEE80211_DEV - set device for 802.11 hardware
3087 *
3088 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the device for
3089 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
3090 */
3091static inline void SET_IEEE80211_DEV(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct device *dev)
3092{
3093 set_wiphy_dev(hw->wiphy, dev);
3094}
3095
3096/**
3097 * SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR - set the permanent MAC address for 802.11 hardware
3098 *
3099 * @hw: the &struct ieee80211_hw to set the MAC address for
3100 * @addr: the address to set
3101 */
3102static inline void SET_IEEE80211_PERM_ADDR(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, const u8 *addr)
3103{
3104 memcpy(hw->wiphy->perm_addr, addr, ETH_ALEN);
3105}
3106
3107static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
3108ieee80211_get_tx_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3109 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
3110{
3111 if (WARN_ON_ONCE(c->control.rates[0].idx < 0))
3112 return NULL;
3113 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[0].idx];
3114}
3115
3116static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
3117ieee80211_get_rts_cts_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3118 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c)
3119{
3120 if (c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx < 0)
3121 return NULL;
3122 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rts_cts_rate_idx];
3123}
3124
3125static inline struct ieee80211_rate *
3126ieee80211_get_alt_retry_rate(const struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
3127 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *c, int idx)
3128{
3129 if (c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx < 0)
3130 return NULL;
3131 return &hw->wiphy->bands[c->band]->bitrates[c->control.rates[idx + 1].idx];
3132}
3133
3134/**
3135 * ieee80211_free_txskb - free TX skb
3136 * @hw: the hardware
3137 * @skb: the skb
3138 *
3139 * Free a transmit skb. Use this function when some failure
3140 * to transmit happened and thus status cannot be reported.
3141 */
3142void ieee80211_free_txskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
3143
3144/**
3145 * DOC: Hardware crypto acceleration
3146 *
3147 * mac80211 is capable of taking advantage of many hardware
3148 * acceleration designs for encryption and decryption operations.
3149 *
3150 * The set_key() callback in the &struct ieee80211_ops for a given
3151 * device is called to enable hardware acceleration of encryption and
3152 * decryption. The callback takes a @sta parameter that will be NULL
3153 * for default keys or keys used for transmission only, or point to
3154 * the station information for the peer for individual keys.
3155 * Multiple transmission keys with the same key index may be used when
3156 * VLANs are configured for an access point.
3157 *
3158 * When transmitting, the TX control data will use the @hw_key_idx
3159 * selected by the driver by modifying the &struct ieee80211_key_conf
3160 * pointed to by the @key parameter to the set_key() function.
3161 *
3162 * The set_key() call for the %SET_KEY command should return 0 if
3163 * the key is now in use, -%EOPNOTSUPP or -%ENOSPC if it couldn't be
3164 * added; if you return 0 then hw_key_idx must be assigned to the
3165 * hardware key index. You are free to use the full u8 range.
3166 *
3167 * Note that in the case that the @IEEE80211_HW_SW_CRYPTO_CONTROL flag is
3168 * set, mac80211 will not automatically fall back to software crypto if
3169 * enabling hardware crypto failed. The set_key() call may also return the
3170 * value 1 to permit this specific key/algorithm to be done in software.
3171 *
3172 * When the cmd is %DISABLE_KEY then it must succeed.
3173 *
3174 * Note that it is permissible to not decrypt a frame even if a key
3175 * for it has been uploaded to hardware. The stack will not make any
3176 * decision based on whether a key has been uploaded or not but rather
3177 * based on the receive flags.
3178 *
3179 * The &struct ieee80211_key_conf structure pointed to by the @key
3180 * parameter is guaranteed to be valid until another call to set_key()
3181 * removes it, but it can only be used as a cookie to differentiate
3182 * keys.
3183 *
3184 * In TKIP some HW need to be provided a phase 1 key, for RX decryption
3185 * acceleration (i.e. iwlwifi). Those drivers should provide update_tkip_key
3186 * handler.
3187 * The update_tkip_key() call updates the driver with the new phase 1 key.
3188 * This happens every time the iv16 wraps around (every 65536 packets). The
3189 * set_key() call will happen only once for each key (unless the AP did
3190 * rekeying); it will not include a valid phase 1 key. The valid phase 1 key is
3191 * provided by update_tkip_key only. The trigger that makes mac80211 call this
3192 * handler is software decryption with wrap around of iv16.
3193 *
3194 * The set_default_unicast_key() call updates the default WEP key index
3195 * configured to the hardware for WEP encryption type. This is required
3196 * for devices that support offload of data packets (e.g. ARP responses).
3197 *
3198 * Mac80211 drivers should set the @NL80211_EXT_FEATURE_CAN_REPLACE_PTK0 flag
3199 * when they are able to replace in-use PTK keys according to the following
3200 * requirements:
3201 * 1) They do not hand over frames decrypted with the old key to mac80211
3202 once the call to set_key() with command %DISABLE_KEY has been completed,
3203 2) either drop or continue to use the old key for any outgoing frames queued
3204 at the time of the key deletion (including re-transmits),
3205 3) never send out a frame queued prior to the set_key() %SET_KEY command
3206 encrypted with the new key when also needing
3207 @IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_GENERATE_IV and
3208 4) never send out a frame unencrypted when it should be encrypted.
3209 Mac80211 will not queue any new frames for a deleted key to the driver.
3210 */
3211
3212/**
3213 * DOC: Powersave support
3214 *
3215 * mac80211 has support for various powersave implementations.
3216 *
3217 * First, it can support hardware that handles all powersaving by itself;
3218 * such hardware should simply set the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS hardware
3219 * flag. In that case, it will be told about the desired powersave mode
3220 * with the %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag depending on the association status.
3221 * The hardware must take care of sending nullfunc frames when necessary,
3222 * i.e. when entering and leaving powersave mode. The hardware is required
3223 * to look at the AID in beacons and signal to the AP that it woke up when
3224 * it finds traffic directed to it.
3225 *
3226 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS flag enabled means that the powersave mode defined in
3227 * IEEE 802.11-2007 section 11.2 is enabled. This is not to be confused
3228 * with hardware wakeup and sleep states. Driver is responsible for waking
3229 * up the hardware before issuing commands to the hardware and putting it
3230 * back to sleep at appropriate times.
3231 *
3232 * When PS is enabled, hardware needs to wakeup for beacons and receive the
3233 * buffered multicast/broadcast frames after the beacon. Also it must be
3234 * possible to send frames and receive the acknowledment frame.
3235 *
3236 * Other hardware designs cannot send nullfunc frames by themselves and also
3237 * need software support for parsing the TIM bitmap. This is also supported
3238 * by mac80211 by combining the %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS and
3239 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK flags. The hardware is of course still
3240 * required to pass up beacons. The hardware is still required to handle
3241 * waking up for multicast traffic; if it cannot the driver must handle that
3242 * as best as it can; mac80211 is too slow to do that.
3243 *
3244 * Dynamic powersave is an extension to normal powersave in which the
3245 * hardware stays awake for a user-specified period of time after sending a
3246 * frame so that reply frames need not be buffered and therefore delayed to
3247 * the next wakeup. It's a compromise of getting good enough latency when
3248 * there's data traffic and still saving significantly power in idle
3249 * periods.
3250 *
3251 * Dynamic powersave is simply supported by mac80211 enabling and disabling
3252 * PS based on traffic. Driver needs to only set %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_PS
3253 * flag and mac80211 will handle everything automatically. Additionally,
3254 * hardware having support for the dynamic PS feature may set the
3255 * %IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_DYNAMIC_PS flag to indicate that it can support
3256 * dynamic PS mode itself. The driver needs to look at the
3257 * @dynamic_ps_timeout hardware configuration value and use it that value
3258 * whenever %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. In this case mac80211 will disable
3259 * dynamic PS feature in stack and will just keep %IEEE80211_CONF_PS
3260 * enabled whenever user has enabled powersave.
3261 *
3262 * Driver informs U-APSD client support by enabling
3263 * %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_UAPSD flag. The mode is configured through the
3264 * uapsd parameter in conf_tx() operation. Hardware needs to send the QoS
3265 * Nullfunc frames and stay awake until the service period has ended. To
3266 * utilize U-APSD, dynamic powersave is disabled for voip AC and all frames
3267 * from that AC are transmitted with powersave enabled.
3268 *
3269 * Note: U-APSD client mode is not yet supported with
3270 * %IEEE80211_HW_PS_NULLFUNC_STACK.
3271 */
3272
3273/**
3274 * DOC: Beacon filter support
3275 *
3276 * Some hardware have beacon filter support to reduce host cpu wakeups
3277 * which will reduce system power consumption. It usually works so that
3278 * the firmware creates a checksum of the beacon but omits all constantly
3279 * changing elements (TSF, TIM etc). Whenever the checksum changes the
3280 * beacon is forwarded to the host, otherwise it will be just dropped. That
3281 * way the host will only receive beacons where some relevant information
3282 * (for example ERP protection or WMM settings) have changed.
3283 *
3284 * Beacon filter support is advertised with the %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER
3285 * interface capability. The driver needs to enable beacon filter support
3286 * whenever power save is enabled, that is %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set. When
3287 * power save is enabled, the stack will not check for beacon loss and the
3288 * driver needs to notify about loss of beacons with ieee80211_beacon_loss().
3289 *
3290 * The time (or number of beacons missed) until the firmware notifies the
3291 * driver of a beacon loss event (which in turn causes the driver to call
3292 * ieee80211_beacon_loss()) should be configurable and will be controlled
3293 * by mac80211 and the roaming algorithm in the future.
3294 *
3295 * Since there may be constantly changing information elements that nothing
3296 * in the software stack cares about, we will, in the future, have mac80211
3297 * tell the driver which information elements are interesting in the sense
3298 * that we want to see changes in them. This will include
3299 *
3300 * - a list of information element IDs
3301 * - a list of OUIs for the vendor information element
3302 *
3303 * Ideally, the hardware would filter out any beacons without changes in the
3304 * requested elements, but if it cannot support that it may, at the expense
3305 * of some efficiency, filter out only a subset. For example, if the device
3306 * doesn't support checking for OUIs it should pass up all changes in all
3307 * vendor information elements.
3308 *
3309 * Note that change, for the sake of simplification, also includes information
3310 * elements appearing or disappearing from the beacon.
3311 *
3312 * Some hardware supports an "ignore list" instead. Just make sure nothing
3313 * that was requested is on the ignore list, and include commonly changing
3314 * information element IDs in the ignore list, for example 11 (BSS load) and
3315 * the various vendor-assigned IEs with unknown contents (128, 129, 133-136,
3316 * 149, 150, 155, 156, 173, 176, 178, 179, 219); for forward compatibility
3317 * it could also include some currently unused IDs.
3318 *
3319 *
3320 * In addition to these capabilities, hardware should support notifying the
3321 * host of changes in the beacon RSSI. This is relevant to implement roaming
3322 * when no traffic is flowing (when traffic is flowing we see the RSSI of
3323 * the received data packets). This can consist of notifying the host when
3324 * the RSSI changes significantly or when it drops below or rises above
3325 * configurable thresholds. In the future these thresholds will also be
3326 * configured by mac80211 (which gets them from userspace) to implement
3327 * them as the roaming algorithm requires.
3328 *
3329 * If the hardware cannot implement this, the driver should ask it to
3330 * periodically pass beacon frames to the host so that software can do the
3331 * signal strength threshold checking.
3332 */
3333
3334/**
3335 * DOC: Spatial multiplexing power save
3336 *
3337 * SMPS (Spatial multiplexing power save) is a mechanism to conserve
3338 * power in an 802.11n implementation. For details on the mechanism
3339 * and rationale, please refer to 802.11 (as amended by 802.11n-2009)
3340 * "11.2.3 SM power save".
3341 *
3342 * The mac80211 implementation is capable of sending action frames
3343 * to update the AP about the station's SMPS mode, and will instruct
3344 * the driver to enter the specific mode. It will also announce the
3345 * requested SMPS mode during the association handshake. Hardware
3346 * support for this feature is required, and can be indicated by
3347 * hardware flags.
3348 *
3349 * The default mode will be "automatic", which nl80211/cfg80211
3350 * defines to be dynamic SMPS in (regular) powersave, and SMPS
3351 * turned off otherwise.
3352 *
3353 * To support this feature, the driver must set the appropriate
3354 * hardware support flags, and handle the SMPS flag to the config()
3355 * operation. It will then with this mechanism be instructed to
3356 * enter the requested SMPS mode while associated to an HT AP.
3357 */
3358
3359/**
3360 * DOC: Frame filtering
3361 *
3362 * mac80211 requires to see many management frames for proper
3363 * operation, and users may want to see many more frames when
3364 * in monitor mode. However, for best CPU usage and power consumption,
3365 * having as few frames as possible percolate through the stack is
3366 * desirable. Hence, the hardware should filter as much as possible.
3367 *
3368 * To achieve this, mac80211 uses filter flags (see below) to tell
3369 * the driver's configure_filter() function which frames should be
3370 * passed to mac80211 and which should be filtered out.
3371 *
3372 * Before configure_filter() is invoked, the prepare_multicast()
3373 * callback is invoked with the parameters @mc_count and @mc_list
3374 * for the combined multicast address list of all virtual interfaces.
3375 * It's use is optional, and it returns a u64 that is passed to
3376 * configure_filter(). Additionally, configure_filter() has the
3377 * arguments @changed_flags telling which flags were changed and
3378 * @total_flags with the new flag states.
3379 *
3380 * If your device has no multicast address filters your driver will
3381 * need to check both the %FIF_ALLMULTI flag and the @mc_count
3382 * parameter to see whether multicast frames should be accepted
3383 * or dropped.
3384 *
3385 * All unsupported flags in @total_flags must be cleared.
3386 * Hardware does not support a flag if it is incapable of _passing_
3387 * the frame to the stack. Otherwise the driver must ignore
3388 * the flag, but not clear it.
3389 * You must _only_ clear the flag (announce no support for the
3390 * flag to mac80211) if you are not able to pass the packet type
3391 * to the stack (so the hardware always filters it).
3392 * So for example, you should clear @FIF_CONTROL, if your hardware
3393 * always filters control frames. If your hardware always passes
3394 * control frames to the kernel and is incapable of filtering them,
3395 * you do _not_ clear the @FIF_CONTROL flag.
3396 * This rule applies to all other FIF flags as well.
3397 */
3398
3399/**
3400 * DOC: AP support for powersaving clients
3401 *
3402 * In order to implement AP and P2P GO modes, mac80211 has support for
3403 * client powersaving, both "legacy" PS (PS-Poll/null data) and uAPSD.
3404 * There currently is no support for sAPSD.
3405 *
3406 * There is one assumption that mac80211 makes, namely that a client
3407 * will not poll with PS-Poll and trigger with uAPSD at the same time.
3408 * Both are supported, and both can be used by the same client, but
3409 * they can't be used concurrently by the same client. This simplifies
3410 * the driver code.
3411 *
3412 * The first thing to keep in mind is that there is a flag for complete
3413 * driver implementation: %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS. If this flag is set,
3414 * mac80211 expects the driver to handle most of the state machine for
3415 * powersaving clients and will ignore the PM bit in incoming frames.
3416 * Drivers then use ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() to inform mac80211 of
3417 * stations' powersave transitions. In this mode, mac80211 also doesn't
3418 * handle PS-Poll/uAPSD.
3419 *
3420 * In the mode without %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS, mac80211 will check the
3421 * PM bit in incoming frames for client powersave transitions. When a
3422 * station goes to sleep, we will stop transmitting to it. There is,
3423 * however, a race condition: a station might go to sleep while there is
3424 * data buffered on hardware queues. If the device has support for this
3425 * it will reject frames, and the driver should give the frames back to
3426 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_STAT_TX_FILTERED flag set which will
3427 * cause mac80211 to retry the frame when the station wakes up. The
3428 * driver is also notified of powersave transitions by calling its
3429 * @sta_notify callback.
3430 *
3431 * When the station is asleep, it has three choices: it can wake up,
3432 * it can PS-Poll, or it can possibly start a uAPSD service period.
3433 * Waking up is implemented by simply transmitting all buffered (and
3434 * filtered) frames to the station. This is the easiest case. When
3435 * the station sends a PS-Poll or a uAPSD trigger frame, mac80211
3436 * will inform the driver of this with the @allow_buffered_frames
3437 * callback; this callback is optional. mac80211 will then transmit
3438 * the frames as usual and set the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER
3439 * on each frame. The last frame in the service period (or the only
3440 * response to a PS-Poll) also has %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set to
3441 * indicate that it ends the service period; as this frame must have
3442 * TX status report it also sets %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_REQ_TX_STATUS.
3443 * When TX status is reported for this frame, the service period is
3444 * marked has having ended and a new one can be started by the peer.
3445 *
3446 * Additionally, non-bufferable MMPDUs can also be transmitted by
3447 * mac80211 with the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER set in them.
3448 *
3449 * Another race condition can happen on some devices like iwlwifi
3450 * when there are frames queued for the station and it wakes up
3451 * or polls; the frames that are already queued could end up being
3452 * transmitted first instead, causing reordering and/or wrong
3453 * processing of the EOSP. The cause is that allowing frames to be
3454 * transmitted to a certain station is out-of-band communication to
3455 * the device. To allow this problem to be solved, the driver can
3456 * call ieee80211_sta_block_awake() if frames are buffered when it
3457 * is notified that the station went to sleep. When all these frames
3458 * have been filtered (see above), it must call the function again
3459 * to indicate that the station is no longer blocked.
3460 *
3461 * If the driver buffers frames in the driver for aggregation in any
3462 * way, it must use the ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() call when it is
3463 * notified of the station going to sleep to inform mac80211 of any
3464 * TIDs that have frames buffered. Note that when a station wakes up
3465 * this information is reset (hence the requirement to call it when
3466 * informed of the station going to sleep). Then, when a service
3467 * period starts for any reason, @release_buffered_frames is called
3468 * with the number of frames to be released and which TIDs they are
3469 * to come from. In this case, the driver is responsible for setting
3470 * the EOSP (for uAPSD) and MORE_DATA bits in the released frames.
3471 * To help the @more_data parameter is passed to tell the driver if
3472 * there is more data on other TIDs -- the TIDs to release frames
3473 * from are ignored since mac80211 doesn't know how many frames the
3474 * buffers for those TIDs contain.
3475 *
3476 * If the driver also implement GO mode, where absence periods may
3477 * shorten service periods (or abort PS-Poll responses), it must
3478 * filter those response frames except in the case of frames that
3479 * are buffered in the driver -- those must remain buffered to avoid
3480 * reordering. Because it is possible that no frames are released
3481 * in this case, the driver must call ieee80211_sta_eosp()
3482 * to indicate to mac80211 that the service period ended anyway.
3483 *
3484 * Finally, if frames from multiple TIDs are released from mac80211
3485 * but the driver might reorder them, it must clear & set the flags
3486 * appropriately (only the last frame may have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP)
3487 * and also take care of the EOSP and MORE_DATA bits in the frame.
3488 * The driver may also use ieee80211_sta_eosp() in this case.
3489 *
3490 * Note that if the driver ever buffers frames other than QoS-data
3491 * frames, it must take care to never send a non-QoS-data frame as
3492 * the last frame in a service period, adding a QoS-nulldata frame
3493 * after a non-QoS-data frame if needed.
3494 */
3495
3496/**
3497 * DOC: HW queue control
3498 *
3499 * Before HW queue control was introduced, mac80211 only had a single static
3500 * assignment of per-interface AC software queues to hardware queues. This
3501 * was problematic for a few reasons:
3502 * 1) off-channel transmissions might get stuck behind other frames
3503 * 2) multiple virtual interfaces couldn't be handled correctly
3504 * 3) after-DTIM frames could get stuck behind other frames
3505 *
3506 * To solve this, hardware typically uses multiple different queues for all
3507 * the different usages, and this needs to be propagated into mac80211 so it
3508 * won't have the same problem with the software queues.
3509 *
3510 * Therefore, mac80211 now offers the %IEEE80211_HW_QUEUE_CONTROL capability
3511 * flag that tells it that the driver implements its own queue control. To do
3512 * so, the driver will set up the various queues in each &struct ieee80211_vif
3513 * and the offchannel queue in &struct ieee80211_hw. In response, mac80211 will
3514 * use those queue IDs in the hw_queue field of &struct ieee80211_tx_info and
3515 * if necessary will queue the frame on the right software queue that mirrors
3516 * the hardware queue.
3517 * Additionally, the driver has to then use these HW queue IDs for the queue
3518 * management functions (ieee80211_stop_queue() et al.)
3519 *
3520 * The driver is free to set up the queue mappings as needed; multiple virtual
3521 * interfaces may map to the same hardware queues if needed. The setup has to
3522 * happen during add_interface or change_interface callbacks. For example, a
3523 * driver supporting station+station and station+AP modes might decide to have
3524 * 10 hardware queues to handle different scenarios:
3525 *
3526 * 4 AC HW queues for 1st vif: 0, 1, 2, 3
3527 * 4 AC HW queues for 2nd vif: 4, 5, 6, 7
3528 * after-DTIM queue for AP: 8
3529 * off-channel queue: 9
3530 *
3531 * It would then set up the hardware like this:
3532 * hw.offchannel_tx_hw_queue = 9
3533 *
3534 * and the first virtual interface that is added as follows:
3535 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VO] = 0
3536 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_VI] = 1
3537 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BE] = 2
3538 * vif.hw_queue[IEEE80211_AC_BK] = 3
3539 * vif.cab_queue = 8 // if AP mode, otherwise %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3540 * and the second virtual interface with 4-7.
3541 *
3542 * If queue 6 gets full, for example, mac80211 would only stop the second
3543 * virtual interface's BE queue since virtual interface queues are per AC.
3544 *
3545 * Note that the vif.cab_queue value should be set to %IEEE80211_INVAL_HW_QUEUE
3546 * whenever the queue is not used (i.e. the interface is not in AP mode) if the
3547 * queue could potentially be shared since mac80211 will look at cab_queue when
3548 * a queue is stopped/woken even if the interface is not in AP mode.
3549 */
3550
3551/**
3552 * enum ieee80211_filter_flags - hardware filter flags
3553 *
3554 * These flags determine what the filter in hardware should be
3555 * programmed to let through and what should not be passed to the
3556 * stack. It is always safe to pass more frames than requested,
3557 * but this has negative impact on power consumption.
3558 *
3559 * @FIF_ALLMULTI: pass all multicast frames, this is used if requested
3560 * by the user or if the hardware is not capable of filtering by
3561 * multicast address.
3562 *
3563 * @FIF_FCSFAIL: pass frames with failed FCS (but you need to set the
3564 * %RX_FLAG_FAILED_FCS_CRC for them)
3565 *
3566 * @FIF_PLCPFAIL: pass frames with failed PLCP CRC (but you need to set
3567 * the %RX_FLAG_FAILED_PLCP_CRC for them
3568 *
3569 * @FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC: This flag is set during scanning to indicate
3570 * to the hardware that it should not filter beacons or probe responses
3571 * by BSSID. Filtering them can greatly reduce the amount of processing
3572 * mac80211 needs to do and the amount of CPU wakeups, so you should
3573 * honour this flag if possible.
3574 *
3575 * @FIF_CONTROL: pass control frames (except for PS Poll) addressed to this
3576 * station
3577 *
3578 * @FIF_OTHER_BSS: pass frames destined to other BSSes
3579 *
3580 * @FIF_PSPOLL: pass PS Poll frames
3581 *
3582 * @FIF_PROBE_REQ: pass probe request frames
3583 *
3584 * @FIF_MCAST_ACTION: pass multicast Action frames
3585 */
3586enum ieee80211_filter_flags {
3587 FIF_ALLMULTI = 1<<1,
3588 FIF_FCSFAIL = 1<<2,
3589 FIF_PLCPFAIL = 1<<3,
3590 FIF_BCN_PRBRESP_PROMISC = 1<<4,
3591 FIF_CONTROL = 1<<5,
3592 FIF_OTHER_BSS = 1<<6,
3593 FIF_PSPOLL = 1<<7,
3594 FIF_PROBE_REQ = 1<<8,
3595 FIF_MCAST_ACTION = 1<<9,
3596};
3597
3598/**
3599 * enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action - A-MPDU actions
3600 *
3601 * These flags are used with the ampdu_action() callback in
3602 * &struct ieee80211_ops to indicate which action is needed.
3603 *
3604 * Note that drivers MUST be able to deal with a TX aggregation
3605 * session being stopped even before they OK'ed starting it by
3606 * calling ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe, because the peer
3607 * might receive the addBA frame and send a delBA right away!
3608 *
3609 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START: start RX aggregation
3610 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP: stop RX aggregation
3611 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START: start TX aggregation, the driver must either
3612 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() or
3613 * call ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() with status
3614 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA to delay addba after
3615 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe is called, or just return the special
3616 * status %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE.
3617 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL: TX aggregation has become operational
3618 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT: stop TX aggregation but continue transmitting
3619 * queued packets, now unaggregated. After all packets are transmitted the
3620 * driver has to call ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe().
3621 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH: stop TX aggregation and flush all packets,
3622 * called when the station is removed. There's no need or reason to call
3623 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() in this case as mac80211 assumes the
3624 * session is gone and removes the station.
3625 * @IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT: called when TX aggregation is stopped
3626 * but the driver hasn't called ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe() yet and
3627 * now the connection is dropped and the station will be removed. Drivers
3628 * should clean up and drop remaining packets when this is called.
3629 */
3630enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action {
3631 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START,
3632 IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_STOP,
3633 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START,
3634 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_CONT,
3635 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH,
3636 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_STOP_FLUSH_CONT,
3637 IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL,
3638};
3639
3640#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE 1
3641#define IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_DELAY_ADDBA 2
3642
3643/**
3644 * struct ieee80211_ampdu_params - AMPDU action parameters
3645 *
3646 * @action: the ampdu action, value from %ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
3647 * @sta: peer of this AMPDU session
3648 * @tid: tid of the BA session
3649 * @ssn: start sequence number of the session. TX/RX_STOP can pass 0. When
3650 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START the driver passes back the
3651 * actual ssn value used to start the session and writes the value here.
3652 * @buf_size: reorder buffer size (number of subframes). Valid only when the
3653 * action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START or
3654 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3655 * @amsdu: indicates the peer's ability to receive A-MSDU within A-MPDU.
3656 * valid when the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL
3657 * @timeout: BA session timeout. Valid only when the action is set to
3658 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_RX_START
3659 */
3660struct ieee80211_ampdu_params {
3661 enum ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action action;
3662 struct ieee80211_sta *sta;
3663 u16 tid;
3664 u16 ssn;
3665 u16 buf_size;
3666 bool amsdu;
3667 u16 timeout;
3668};
3669
3670/**
3671 * enum ieee80211_frame_release_type - frame release reason
3672 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL: frame released for PS-Poll
3673 * @IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD: frame(s) released due to
3674 * frame received on trigger-enabled AC
3675 */
3676enum ieee80211_frame_release_type {
3677 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_PSPOLL,
3678 IEEE80211_FRAME_RELEASE_UAPSD,
3679};
3680
3681/**
3682 * enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed - flags to indicate what changed
3683 *
3684 * @IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED: The bandwidth that can be used to transmit
3685 * to this station changed. The actual bandwidth is in the station
3686 * information -- for HT20/40 the IEEE80211_HT_CAP_SUP_WIDTH_20_40
3687 * flag changes, for HT and VHT the bandwidth field changes.
3688 * @IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED: The SMPS state of the station changed.
3689 * @IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED: The supported rate set of this peer
3690 * changed (in IBSS mode) due to discovering more information about
3691 * the peer.
3692 * @IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED: N_SS (number of spatial streams) was changed
3693 * by the peer
3694 */
3695enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed {
3696 IEEE80211_RC_BW_CHANGED = BIT(0),
3697 IEEE80211_RC_SMPS_CHANGED = BIT(1),
3698 IEEE80211_RC_SUPP_RATES_CHANGED = BIT(2),
3699 IEEE80211_RC_NSS_CHANGED = BIT(3),
3700};
3701
3702/**
3703 * enum ieee80211_roc_type - remain on channel type
3704 *
3705 * With the support for multi channel contexts and multi channel operations,
3706 * remain on channel operations might be limited/deferred/aborted by other
3707 * flows/operations which have higher priority (and vice versa).
3708 * Specifying the ROC type can be used by devices to prioritize the ROC
3709 * operations compared to other operations/flows.
3710 *
3711 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL: There are no special requirements for this ROC.
3712 * @IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX: The remain on channel request is required
3713 * for sending management frames offchannel.
3714 */
3715enum ieee80211_roc_type {
3716 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_NORMAL = 0,
3717 IEEE80211_ROC_TYPE_MGMT_TX,
3718};
3719
3720/**
3721 * enum ieee80211_reconfig_type - reconfig type
3722 *
3723 * This enum is used by the reconfig_complete() callback to indicate what
3724 * reconfiguration type was completed.
3725 *
3726 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART: hw restart type
3727 * (also due to resume() callback returning 1)
3728 * @IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND: suspend type (regardless
3729 * of wowlan configuration)
3730 */
3731enum ieee80211_reconfig_type {
3732 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_RESTART,
3733 IEEE80211_RECONFIG_TYPE_SUSPEND,
3734};
3735
3736/**
3737 * struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info - prepare TX information
3738 * @duration: if non-zero, hint about the required duration,
3739 * only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3740 * @subtype: frame subtype (auth, (re)assoc, deauth, disassoc)
3741 * @success: whether the frame exchange was successful, only
3742 * used with the mgd_complete_tx() method, and then only
3743 * valid for auth and (re)assoc.
3744 * @link_id: the link id on which the frame will be TX'ed.
3745 * Only used with the mgd_prepare_tx() method.
3746 */
3747struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info {
3748 u16 duration;
3749 u16 subtype;
3750 u8 success:1;
3751 int link_id;
3752};
3753
3754/**
3755 * struct ieee80211_ops - callbacks from mac80211 to the driver
3756 *
3757 * This structure contains various callbacks that the driver may
3758 * handle or, in some cases, must handle, for example to configure
3759 * the hardware to a new channel or to transmit a frame.
3760 *
3761 * @tx: Handler that 802.11 module calls for each transmitted frame.
3762 * skb contains the buffer starting from the IEEE 802.11 header.
3763 * The low-level driver should send the frame out based on
3764 * configuration in the TX control data. This handler should,
3765 * preferably, never fail and stop queues appropriately.
3766 * Must be atomic.
3767 *
3768 * @start: Called before the first netdevice attached to the hardware
3769 * is enabled. This should turn on the hardware and must turn on
3770 * frame reception (for possibly enabled monitor interfaces.)
3771 * Returns negative error codes, these may be seen in userspace,
3772 * or zero.
3773 * When the device is started it should not have a MAC address
3774 * to avoid acknowledging frames before a non-monitor device
3775 * is added.
3776 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3777 *
3778 * @stop: Called after last netdevice attached to the hardware
3779 * is disabled. This should turn off the hardware (at least
3780 * it must turn off frame reception.)
3781 * May be called right after add_interface if that rejects
3782 * an interface. If you added any work onto the mac80211 workqueue
3783 * you should ensure to cancel it on this callback.
3784 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3785 *
3786 * @suspend: Suspend the device; mac80211 itself will quiesce before and
3787 * stop transmitting and doing any other configuration, and then
3788 * ask the device to suspend. This is only invoked when WoWLAN is
3789 * configured, otherwise the device is deconfigured completely and
3790 * reconfigured at resume time.
3791 * The driver may also impose special conditions under which it
3792 * wants to use the "normal" suspend (deconfigure), say if it only
3793 * supports WoWLAN when the device is associated. In this case, it
3794 * must return 1 from this function.
3795 *
3796 * @resume: If WoWLAN was configured, this indicates that mac80211 is
3797 * now resuming its operation, after this the device must be fully
3798 * functional again. If this returns an error, the only way out is
3799 * to also unregister the device. If it returns 1, then mac80211
3800 * will also go through the regular complete restart on resume.
3801 *
3802 * @set_wakeup: Enable or disable wakeup when WoWLAN configuration is
3803 * modified. The reason is that device_set_wakeup_enable() is
3804 * supposed to be called when the configuration changes, not only
3805 * in suspend().
3806 *
3807 * @add_interface: Called when a netdevice attached to the hardware is
3808 * enabled. Because it is not called for monitor mode devices, @start
3809 * and @stop must be implemented.
3810 * The driver should perform any initialization it needs before
3811 * the device can be enabled. The initial configuration for the
3812 * interface is given in the conf parameter.
3813 * The callback may refuse to add an interface by returning a
3814 * negative error code (which will be seen in userspace.)
3815 * Must be implemented and can sleep.
3816 *
3817 * @change_interface: Called when a netdevice changes type. This callback
3818 * is optional, but only if it is supported can interface types be
3819 * switched while the interface is UP. The callback may sleep.
3820 * Note that while an interface is being switched, it will not be
3821 * found by the interface iteration callbacks.
3822 *
3823 * @remove_interface: Notifies a driver that an interface is going down.
3824 * The @stop callback is called after this if it is the last interface
3825 * and no monitor interfaces are present.
3826 * When all interfaces are removed, the MAC address in the hardware
3827 * must be cleared so the device no longer acknowledges packets,
3828 * the mac_addr member of the conf structure is, however, set to the
3829 * MAC address of the device going away.
3830 * Hence, this callback must be implemented. It can sleep.
3831 *
3832 * @config: Handler for configuration requests. IEEE 802.11 code calls this
3833 * function to change hardware configuration, e.g., channel.
3834 * This function should never fail but returns a negative error code
3835 * if it does. The callback can sleep.
3836 *
3837 * @bss_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to BSS
3838 * parameters that may vary during BSS's lifespan, and may affect low
3839 * level driver (e.g. assoc/disassoc status, erp parameters).
3840 * This function should not be used if no BSS has been set, unless
3841 * for association indication. The @changed parameter indicates which
3842 * of the bss parameters has changed when a call is made. The callback
3843 * can sleep.
3844 * Note: this callback is called if @vif_cfg_changed or @link_info_changed
3845 * are not implemented.
3846 *
3847 * @vif_cfg_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to interface
3848 * (MLD) parameters from &struct ieee80211_vif_cfg that vary during the
3849 * lifetime of the interface (e.g. assoc status, IP addresses, etc.)
3850 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed.
3851 * The callback can sleep.
3852 *
3853 * @link_info_changed: Handler for configuration requests related to link
3854 * parameters from &struct ieee80211_bss_conf that are related to an
3855 * individual link. e.g. legacy/HT/VHT/... rate information.
3856 * The @changed parameter indicates which value changed, and the @link_id
3857 * parameter indicates the link ID. Note that the @link_id will be 0 for
3858 * non-MLO connections.
3859 * The callback can sleep.
3860 *
3861 * @prepare_multicast: Prepare for multicast filter configuration.
3862 * This callback is optional, and its return value is passed
3863 * to configure_filter(). This callback must be atomic.
3864 *
3865 * @configure_filter: Configure the device's RX filter.
3866 * See the section "Frame filtering" for more information.
3867 * This callback must be implemented and can sleep.
3868 *
3869 * @config_iface_filter: Configure the interface's RX filter.
3870 * This callback is optional and is used to configure which frames
3871 * should be passed to mac80211. The filter_flags is the combination
3872 * of FIF_* flags. The changed_flags is a bit mask that indicates
3873 * which flags are changed.
3874 * This callback can sleep.
3875 *
3876 * @set_tim: Set TIM bit. mac80211 calls this function when a TIM bit
3877 * must be set or cleared for a given STA. Must be atomic.
3878 *
3879 * @set_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3880 * This callback is only called between add_interface and
3881 * remove_interface calls, i.e. while the given virtual interface
3882 * is enabled.
3883 * Returns a negative error code if the key can't be added.
3884 * The callback can sleep.
3885 *
3886 * @update_tkip_key: See the section "Hardware crypto acceleration"
3887 * This callback will be called in the context of Rx. Called for drivers
3888 * which set IEEE80211_KEY_FLAG_TKIP_REQ_RX_P1_KEY.
3889 * The callback must be atomic.
3890 *
3891 * @set_rekey_data: If the device supports GTK rekeying, for example while the
3892 * host is suspended, it can assign this callback to retrieve the data
3893 * necessary to do GTK rekeying, this is the KEK, KCK and replay counter.
3894 * After rekeying was done it should (for example during resume) notify
3895 * userspace of the new replay counter using ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify().
3896 *
3897 * @set_default_unicast_key: Set the default (unicast) key index, useful for
3898 * WEP when the device sends data packets autonomously, e.g. for ARP
3899 * offloading. The index can be 0-3, or -1 for unsetting it.
3900 *
3901 * @hw_scan: Ask the hardware to service the scan request, no need to start
3902 * the scan state machine in stack. The scan must honour the channel
3903 * configuration done by the regulatory agent in the wiphy's
3904 * registered bands. The hardware (or the driver) needs to make sure
3905 * that power save is disabled.
3906 * The @req ie/ie_len members are rewritten by mac80211 to contain the
3907 * entire IEs after the SSID, so that drivers need not look at these
3908 * at all but just send them after the SSID -- mac80211 includes the
3909 * (extended) supported rates and HT information (where applicable).
3910 * When the scan finishes, ieee80211_scan_completed() must be called;
3911 * note that it also must be called when the scan cannot finish due to
3912 * any error unless this callback returned a negative error code.
3913 * This callback is also allowed to return the special return value 1,
3914 * this indicates that hardware scan isn't desirable right now and a
3915 * software scan should be done instead. A driver wishing to use this
3916 * capability must ensure its (hardware) scan capabilities aren't
3917 * advertised as more capable than mac80211's software scan is.
3918 * The callback can sleep.
3919 *
3920 * @cancel_hw_scan: Ask the low-level tp cancel the active hw scan.
3921 * The driver should ask the hardware to cancel the scan (if possible),
3922 * but the scan will be completed only after the driver will call
3923 * ieee80211_scan_completed().
3924 * This callback is needed for wowlan, to prevent enqueueing a new
3925 * scan_work after the low-level driver was already suspended.
3926 * The callback can sleep.
3927 *
3928 * @sched_scan_start: Ask the hardware to start scanning repeatedly at
3929 * specific intervals. The driver must call the
3930 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results() function whenever it finds results.
3931 * This process will continue until sched_scan_stop is called.
3932 *
3933 * @sched_scan_stop: Tell the hardware to stop an ongoing scheduled scan.
3934 * In this case, ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped() must not be called.
3935 *
3936 * @sw_scan_start: Notifier function that is called just before a software scan
3937 * is started. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need this notification.
3938 * The mac_addr parameter allows supporting NL80211_SCAN_FLAG_RANDOM_ADDR,
3939 * the driver may set the NL80211_FEATURE_SCAN_RANDOM_MAC_ADDR flag if it
3940 * can use this parameter. The callback can sleep.
3941 *
3942 * @sw_scan_complete: Notifier function that is called just after a
3943 * software scan finished. Can be NULL, if the driver doesn't need
3944 * this notification.
3945 * The callback can sleep.
3946 *
3947 * @get_stats: Return low-level statistics.
3948 * Returns zero if statistics are available.
3949 * The callback can sleep.
3950 *
3951 * @get_key_seq: If your device implements encryption in hardware and does
3952 * IV/PN assignment then this callback should be provided to read the
3953 * IV/PN for the given key from hardware.
3954 * The callback must be atomic.
3955 *
3956 * @set_frag_threshold: Configuration of fragmentation threshold. Assign this
3957 * if the device does fragmentation by itself. Note that to prevent the
3958 * stack from doing fragmentation IEEE80211_HW_SUPPORTS_TX_FRAG
3959 * should be set as well.
3960 * The callback can sleep.
3961 *
3962 * @set_rts_threshold: Configuration of RTS threshold (if device needs it)
3963 * The callback can sleep.
3964 *
3965 * @sta_add: Notifies low level driver about addition of an associated station,
3966 * AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. This callback can sleep.
3967 *
3968 * @sta_remove: Notifies low level driver about removal of an associated
3969 * station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. Note that after the callback
3970 * returns it isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected;
3971 * no RCU grace period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing
3972 * the station. See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
3973 * This callback can sleep.
3974 *
3975 * @vif_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add a debugfs vif
3976 * directory with its files. This callback should be within a
3977 * CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep.
3978 *
3979 * @link_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3980 * when a link is added to a mac80211 vif. This callback should be within
3981 * a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This callback can sleep.
3982 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the default bss_conf
3983 * with the vif's directory rather than a separate subdirectory.
3984 *
3985 * @sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3986 * when a station is added to mac80211's station list. This callback
3987 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3988 * callback can sleep.
3989 *
3990 * @link_sta_add_debugfs: Drivers can use this callback to add debugfs files
3991 * when a link is added to a mac80211 station. This callback
3992 * should be within a CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS conditional. This
3993 * callback can sleep.
3994 * For non-MLO the callback will be called once for the deflink with the
3995 * station's directory rather than a separate subdirectory.
3996 *
3997 * @sta_notify: Notifies low level driver about power state transition of an
3998 * associated station, AP, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc. For a VIF operating
3999 * in AP mode, this callback will not be called when the flag
4000 * %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS is set. Must be atomic.
4001 *
4002 * @sta_set_txpwr: Configure the station tx power. This callback set the tx
4003 * power for the station.
4004 * This callback can sleep.
4005 *
4006 * @sta_state: Notifies low level driver about state transition of a
4007 * station (which can be the AP, a client, IBSS/WDS/mesh peer etc.)
4008 * This callback is mutually exclusive with @sta_add/@sta_remove.
4009 * It must not fail for down transitions but may fail for transitions
4010 * up the list of states. Also note that after the callback returns it
4011 * isn't safe to use the pointer, not even RCU protected - no RCU grace
4012 * period is guaranteed between returning here and freeing the station.
4013 * See @sta_pre_rcu_remove if needed.
4014 * The callback can sleep.
4015 *
4016 * @sta_pre_rcu_remove: Notify driver about station removal before RCU
4017 * synchronisation. This is useful if a driver needs to have station
4018 * pointers protected using RCU, it can then use this call to clear
4019 * the pointers instead of waiting for an RCU grace period to elapse
4020 * in @sta_state.
4021 * The callback can sleep.
4022 *
4023 * @sta_rc_update: Notifies the driver of changes to the bitrates that can be
4024 * used to transmit to the station. The changes are advertised with bits
4025 * from &enum ieee80211_rate_control_changed and the values are reflected
4026 * in the station data. This callback should only be used when the driver
4027 * uses hardware rate control (%IEEE80211_HW_HAS_RATE_CONTROL) since
4028 * otherwise the rate control algorithm is notified directly.
4029 * Must be atomic.
4030 * @sta_rate_tbl_update: Notifies the driver that the rate table changed. This
4031 * is only used if the configured rate control algorithm actually uses
4032 * the new rate table API, and is therefore optional. Must be atomic.
4033 *
4034 * @sta_statistics: Get statistics for this station. For example with beacon
4035 * filtering, the statistics kept by mac80211 might not be accurate, so
4036 * let the driver pre-fill the statistics. The driver can fill most of
4037 * the values (indicating which by setting the filled bitmap), but not
4038 * all of them make sense - see the source for which ones are possible.
4039 * Statistics that the driver doesn't fill will be filled by mac80211.
4040 * The callback can sleep.
4041 *
4042 * @conf_tx: Configure TX queue parameters (EDCF (aifs, cw_min, cw_max),
4043 * bursting) for a hardware TX queue.
4044 * Returns a negative error code on failure.
4045 * The callback can sleep.
4046 *
4047 * @get_tsf: Get the current TSF timer value from firmware/hardware. Currently,
4048 * this is only used for IBSS mode BSSID merging and debugging. Is not a
4049 * required function.
4050 * The callback can sleep.
4051 *
4052 * @set_tsf: Set the TSF timer to the specified value in the firmware/hardware.
4053 * Currently, this is only used for IBSS mode debugging. Is not a
4054 * required function.
4055 * The callback can sleep.
4056 *
4057 * @offset_tsf: Offset the TSF timer by the specified value in the
4058 * firmware/hardware. Preferred to set_tsf as it avoids delay between
4059 * calling set_tsf() and hardware getting programmed, which will show up
4060 * as TSF delay. Is not a required function.
4061 * The callback can sleep.
4062 *
4063 * @reset_tsf: Reset the TSF timer and allow firmware/hardware to synchronize
4064 * with other STAs in the IBSS. This is only used in IBSS mode. This
4065 * function is optional if the firmware/hardware takes full care of
4066 * TSF synchronization.
4067 * The callback can sleep.
4068 *
4069 * @tx_last_beacon: Determine whether the last IBSS beacon was sent by us.
4070 * This is needed only for IBSS mode and the result of this function is
4071 * used to determine whether to reply to Probe Requests.
4072 * Returns non-zero if this device sent the last beacon.
4073 * The callback can sleep.
4074 *
4075 * @get_survey: Return per-channel survey information
4076 *
4077 * @rfkill_poll: Poll rfkill hardware state. If you need this, you also
4078 * need to set wiphy->rfkill_poll to %true before registration,
4079 * and need to call wiphy_rfkill_set_hw_state() in the callback.
4080 * The callback can sleep.
4081 *
4082 * @set_coverage_class: Set slot time for given coverage class as specified
4083 * in IEEE 802.11-2007 section 17.3.8.6 and modify ACK timeout
4084 * accordingly; coverage class equals to -1 to enable ACK timeout
4085 * estimation algorithm (dynack). To disable dynack set valid value for
4086 * coverage class. This callback is not required and may sleep.
4087 *
4088 * @testmode_cmd: Implement a cfg80211 test mode command. The passed @vif may
4089 * be %NULL. The callback can sleep.
4090 * @testmode_dump: Implement a cfg80211 test mode dump. The callback can sleep.
4091 *
4092 * @flush: Flush all pending frames from the hardware queue, making sure
4093 * that the hardware queues are empty. The @queues parameter is a bitmap
4094 * of queues to flush, which is useful if different virtual interfaces
4095 * use different hardware queues; it may also indicate all queues.
4096 * If the parameter @drop is set to %true, pending frames may be dropped.
4097 * Note that vif can be NULL.
4098 * The callback can sleep.
4099 *
4100 * @flush_sta: Flush or drop all pending frames from the hardware queue(s) for
4101 * the given station, as it's about to be removed.
4102 * The callback can sleep.
4103 *
4104 * @channel_switch: Drivers that need (or want) to offload the channel
4105 * switch operation for CSAs received from the AP may implement this
4106 * callback. They must then call ieee80211_chswitch_done() to indicate
4107 * completion of the channel switch.
4108 *
4109 * @set_antenna: Set antenna configuration (tx_ant, rx_ant) on the device.
4110 * Parameters are bitmaps of allowed antennas to use for TX/RX. Drivers may
4111 * reject TX/RX mask combinations they cannot support by returning -EINVAL
4112 * (also see nl80211.h @NL80211_ATTR_WIPHY_ANTENNA_TX).
4113 *
4114 * @get_antenna: Get current antenna configuration from device (tx_ant, rx_ant).
4115 *
4116 * @remain_on_channel: Starts an off-channel period on the given channel, must
4117 * call back to ieee80211_ready_on_channel() when on that channel. Note
4118 * that normal channel traffic is not stopped as this is intended for hw
4119 * offload. Frames to transmit on the off-channel channel are transmitted
4120 * normally except for the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_TX_OFFCHAN flag. When the
4121 * duration (which will always be non-zero) expires, the driver must call
4122 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired().
4123 * Note that this callback may be called while the device is in IDLE and
4124 * must be accepted in this case.
4125 * This callback may sleep.
4126 * @cancel_remain_on_channel: Requests that an ongoing off-channel period is
4127 * aborted before it expires. This callback may sleep.
4128 *
4129 * @set_ringparam: Set tx and rx ring sizes.
4130 *
4131 * @get_ringparam: Get tx and rx ring current and maximum sizes.
4132 *
4133 * @tx_frames_pending: Check if there is any pending frame in the hardware
4134 * queues before entering power save.
4135 *
4136 * @set_bitrate_mask: Set a mask of rates to be used for rate control selection
4137 * when transmitting a frame. Currently only legacy rates are handled.
4138 * The callback can sleep.
4139 * @event_callback: Notify driver about any event in mac80211. See
4140 * &enum ieee80211_event_type for the different types.
4141 * The callback must be atomic.
4142 *
4143 * @release_buffered_frames: Release buffered frames according to the given
4144 * parameters. In the case where the driver buffers some frames for
4145 * sleeping stations mac80211 will use this callback to tell the driver
4146 * to release some frames, either for PS-poll or uAPSD.
4147 * Note that if the @more_data parameter is %false the driver must check
4148 * if there are more frames on the given TIDs, and if there are more than
4149 * the frames being released then it must still set the more-data bit in
4150 * the frame. If the @more_data parameter is %true, then of course the
4151 * more-data bit must always be set.
4152 * The @tids parameter tells the driver which TIDs to release frames
4153 * from, for PS-poll it will always have only a single bit set.
4154 * In the case this is used for a PS-poll initiated release, the
4155 * @num_frames parameter will always be 1 so code can be shared. In
4156 * this case the driver must also set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
4157 * on the TX status (and must report TX status) so that the PS-poll
4158 * period is properly ended. This is used to avoid sending multiple
4159 * responses for a retried PS-poll frame.
4160 * In the case this is used for uAPSD, the @num_frames parameter may be
4161 * bigger than one, but the driver may send fewer frames (it must send
4162 * at least one, however). In this case it is also responsible for
4163 * setting the EOSP flag in the QoS header of the frames. Also, when the
4164 * service period ends, the driver must set %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP
4165 * on the last frame in the SP. Alternatively, it may call the function
4166 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() to inform mac80211 of the end of the SP.
4167 * This callback must be atomic.
4168 * @allow_buffered_frames: Prepare device to allow the given number of frames
4169 * to go out to the given station. The frames will be sent by mac80211
4170 * via the usual TX path after this call. The TX information for frames
4171 * released will also have the %IEEE80211_TX_CTL_NO_PS_BUFFER flag set
4172 * and the last one will also have %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP set. In case
4173 * frames from multiple TIDs are released and the driver might reorder
4174 * them between the TIDs, it must set the %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP flag
4175 * on the last frame and clear it on all others and also handle the EOSP
4176 * bit in the QoS header correctly. Alternatively, it can also call the
4177 * ieee80211_sta_eosp() function.
4178 * The @tids parameter is a bitmap and tells the driver which TIDs the
4179 * frames will be on; it will at most have two bits set.
4180 * This callback must be atomic.
4181 *
4182 * @get_et_sset_count: Ethtool API to get string-set count.
4183 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's
4184 * expected to return a static value.
4185 *
4186 * @get_et_stats: Ethtool API to get a set of u64 stats.
4187 *
4188 * @get_et_strings: Ethtool API to get a set of strings to describe stats
4189 * and perhaps other supported types of ethtool data-sets.
4190 * Note that the wiphy mutex is not held for this callback since it's
4191 * expected to return a static value.
4192 *
4193 * @mgd_prepare_tx: Prepare for transmitting a management frame for association
4194 * before associated. In multi-channel scenarios, a virtual interface is
4195 * bound to a channel before it is associated, but as it isn't associated
4196 * yet it need not necessarily be given airtime, in particular since any
4197 * transmission to a P2P GO needs to be synchronized against the GO's
4198 * powersave state. mac80211 will call this function before transmitting a
4199 * management frame prior to having successfully associated to allow the
4200 * driver to give it channel time for the transmission, to get a response
4201 * and to be able to synchronize with the GO.
4202 * For drivers that set %IEEE80211_HW_DEAUTH_NEED_MGD_TX_PREP, mac80211
4203 * would also call this function before transmitting a deauthentication
4204 * frame in case that no beacon was heard from the AP/P2P GO.
4205 * The callback will be called before each transmission and upon return
4206 * mac80211 will transmit the frame right away.
4207 * Additional information is passed in the &struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info
4208 * data. If duration there is greater than zero, mac80211 hints to the
4209 * driver the duration for which the operation is requested.
4210 * The callback is optional and can (should!) sleep.
4211 * @mgd_complete_tx: Notify the driver that the response frame for a previously
4212 * transmitted frame announced with @mgd_prepare_tx was received, the data
4213 * is filled similarly to @mgd_prepare_tx though the duration is not used.
4214 *
4215 * @mgd_protect_tdls_discover: Protect a TDLS discovery session. After sending
4216 * a TDLS discovery-request, we expect a reply to arrive on the AP's
4217 * channel. We must stay on the channel (no PSM, scan, etc.), since a TDLS
4218 * setup-response is a direct packet not buffered by the AP.
4219 * mac80211 will call this function just before the transmission of a TDLS
4220 * discovery-request. The recommended period of protection is at least
4221 * 2 * (DTIM period).
4222 * The callback is optional and can sleep.
4223 *
4224 * @add_chanctx: Notifies device driver about new channel context creation.
4225 * This callback may sleep.
4226 * @remove_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context destruction.
4227 * This callback may sleep.
4228 * @change_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context changes that
4229 * may happen when combining different virtual interfaces on the same
4230 * channel context with different settings
4231 * This callback may sleep.
4232 * @assign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being bound
4233 * to vif. Possible use is for hw queue remapping.
4234 * This callback may sleep.
4235 * @unassign_vif_chanctx: Notifies device driver about channel context being
4236 * unbound from vif.
4237 * This callback may sleep.
4238 * @switch_vif_chanctx: switch a number of vifs from one chanctx to
4239 * another, as specified in the list of
4240 * @ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch passed to the driver, according
4241 * to the mode defined in &ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode.
4242 * This callback may sleep.
4243 *
4244 * @start_ap: Start operation on the AP interface, this is called after all the
4245 * information in bss_conf is set and beacon can be retrieved. A channel
4246 * context is bound before this is called. Note that if the driver uses
4247 * software scan or ROC, this (and @stop_ap) isn't called when the AP is
4248 * just "paused" for scanning/ROC, which is indicated by the beacon being
4249 * disabled/enabled via @bss_info_changed.
4250 * @stop_ap: Stop operation on the AP interface.
4251 *
4252 * @reconfig_complete: Called after a call to ieee80211_restart_hw() and
4253 * during resume, when the reconfiguration has completed.
4254 * This can help the driver implement the reconfiguration step (and
4255 * indicate mac80211 is ready to receive frames).
4256 * This callback may sleep.
4257 *
4258 * @ipv6_addr_change: IPv6 address assignment on the given interface changed.
4259 * Currently, this is only called for managed or P2P client interfaces.
4260 * This callback is optional; it must not sleep.
4261 *
4262 * @channel_switch_beacon: Starts a channel switch to a new channel.
4263 * Beacons are modified to include CSA or ECSA IEs before calling this
4264 * function. The corresponding count fields in these IEs must be
4265 * decremented, and when they reach 1 the driver must call
4266 * ieee80211_csa_finish(). Drivers which use ieee80211_beacon_get()
4267 * get the csa counter decremented by mac80211, but must check if it is
4268 * 1 using ieee80211_beacon_counter_is_complete() after the beacon has been
4269 * transmitted and then call ieee80211_csa_finish().
4270 * If the CSA count starts as zero or 1, this function will not be called,
4271 * since there won't be any time to beacon before the switch anyway.
4272 * @pre_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4273 * before a channel switch procedure is started (ie. when a STA
4274 * gets a CSA or a userspace initiated channel-switch), allowing
4275 * the driver to prepare for the channel switch.
4276 * @post_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4277 * after a channel switch procedure is completed, allowing the
4278 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4279 * @abort_channel_switch: This is an optional callback that is called
4280 * when channel switch procedure was aborted, allowing the
4281 * driver to go back to a normal configuration.
4282 * @channel_switch_rx_beacon: This is an optional callback that is called
4283 * when channel switch procedure is in progress and additional beacon with
4284 * CSA IE was received, allowing driver to track changes in count.
4285 * @join_ibss: Join an IBSS (on an IBSS interface); this is called after all
4286 * information in bss_conf is set up and the beacon can be retrieved. A
4287 * channel context is bound before this is called.
4288 * @leave_ibss: Leave the IBSS again.
4289 *
4290 * @get_expected_throughput: extract the expected throughput towards the
4291 * specified station. The returned value is expressed in Kbps. It returns 0
4292 * if the RC algorithm does not have proper data to provide.
4293 *
4294 * @get_txpower: get current maximum tx power (in dBm) based on configuration
4295 * and hardware limits.
4296 *
4297 * @tdls_channel_switch: Start channel-switching with a TDLS peer. The driver
4298 * is responsible for continually initiating channel-switching operations
4299 * and returning to the base channel for communication with the AP. The
4300 * driver receives a channel-switch request template and the location of
4301 * the switch-timing IE within the template as part of the invocation.
4302 * The template is valid only within the call, and the driver can
4303 * optionally copy the skb for further re-use.
4304 * @tdls_cancel_channel_switch: Stop channel-switching with a TDLS peer. Both
4305 * peers must be on the base channel when the call completes.
4306 * @tdls_recv_channel_switch: a TDLS channel-switch related frame (request or
4307 * response) has been received from a remote peer. The driver gets
4308 * parameters parsed from the incoming frame and may use them to continue
4309 * an ongoing channel-switch operation. In addition, a channel-switch
4310 * response template is provided, together with the location of the
4311 * switch-timing IE within the template. The skb can only be used within
4312 * the function call.
4313 *
4314 * @wake_tx_queue: Called when new packets have been added to the queue.
4315 * @sync_rx_queues: Process all pending frames in RSS queues. This is a
4316 * synchronization which is needed in case driver has in its RSS queues
4317 * pending frames that were received prior to the control path action
4318 * currently taken (e.g. disassociation) but are not processed yet.
4319 *
4320 * @start_nan: join an existing NAN cluster, or create a new one.
4321 * @stop_nan: leave the NAN cluster.
4322 * @nan_change_conf: change NAN configuration. The data in cfg80211_nan_conf
4323 * contains full new configuration and changes specify which parameters
4324 * are changed with respect to the last NAN config.
4325 * The driver gets both full configuration and the changed parameters since
4326 * some devices may need the full configuration while others need only the
4327 * changed parameters.
4328 * @add_nan_func: Add a NAN function. Returns 0 on success. The data in
4329 * cfg80211_nan_func must not be referenced outside the scope of
4330 * this call.
4331 * @del_nan_func: Remove a NAN function. The driver must call
4332 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated() with
4333 * NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_USER_REQUEST reason code upon removal.
4334 * @can_aggregate_in_amsdu: Called in order to determine if HW supports
4335 * aggregating two specific frames in the same A-MSDU. The relation
4336 * between the skbs should be symmetric and transitive. Note that while
4337 * skb is always a real frame, head may or may not be an A-MSDU.
4338 * @get_ftm_responder_stats: Retrieve FTM responder statistics, if available.
4339 * Statistics should be cumulative, currently no way to reset is provided.
4340 *
4341 * @start_pmsr: start peer measurement (e.g. FTM) (this call can sleep)
4342 * @abort_pmsr: abort peer measurement (this call can sleep)
4343 * @set_tid_config: Apply TID specific configurations. This callback may sleep.
4344 * @reset_tid_config: Reset TID specific configuration for the peer.
4345 * This callback may sleep.
4346 * @update_vif_offload: Update virtual interface offload flags
4347 * This callback may sleep.
4348 * @sta_set_4addr: Called to notify the driver when a station starts/stops using
4349 * 4-address mode
4350 * @set_sar_specs: Update the SAR (TX power) settings.
4351 * @sta_set_decap_offload: Called to notify the driver when a station is allowed
4352 * to use rx decapsulation offload
4353 * @add_twt_setup: Update hw with TWT agreement parameters received from the peer.
4354 * This callback allows the hw to check if requested parameters
4355 * are supported and if there is enough room for a new agreement.
4356 * The hw is expected to set agreement result in the req_type field of
4357 * twt structure.
4358 * @twt_teardown_request: Update the hw with TWT teardown request received
4359 * from the peer.
4360 * @set_radar_background: Configure dedicated offchannel chain available for
4361 * radar/CAC detection on some hw. This chain can't be used to transmit
4362 * or receive frames and it is bounded to a running wdev.
4363 * Background radar/CAC detection allows to avoid the CAC downtime
4364 * switching to a different channel during CAC detection on the selected
4365 * radar channel.
4366 * The caller is expected to set chandef pointer to NULL in order to
4367 * disable background CAC/radar detection.
4368 * @net_fill_forward_path: Called from .ndo_fill_forward_path in order to
4369 * resolve a path for hardware flow offloading
4370 * @can_activate_links: Checks if a specific active_links bitmap is
4371 * supported by the driver.
4372 * @change_vif_links: Change the valid links on an interface, note that while
4373 * removing the old link information is still valid (link_conf pointer),
4374 * but may immediately disappear after the function returns. The old or
4375 * new links bitmaps may be 0 if going from/to a non-MLO situation.
4376 * The @old array contains pointers to the old bss_conf structures
4377 * that were already removed, in case they're needed.
4378 * This callback can sleep.
4379 * @change_sta_links: Change the valid links of a station, similar to
4380 * @change_vif_links. This callback can sleep.
4381 * Note that a sta can also be inserted or removed with valid links,
4382 * i.e. passed to @sta_add/@sta_state with sta->valid_links not zero.
4383 * In fact, cannot change from having valid_links and not having them.
4384 * @set_hw_timestamp: Enable/disable HW timestamping of TM/FTM frames. This is
4385 * not restored at HW reset by mac80211 so drivers need to take care of
4386 * that.
4387 * @net_setup_tc: Called from .ndo_setup_tc in order to prepare hardware
4388 * flow offloading for flows originating from the vif.
4389 * Note that the driver must not assume that the vif driver_data is valid
4390 * at this point, since the callback can be called during netdev teardown.
4391 * @can_neg_ttlm: for managed interface, requests the driver to determine
4392 * if the requested TID-To-Link mapping can be accepted or not.
4393 * If it's not accepted the driver may suggest a preferred mapping and
4394 * modify @ttlm parameter with the suggested TID-to-Link mapping.
4395 */
4396struct ieee80211_ops {
4397 void (*tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4398 struct ieee80211_tx_control *control,
4399 struct sk_buff *skb);
4400 int (*start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4401 void (*stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4402#ifdef CONFIG_PM
4403 int (*suspend)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct cfg80211_wowlan *wowlan);
4404 int (*resume)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4405 void (*set_wakeup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, bool enabled);
4406#endif
4407 int (*add_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4408 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4409 int (*change_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4410 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4411 enum nl80211_iftype new_type, bool p2p);
4412 void (*remove_interface)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4413 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4414 int (*config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 changed);
4415 void (*bss_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4416 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4417 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4418 u64 changed);
4419 void (*vif_cfg_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4420 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4421 u64 changed);
4422 void (*link_info_changed)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4423 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4424 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *info,
4425 u64 changed);
4426
4427 int (*start_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4428 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4429 void (*stop_ap)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4430 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4431
4432 u64 (*prepare_multicast)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4433 struct netdev_hw_addr_list *mc_list);
4434 void (*configure_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4435 unsigned int changed_flags,
4436 unsigned int *total_flags,
4437 u64 multicast);
4438 void (*config_iface_filter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4439 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4440 unsigned int filter_flags,
4441 unsigned int changed_flags);
4442 int (*set_tim)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4443 bool set);
4444 int (*set_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, enum set_key_cmd cmd,
4445 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4446 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key);
4447 void (*update_tkip_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4448 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4449 struct ieee80211_key_conf *conf,
4450 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4451 u32 iv32, u16 *phase1key);
4452 void (*set_rekey_data)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4453 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4454 struct cfg80211_gtk_rekey_data *data);
4455 void (*set_default_unicast_key)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4456 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int idx);
4457 int (*hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4458 struct ieee80211_scan_request *req);
4459 void (*cancel_hw_scan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4461 int (*sched_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4462 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4463 struct cfg80211_sched_scan_request *req,
4464 struct ieee80211_scan_ies *ies);
4465 int (*sched_scan_stop)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4466 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4467 void (*sw_scan_start)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4468 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4469 const u8 *mac_addr);
4470 void (*sw_scan_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4471 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4472 int (*get_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4473 struct ieee80211_low_level_stats *stats);
4474 void (*get_key_seq)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4475 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
4476 struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
4477 int (*set_frag_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4478 int (*set_rts_threshold)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 value);
4479 int (*sta_add)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4480 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4481 int (*sta_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4482 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4483#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_DEBUGFS
4484 void (*vif_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4485 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4486 void (*link_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4487 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4488 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4489 struct dentry *dir);
4490 void (*sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4491 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4492 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4493 struct dentry *dir);
4494 void (*link_sta_add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4495 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4496 struct ieee80211_link_sta *link_sta,
4497 struct dentry *dir);
4498#endif
4499 void (*sta_notify)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4500 enum sta_notify_cmd, struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4501 int (*sta_set_txpwr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4503 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4504 int (*sta_state)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4505 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4506 enum ieee80211_sta_state old_state,
4507 enum ieee80211_sta_state new_state);
4508 void (*sta_pre_rcu_remove)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4509 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4510 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4511 void (*sta_rc_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4512 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4513 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4514 u32 changed);
4515 void (*sta_rate_tbl_update)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4516 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4517 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4518 void (*sta_statistics)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4519 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4520 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4521 struct station_info *sinfo);
4522 int (*conf_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4523 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4524 unsigned int link_id, u16 ac,
4525 const struct ieee80211_tx_queue_params *params);
4526 u64 (*get_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4527 void (*set_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4528 u64 tsf);
4529 void (*offset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4530 s64 offset);
4531 void (*reset_tsf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4532 int (*tx_last_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4533
4534 /**
4535 * @ampdu_action:
4536 * Perform a certain A-MPDU action.
4537 * The RA/TID combination determines the destination and TID we want
4538 * the ampdu action to be performed for. The action is defined through
4539 * ieee80211_ampdu_mlme_action.
4540 * When the action is set to %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_OPERATIONAL the driver
4541 * may neither send aggregates containing more subframes than @buf_size
4542 * nor send aggregates in a way that lost frames would exceed the
4543 * buffer size. If just limiting the aggregate size, this would be
4544 * possible with a buf_size of 8:
4545 *
4546 * - ``TX: 1.....7``
4547 * - ``RX: 2....7`` (lost frame #1)
4548 * - ``TX: 8..1...``
4549 *
4550 * which is invalid since #1 was now re-transmitted well past the
4551 * buffer size of 8. Correct ways to retransmit #1 would be:
4552 *
4553 * - ``TX: 1 or``
4554 * - ``TX: 18 or``
4555 * - ``TX: 81``
4556 *
4557 * Even ``189`` would be wrong since 1 could be lost again.
4558 *
4559 * Returns a negative error code on failure. The driver may return
4560 * %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START_IMMEDIATE for %IEEE80211_AMPDU_TX_START
4561 * if the session can start immediately.
4562 *
4563 * The callback can sleep.
4564 */
4565 int (*ampdu_action)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4566 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4567 struct ieee80211_ampdu_params *params);
4568 int (*get_survey)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int idx,
4569 struct survey_info *survey);
4570 void (*rfkill_poll)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4571 void (*set_coverage_class)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, s16 coverage_class);
4572#ifdef CONFIG_NL80211_TESTMODE
4573 int (*testmode_cmd)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4574 void *data, int len);
4575 int (*testmode_dump)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb,
4576 struct netlink_callback *cb,
4577 void *data, int len);
4578#endif
4579 void (*flush)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4580 u32 queues, bool drop);
4581 void (*flush_sta)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4582 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4583 void (*channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4584 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4585 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4586 int (*set_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx_ant, u32 rx_ant);
4587 int (*get_antenna)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 *tx_ant, u32 *rx_ant);
4588
4589 int (*remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4590 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4591 struct ieee80211_channel *chan,
4592 int duration,
4593 enum ieee80211_roc_type type);
4594 int (*cancel_remain_on_channel)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4595 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4596 int (*set_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 tx, u32 rx);
4597 void (*get_ringparam)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4598 u32 *tx, u32 *tx_max, u32 *rx, u32 *rx_max);
4599 bool (*tx_frames_pending)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4600 int (*set_bitrate_mask)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4601 const struct cfg80211_bitrate_mask *mask);
4602 void (*event_callback)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4603 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4604 const struct ieee80211_event *event);
4605
4606 void (*allow_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4607 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4608 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4609 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4610 bool more_data);
4611 void (*release_buffered_frames)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4612 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4613 u16 tids, int num_frames,
4614 enum ieee80211_frame_release_type reason,
4615 bool more_data);
4616
4617 int (*get_et_sset_count)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4618 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, int sset);
4619 void (*get_et_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4620 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4621 struct ethtool_stats *stats, u64 *data);
4622 void (*get_et_strings)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4623 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4624 u32 sset, u8 *data);
4625
4626 void (*mgd_prepare_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4627 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4628 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4629 void (*mgd_complete_tx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4630 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4631 struct ieee80211_prep_tx_info *info);
4632
4633 void (*mgd_protect_tdls_discover)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4634 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4635 unsigned int link_id);
4636
4637 int (*add_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4638 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4639 void (*remove_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4640 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4641 void (*change_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4642 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
4643 u32 changed);
4644 int (*assign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4645 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4646 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4647 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4648 void (*unassign_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4649 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4650 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf,
4651 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
4652 int (*switch_vif_chanctx)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4653 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
4654 int n_vifs,
4655 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
4656
4657 void (*reconfig_complete)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4658 enum ieee80211_reconfig_type reconfig_type);
4659
4660#if IS_ENABLED(CONFIG_IPV6)
4661 void (*ipv6_addr_change)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4662 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4663 struct inet6_dev *idev);
4664#endif
4665 void (*channel_switch_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4666 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4667 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4668 int (*pre_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4669 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4670 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4671
4672 int (*post_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4673 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4674 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4675 void (*abort_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4676 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4677 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *link_conf);
4678 void (*channel_switch_rx_beacon)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4679 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4680 struct ieee80211_channel_switch *ch_switch);
4681
4682 int (*join_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4683 void (*leave_ibss)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4684 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4685 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4686 int (*get_txpower)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4687 int *dbm);
4688
4689 int (*tdls_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4690 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4691 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 oper_class,
4692 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
4693 struct sk_buff *tmpl_skb, u32 ch_sw_tm_ie);
4694 void (*tdls_cancel_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4695 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4696 struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
4697 void (*tdls_recv_channel_switch)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4698 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4699 struct ieee80211_tdls_ch_sw_params *params);
4700
4701 void (*wake_tx_queue)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4702 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
4703 void (*sync_rx_queues)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4704
4705 int (*start_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4706 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4707 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf);
4708 int (*stop_nan)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4709 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4710 int (*nan_change_conf)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4711 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4712 struct cfg80211_nan_conf *conf, u32 changes);
4713 int (*add_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4714 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4715 const struct cfg80211_nan_func *nan_func);
4716 void (*del_nan_func)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4717 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4718 u8 instance_id);
4719 bool (*can_aggregate_in_amsdu)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4720 struct sk_buff *head,
4721 struct sk_buff *skb);
4722 int (*get_ftm_responder_stats)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4723 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4724 struct cfg80211_ftm_responder_stats *ftm_stats);
4725 int (*start_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4726 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4727 void (*abort_pmsr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4728 struct cfg80211_pmsr_request *request);
4729 int (*set_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4730 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4731 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4732 struct cfg80211_tid_config *tid_conf);
4733 int (*reset_tid_config)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4734 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4735 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tids);
4736 void (*update_vif_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4737 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
4738 void (*sta_set_4addr)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4739 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4740 int (*set_sar_specs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4741 const struct cfg80211_sar_specs *sar);
4742 void (*sta_set_decap_offload)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4743 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4744 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool enabled);
4745 void (*add_twt_setup)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4746 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4747 struct ieee80211_twt_setup *twt);
4748 void (*twt_teardown_request)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4749 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 flowid);
4750 int (*set_radar_background)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4751 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef);
4752 int (*net_fill_forward_path)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4753 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4754 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4755 struct net_device_path_ctx *ctx,
4756 struct net_device_path *path);
4757 bool (*can_activate_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4758 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4759 u16 active_links);
4760 int (*change_vif_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4761 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4762 u16 old_links, u16 new_links,
4763 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *old[IEEE80211_MLD_MAX_NUM_LINKS]);
4764 int (*change_sta_links)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4765 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4766 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
4767 u16 old_links, u16 new_links);
4768 int (*set_hw_timestamp)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4769 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4770 struct cfg80211_set_hw_timestamp *hwts);
4771 int (*net_setup_tc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4772 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4773 struct net_device *dev,
4774 enum tc_setup_type type,
4775 void *type_data);
4776 enum ieee80211_neg_ttlm_res
4777 (*can_neg_ttlm)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
4778 struct ieee80211_neg_ttlm *ttlm);
4779};
4780
4781/**
4782 * ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm - Allocate a new hardware device
4783 *
4784 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4785 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4786 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4787 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4788 * @priv_data_len.
4789 *
4790 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4791 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4792 * @requested_name: Requested name for this device.
4793 * NULL is valid value, and means use the default naming (phy%d)
4794 *
4795 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4796 */
4797struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(size_t priv_data_len,
4798 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops,
4799 const char *requested_name);
4800
4801/**
4802 * ieee80211_alloc_hw - Allocate a new hardware device
4803 *
4804 * This must be called once for each hardware device. The returned pointer
4805 * must be used to refer to this device when calling other functions.
4806 * mac80211 allocates a private data area for the driver pointed to by
4807 * @priv in &struct ieee80211_hw, the size of this area is given as
4808 * @priv_data_len.
4809 *
4810 * @priv_data_len: length of private data
4811 * @ops: callbacks for this device
4812 *
4813 * Return: A pointer to the new hardware device, or %NULL on error.
4814 */
4815static inline
4816struct ieee80211_hw *ieee80211_alloc_hw(size_t priv_data_len,
4817 const struct ieee80211_ops *ops)
4818{
4819 return ieee80211_alloc_hw_nm(priv_data_len, ops, NULL);
4820}
4821
4822/**
4823 * ieee80211_register_hw - Register hardware device
4824 *
4825 * You must call this function before any other functions in
4826 * mac80211. Note that before a hardware can be registered, you
4827 * need to fill the contained wiphy's information.
4828 *
4829 * @hw: the device to register as returned by ieee80211_alloc_hw()
4830 *
4831 * Return: 0 on success. An error code otherwise.
4832 */
4833int ieee80211_register_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4834
4835/**
4836 * struct ieee80211_tpt_blink - throughput blink description
4837 * @throughput: throughput in Kbit/sec
4838 * @blink_time: blink time in milliseconds
4839 * (full cycle, ie. one off + one on period)
4840 */
4841struct ieee80211_tpt_blink {
4842 int throughput;
4843 int blink_time;
4844};
4845
4846/**
4847 * enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags - throughput trigger flags
4848 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO: enable blinking with radio
4849 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK: enable blinking when working
4850 * @IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED: enable blinking when at least one
4851 * interface is connected in some way, including being an AP
4852 */
4853enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags {
4854 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_RADIO = BIT(0),
4855 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_WORK = BIT(1),
4856 IEEE80211_TPT_LEDTRIG_FL_CONNECTED = BIT(2),
4857};
4858
4859#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4860const char *__ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4861const char *__ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4862const char *__ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4863const char *__ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4864const char *
4865__ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
4866 unsigned int flags,
4867 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4868 unsigned int blink_table_len);
4869#endif
4870/**
4871 * ieee80211_get_tx_led_name - get name of TX LED
4872 *
4873 * mac80211 creates a transmit LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4874 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4875 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4876 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4877 *
4878 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4879 *
4880 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4881 */
4882static inline const char *ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4883{
4884#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4885 return __ieee80211_get_tx_led_name(hw);
4886#else
4887 return NULL;
4888#endif
4889}
4890
4891/**
4892 * ieee80211_get_rx_led_name - get name of RX LED
4893 *
4894 * mac80211 creates a receive LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4895 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4896 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4897 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4898 *
4899 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4900 *
4901 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4902 */
4903static inline const char *ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4904{
4905#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4906 return __ieee80211_get_rx_led_name(hw);
4907#else
4908 return NULL;
4909#endif
4910}
4911
4912/**
4913 * ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name - get name of association LED
4914 *
4915 * mac80211 creates a association LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4916 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4917 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4918 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4919 *
4920 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4921 *
4922 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4923 */
4924static inline const char *ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4925{
4926#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4927 return __ieee80211_get_assoc_led_name(hw);
4928#else
4929 return NULL;
4930#endif
4931}
4932
4933/**
4934 * ieee80211_get_radio_led_name - get name of radio LED
4935 *
4936 * mac80211 creates a radio change LED trigger for each wireless hardware
4937 * that can be used to drive LEDs if your driver registers a LED device.
4938 * This function returns the name (or %NULL if not configured for LEDs)
4939 * of the trigger so you can automatically link the LED device.
4940 *
4941 * @hw: the hardware to get the LED trigger name for
4942 *
4943 * Return: The name of the LED trigger. %NULL if not configured for LEDs.
4944 */
4945static inline const char *ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(struct ieee80211_hw *hw)
4946{
4947#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4948 return __ieee80211_get_radio_led_name(hw);
4949#else
4950 return NULL;
4951#endif
4952}
4953
4954/**
4955 * ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger - create throughput LED trigger
4956 * @hw: the hardware to create the trigger for
4957 * @flags: trigger flags, see &enum ieee80211_tpt_led_trigger_flags
4958 * @blink_table: the blink table -- needs to be ordered by throughput
4959 * @blink_table_len: size of the blink table
4960 *
4961 * Return: %NULL (in case of error, or if no LED triggers are
4962 * configured) or the name of the new trigger.
4963 *
4964 * Note: This function must be called before ieee80211_register_hw().
4965 */
4966static inline const char *
4967ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, unsigned int flags,
4968 const struct ieee80211_tpt_blink *blink_table,
4969 unsigned int blink_table_len)
4970{
4971#ifdef CONFIG_MAC80211_LEDS
4972 return __ieee80211_create_tpt_led_trigger(hw, flags, blink_table,
4973 blink_table_len);
4974#else
4975 return NULL;
4976#endif
4977}
4978
4979/**
4980 * ieee80211_unregister_hw - Unregister a hardware device
4981 *
4982 * This function instructs mac80211 to free allocated resources
4983 * and unregister netdevices from the networking subsystem.
4984 *
4985 * @hw: the hardware to unregister
4986 */
4987void ieee80211_unregister_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4988
4989/**
4990 * ieee80211_free_hw - free hardware descriptor
4991 *
4992 * This function frees everything that was allocated, including the
4993 * private data for the driver. You must call ieee80211_unregister_hw()
4994 * before calling this function.
4995 *
4996 * @hw: the hardware to free
4997 */
4998void ieee80211_free_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
4999
5000/**
5001 * ieee80211_restart_hw - restart hardware completely
5002 *
5003 * Call this function when the hardware was restarted for some reason
5004 * (hardware error, ...) and the driver is unable to restore its state
5005 * by itself. mac80211 assumes that at this point the driver/hardware
5006 * is completely uninitialised and stopped, it starts the process by
5007 * calling the ->start() operation. The driver will need to reset all
5008 * internal state that it has prior to calling this function.
5009 *
5010 * @hw: the hardware to restart
5011 */
5012void ieee80211_restart_hw(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
5013
5014/**
5015 * ieee80211_rx_list - receive frame and store processed skbs in a list
5016 *
5017 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
5018 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
5019 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
5020 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
5021 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
5022 *
5023 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5024 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
5025 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
5026 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5027 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
5028 *
5029 * This function must be called with BHs disabled and RCU read lock
5030 *
5031 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
5032 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
5033 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
5034 * @list: the destination list
5035 */
5036void ieee80211_rx_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5037 struct sk_buff *skb, struct list_head *list);
5038
5039/**
5040 * ieee80211_rx_napi - receive frame from NAPI context
5041 *
5042 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
5043 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
5044 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
5045 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
5046 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
5047 *
5048 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5049 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
5050 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
5051 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5052 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
5053 *
5054 * This function must be called with BHs disabled.
5055 *
5056 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
5057 * @sta: the station the frame was received from, or %NULL
5058 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
5059 * @napi: the NAPI context
5060 */
5061void ieee80211_rx_napi(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5062 struct sk_buff *skb, struct napi_struct *napi);
5063
5064/**
5065 * ieee80211_rx - receive frame
5066 *
5067 * Use this function to hand received frames to mac80211. The receive
5068 * buffer in @skb must start with an IEEE 802.11 header. In case of a
5069 * paged @skb is used, the driver is recommended to put the ieee80211
5070 * header of the frame on the linear part of the @skb to avoid memory
5071 * allocation and/or memcpy by the stack.
5072 *
5073 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5074 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls to
5075 * this function, ieee80211_rx_ni() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may not be
5076 * mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5077 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
5078 *
5079 * In process context use instead ieee80211_rx_ni().
5080 *
5081 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
5082 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
5083 */
5084static inline void ieee80211_rx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb)
5085{
5086 ieee80211_rx_napi(hw, NULL, skb, NULL);
5087}
5088
5089/**
5090 * ieee80211_rx_irqsafe - receive frame
5091 *
5092 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in IRQ context
5093 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
5094 *
5095 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni() may not
5096 * be mixed for a single hardware.Must not run concurrently with
5097 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
5098 *
5099 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
5100 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
5101 */
5102void ieee80211_rx_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct sk_buff *skb);
5103
5104/**
5105 * ieee80211_rx_ni - receive frame (in process context)
5106 *
5107 * Like ieee80211_rx() but can be called in process context
5108 * (internally disables bottom halves).
5109 *
5110 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_rx() and ieee80211_rx_irqsafe() may
5111 * not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5112 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb() or ieee80211_tx_status_ni().
5113 *
5114 * @hw: the hardware this frame came in on
5115 * @skb: the buffer to receive, owned by mac80211 after this call
5116 */
5117static inline void ieee80211_rx_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5118 struct sk_buff *skb)
5119{
5120 local_bh_disable();
5121 ieee80211_rx(hw, skb);
5122 local_bh_enable();
5123}
5124
5125/**
5126 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition - PS transition for connected sta
5127 *
5128 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS
5129 * flag set, use this function to inform mac80211 about a connected station
5130 * entering/leaving PS mode.
5131 *
5132 * This function may not be called in IRQ context or with softirqs enabled.
5133 *
5134 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized against
5135 * each other.
5136 *
5137 * @sta: currently connected sta
5138 * @start: start or stop PS
5139 *
5140 * Return: 0 on success. -EINVAL when the requested PS mode is already set.
5141 */
5142int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, bool start);
5143
5144/**
5145 * ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni - PS transition for connected sta
5146 * (in process context)
5147 *
5148 * Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition() but can be called in process context
5149 * (internally disables bottom halves). Concurrent call restriction still
5150 * applies.
5151 *
5152 * @sta: currently connected sta
5153 * @start: start or stop PS
5154 *
5155 * Return: Like ieee80211_sta_ps_transition().
5156 */
5157static inline int ieee80211_sta_ps_transition_ni(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5158 bool start)
5159{
5160 int ret;
5161
5162 local_bh_disable();
5163 ret = ieee80211_sta_ps_transition(sta, start);
5164 local_bh_enable();
5165
5166 return ret;
5167}
5168
5169/**
5170 * ieee80211_sta_pspoll - PS-Poll frame received
5171 * @sta: currently connected station
5172 *
5173 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
5174 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a PS-Poll frame from a
5175 * connected station was received.
5176 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
5177 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(); calls to all three must
5178 * be serialized.
5179 */
5180void ieee80211_sta_pspoll(struct ieee80211_sta *sta);
5181
5182/**
5183 * ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger - (potential) U-APSD trigger frame received
5184 * @sta: currently connected station
5185 * @tid: TID of the received (potential) trigger frame
5186 *
5187 * When operating in AP mode with the %IEEE80211_HW_AP_LINK_PS flag set,
5188 * use this function to inform mac80211 that a (potential) trigger frame
5189 * from a connected station was received.
5190 * This must be used in conjunction with ieee80211_sta_ps_transition()
5191 * and possibly ieee80211_sta_pspoll(); calls to all three must be
5192 * serialized.
5193 * %IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS can be passed as the tid if the tid is unknown.
5194 * In this case, mac80211 will not check that this tid maps to an AC
5195 * that is trigger enabled and assume that the caller did the proper
5196 * checks.
5197 */
5198void ieee80211_sta_uapsd_trigger(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
5199
5200/*
5201 * The TX headroom reserved by mac80211 for its own tx_status functions.
5202 * This is enough for the radiotap header.
5203 */
5204#define IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_HEADROOM ALIGN(14, 4)
5205
5206/**
5207 * ieee80211_sta_set_buffered - inform mac80211 about driver-buffered frames
5208 * @sta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer for the sleeping station
5209 * @tid: the TID that has buffered frames
5210 * @buffered: indicates whether or not frames are buffered for this TID
5211 *
5212 * If a driver buffers frames for a powersave station instead of passing
5213 * them back to mac80211 for retransmission, the station may still need
5214 * to be told that there are buffered frames via the TIM bit.
5215 *
5216 * This function informs mac80211 whether or not there are frames that are
5217 * buffered in the driver for a given TID; mac80211 can then use this data
5218 * to set the TIM bit (NOTE: This may call back into the driver's set_tim
5219 * call! Beware of the locking!)
5220 *
5221 * If all frames are released to the station (due to PS-poll or uAPSD)
5222 * then the driver needs to inform mac80211 that there no longer are
5223 * frames buffered. However, when the station wakes up mac80211 assumes
5224 * that all buffered frames will be transmitted and clears this data,
5225 * drivers need to make sure they inform mac80211 about all buffered
5226 * frames on the sleep transition (sta_notify() with %STA_NOTIFY_SLEEP).
5227 *
5228 * Note that technically mac80211 only needs to know this per AC, not per
5229 * TID, but since driver buffering will inevitably happen per TID (since
5230 * it is related to aggregation) it is easier to make mac80211 map the
5231 * TID to the AC as required instead of keeping track in all drivers that
5232 * use this API.
5233 */
5234void ieee80211_sta_set_buffered(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5235 u8 tid, bool buffered);
5236
5237/**
5238 * ieee80211_get_tx_rates - get the selected transmit rates for a packet
5239 *
5240 * Call this function in a driver with per-packet rate selection support
5241 * to combine the rate info in the packet tx info with the most recent
5242 * rate selection table for the station entry.
5243 *
5244 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5245 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent.
5246 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
5247 * @dest: buffer for extracted rate/retry information
5248 * @max_rates: maximum number of rates to fetch
5249 */
5250void ieee80211_get_tx_rates(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5251 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5252 struct sk_buff *skb,
5253 struct ieee80211_tx_rate *dest,
5254 int max_rates);
5255
5256/**
5257 * ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput - set the expected tpt for a station
5258 *
5259 * Call this function to notify mac80211 about a change in expected throughput
5260 * to a station. A driver for a device that does rate control in firmware can
5261 * call this function when the expected throughput estimate towards a station
5262 * changes. The information is used to tune the CoDel AQM applied to traffic
5263 * going towards that station (which can otherwise be too aggressive and cause
5264 * slow stations to starve).
5265 *
5266 * @pubsta: the station to set throughput for.
5267 * @thr: the current expected throughput in kbps.
5268 */
5269void ieee80211_sta_set_expected_throughput(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5270 u32 thr);
5271
5272/**
5273 * ieee80211_tx_rate_update - transmit rate update callback
5274 *
5275 * Drivers should call this functions with a non-NULL pub sta
5276 * This function can be used in drivers that does not have provision
5277 * in updating the tx rate in data path.
5278 *
5279 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5280 * @pubsta: the station to update the tx rate for.
5281 * @info: tx status information
5282 */
5283void ieee80211_tx_rate_update(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5284 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
5285 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info);
5286
5287/**
5288 * ieee80211_tx_status_skb - transmit status callback
5289 *
5290 * Call this function for all transmitted frames after they have been
5291 * transmitted. It is permissible to not call this function for
5292 * multicast frames but this can affect statistics.
5293 *
5294 * This function may not be called in IRQ context. Calls to this function
5295 * for a single hardware must be synchronized against each other. Calls
5296 * to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni() and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe()
5297 * may not be mixed for a single hardware. Must not run concurrently with
5298 * ieee80211_rx() or ieee80211_rx_ni().
5299 *
5300 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5301 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5302 */
5303void ieee80211_tx_status_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5304 struct sk_buff *skb);
5305
5306/**
5307 * ieee80211_tx_status_ext - extended transmit status callback
5308 *
5309 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb()
5310 * in drivers that may want to provide extra information that does not
5311 * fit into &struct ieee80211_tx_info.
5312 *
5313 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5314 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5315 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5316 *
5317 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5318 * @status: tx status information
5319 */
5320void ieee80211_tx_status_ext(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5321 struct ieee80211_tx_status *status);
5322
5323/**
5324 * ieee80211_tx_status_noskb - transmit status callback without skb
5325 *
5326 * This function can be used as a replacement for ieee80211_tx_status_skb()
5327 * in drivers that cannot reliably map tx status information back to
5328 * specific skbs.
5329 *
5330 * Calls to this function for a single hardware must be synchronized
5331 * against each other. Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_ni()
5332 * and ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5333 *
5334 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5335 * @sta: the receiver station to which this packet is sent
5336 * (NULL for multicast packets)
5337 * @info: tx status information
5338 */
5339static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_noskb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5340 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
5341 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info)
5342{
5343 struct ieee80211_tx_status status = {
5344 .sta = sta,
5345 .info = info,
5346 };
5347
5348 ieee80211_tx_status_ext(hw, &status);
5349}
5350
5351/**
5352 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni - transmit status callback (in process context)
5353 *
5354 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in process context.
5355 *
5356 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and
5357 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe() may not be mixed
5358 * for a single hardware.
5359 *
5360 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5361 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5362 */
5363static inline void ieee80211_tx_status_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5364 struct sk_buff *skb)
5365{
5366 local_bh_disable();
5367 ieee80211_tx_status_skb(hw, skb);
5368 local_bh_enable();
5369}
5370
5371/**
5372 * ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe - IRQ-safe transmit status callback
5373 *
5374 * Like ieee80211_tx_status_skb() but can be called in IRQ context
5375 * (internally defers to a tasklet.)
5376 *
5377 * Calls to this function, ieee80211_tx_status_skb() and
5378 * ieee80211_tx_status_ni() may not be mixed for a single hardware.
5379 *
5380 * @hw: the hardware the frame was transmitted by
5381 * @skb: the frame that was transmitted, owned by mac80211 after this call
5382 */
5383void ieee80211_tx_status_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5384 struct sk_buff *skb);
5385
5386/**
5387 * ieee80211_report_low_ack - report non-responding station
5388 *
5389 * When operating in AP-mode, call this function to report a non-responding
5390 * connected STA.
5391 *
5392 * @sta: the non-responding connected sta
5393 * @num_packets: number of packets sent to @sta without a response
5394 */
5395void ieee80211_report_low_ack(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u32 num_packets);
5396
5397#define IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM 2
5398
5399/**
5400 * struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets - mutable beacon offsets
5401 * @tim_offset: position of TIM element
5402 * @tim_length: size of TIM element
5403 * @cntdwn_counter_offs: array of IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM offsets
5404 * to countdown counters. This array can contain zero values which
5405 * should be ignored.
5406 * @mbssid_off: position of the multiple bssid element
5407 */
5408struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets {
5409 u16 tim_offset;
5410 u16 tim_length;
5411
5412 u16 cntdwn_counter_offs[IEEE80211_MAX_CNTDWN_COUNTERS_NUM];
5413 u16 mbssid_off;
5414};
5415
5416/**
5417 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template - beacon template generation function
5418 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5419 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5420 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5421 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5422 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA
5423 * that is not associated with AP MLD).
5424 *
5425 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5426 * obtain the beacon template.
5427 *
5428 * This function should be used if the beacon frames are generated by the
5429 * device, and then the driver must use the returned beacon as the template
5430 * The driver or the device are responsible to update the DTIM and, when
5431 * applicable, the CSA count.
5432 *
5433 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5434 *
5435 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5436 */
5437struct sk_buff *
5438ieee80211_beacon_get_template(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5439 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5440 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs,
5441 unsigned int link_id);
5442
5443/**
5444 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index - EMA beacon template generation
5445 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5446 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5447 * @offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5448 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5449 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP).
5450 * @ema_index: index of the beacon in the EMA set.
5451 *
5452 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template()
5453 * but returns a beacon template which includes multiple BSSID element at the
5454 * requested index.
5455 *
5456 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL indicates the end of EMA templates.
5457 */
5458struct sk_buff *
5459ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_index(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5460 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5461 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets *offs,
5462 unsigned int link_id, u8 ema_index);
5463
5464/**
5465 * struct ieee80211_ema_beacons - List of EMA beacons
5466 * @cnt: count of EMA beacons.
5467 *
5468 * @bcn: array of EMA beacons.
5469 * @bcn.skb: the skb containing this specific beacon
5470 * @bcn.offs: &struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets pointer to struct that will
5471 * receive the offsets that may be updated by the driver.
5472 */
5473struct ieee80211_ema_beacons {
5474 u8 cnt;
5475 struct {
5476 struct sk_buff *skb;
5477 struct ieee80211_mutable_offsets offs;
5478 } bcn[];
5479};
5480
5481/**
5482 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list - EMA beacon template generation
5483 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5484 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5485 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for a non-MLD AP)
5486 *
5487 * This function follows the same rules as ieee80211_beacon_get_template()
5488 * but allocates and returns a pointer to list of all beacon templates required
5489 * to cover all profiles in the multiple BSSID set. Each template includes only
5490 * one multiple BSSID element.
5491 *
5492 * Driver must call ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list() to free the memory.
5493 *
5494 * Return: EMA beacon templates of type struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *.
5495 * %NULL on error.
5496 */
5497struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *
5498ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5499 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5500 unsigned int link_id);
5501
5502/**
5503 * ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list - free an EMA beacon template list
5504 * @ema_beacons: list of EMA beacons of type &struct ieee80211_ema_beacons pointers.
5505 *
5506 * This function will free a list previously acquired by calling
5507 * ieee80211_beacon_get_template_ema_list()
5508 */
5509void ieee80211_beacon_free_ema_list(struct ieee80211_ema_beacons *ema_beacons);
5510
5511/**
5512 * ieee80211_beacon_get_tim - beacon generation function
5513 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5514 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5515 * @tim_offset: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE offset.
5516 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5517 * @tim_length: pointer to variable that will receive the TIM IE length,
5518 * (including the ID and length bytes!).
5519 * Set to 0 if invalid (in non-AP modes).
5520 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA
5521 * that is not associated with AP MLD).
5522 *
5523 * If the driver implements beaconing modes, it must use this function to
5524 * obtain the beacon frame.
5525 *
5526 * If the beacon frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5527 * hardware/firmware), the driver uses this function to get each beacon
5528 * frame from mac80211 -- it is responsible for calling this function exactly
5529 * once before the beacon is needed (e.g. based on hardware interrupt).
5530 *
5531 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
5532 *
5533 * Return: The beacon template. %NULL on error.
5534 */
5535struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5536 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5537 u16 *tim_offset, u16 *tim_length,
5538 unsigned int link_id);
5539
5540/**
5541 * ieee80211_beacon_get - beacon generation function
5542 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5543 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5544 * @link_id: the link id to which the beacon belongs (or 0 for an AP STA
5545 * that is not associated with AP MLD).
5546 *
5547 * See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5548 *
5549 * Return: See ieee80211_beacon_get_tim().
5550 */
5551static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_beacon_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5552 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5553 unsigned int link_id)
5554{
5555 return ieee80211_beacon_get_tim(hw, vif, NULL, NULL, link_id);
5556}
5557
5558/**
5559 * ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn - request mac80211 to decrement the beacon countdown
5560 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5561 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO
5562 *
5563 * The beacon counter should be updated after each beacon transmission.
5564 * This function is called implicitly when
5565 * ieee80211_beacon_get/ieee80211_beacon_get_tim are called, however if the
5566 * beacon frames are generated by the device, the driver should call this
5567 * function after each beacon transmission to sync mac80211's beacon countdown.
5568 *
5569 * Return: new countdown value
5570 */
5571u8 ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5572 unsigned int link_id);
5573
5574/**
5575 * ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn - request mac80211 to set beacon countdown
5576 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5577 * @counter: the new value for the counter
5578 *
5579 * The beacon countdown can be changed by the device, this API should be
5580 * used by the device driver to update csa counter in mac80211.
5581 *
5582 * It should never be used together with ieee80211_beacon_update_cntdwn(),
5583 * as it will cause a race condition around the counter value.
5584 */
5585void ieee80211_beacon_set_cntdwn(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 counter);
5586
5587/**
5588 * ieee80211_csa_finish - notify mac80211 about channel switch
5589 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5590 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO
5591 *
5592 * After a channel switch announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5593 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5594 * notify mac80211 that the channel can be changed.
5595 */
5596void ieee80211_csa_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id);
5597
5598/**
5599 * ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete - find out if countdown reached 1
5600 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5601 * @link_id: valid link_id during MLO or 0 for non-MLO
5602 *
5603 * This function returns whether the countdown reached zero.
5604 */
5605bool ieee80211_beacon_cntdwn_is_complete(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5606 unsigned int link_id);
5607
5608/**
5609 * ieee80211_color_change_finish - notify mac80211 about color change
5610 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5611 *
5612 * After a color change announcement was scheduled and the counter in this
5613 * announcement hits 1, this function must be called by the driver to
5614 * notify mac80211 that the color can be changed
5615 */
5616void ieee80211_color_change_finish(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5617
5618/**
5619 * ieee80211_proberesp_get - retrieve a Probe Response template
5620 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5621 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5622 *
5623 * Creates a Probe Response template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5624 * hardware. The destination address should be set by the caller.
5625 *
5626 * Can only be called in AP mode.
5627 *
5628 * Return: The Probe Response template. %NULL on error.
5629 */
5630struct sk_buff *ieee80211_proberesp_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5631 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5632
5633/**
5634 * ieee80211_pspoll_get - retrieve a PS Poll template
5635 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5636 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5637 *
5638 * Creates a PS Poll a template which can, for example, uploaded to
5639 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5640 * AID, BSSID and MAC address is used.
5641 *
5642 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5643 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit.
5644 *
5645 * Return: The PS Poll template. %NULL on error.
5646 */
5647struct sk_buff *ieee80211_pspoll_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5648 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5649
5650/**
5651 * ieee80211_nullfunc_get - retrieve a nullfunc template
5652 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5653 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5654 * @link_id: If the vif is an MLD, get a frame with the link addresses
5655 * for the given link ID. For a link_id < 0 you get a frame with
5656 * MLD addresses, however useful that might be.
5657 * @qos_ok: QoS NDP is acceptable to the caller, this should be set
5658 * if at all possible
5659 *
5660 * Creates a Nullfunc template which can, for example, uploaded to
5661 * hardware. The template must be updated after association so that correct
5662 * BSSID and address is used.
5663 *
5664 * If @qos_ndp is set and the association is to an AP with QoS/WMM, the
5665 * returned packet will be QoS NDP.
5666 *
5667 * Note: Caller (or hardware) is responsible for setting the
5668 * &IEEE80211_FCTL_PM bit as well as Duration and Sequence Control fields.
5669 *
5670 * Return: The nullfunc template. %NULL on error.
5671 */
5672struct sk_buff *ieee80211_nullfunc_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5673 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5674 int link_id, bool qos_ok);
5675
5676/**
5677 * ieee80211_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
5678 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5679 * @src_addr: source MAC address
5680 * @ssid: SSID buffer
5681 * @ssid_len: length of SSID
5682 * @tailroom: tailroom to reserve at end of SKB for IEs
5683 *
5684 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
5685 * hardware.
5686 *
5687 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
5688 */
5689struct sk_buff *ieee80211_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5690 const u8 *src_addr,
5691 const u8 *ssid, size_t ssid_len,
5692 size_t tailroom);
5693
5694/**
5695 * ieee80211_rts_get - RTS frame generation function
5696 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5697 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5698 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5699 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5700 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5701 * @rts: The buffer where to store the RTS frame.
5702 *
5703 * If the RTS frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5704 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5705 * the next RTS frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5706 * for calling this function before and RTS frame is needed.
5707 */
5708void ieee80211_rts_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5709 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5710 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5711 struct ieee80211_rts *rts);
5712
5713/**
5714 * ieee80211_rts_duration - Get the duration field for an RTS frame
5715 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5716 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5717 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the RTS.
5718 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5719 *
5720 * If the RTS is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5721 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5722 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5723 *
5724 * Return: The duration.
5725 */
5726__le16 ieee80211_rts_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5727 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, size_t frame_len,
5728 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5729
5730/**
5731 * ieee80211_ctstoself_get - CTS-to-self frame generation function
5732 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5733 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5734 * @frame: pointer to the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5735 * @frame_len: the frame length (in octets).
5736 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5737 * @cts: The buffer where to store the CTS-to-self frame.
5738 *
5739 * If the CTS-to-self frames are generated by the host system (i.e., not in
5740 * hardware/firmware), the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5741 * the next CTS-to-self frame from the 802.11 code. The low-level is responsible
5742 * for calling this function before and CTS-to-self frame is needed.
5743 */
5744void ieee80211_ctstoself_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5745 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5746 const void *frame, size_t frame_len,
5747 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl,
5748 struct ieee80211_cts *cts);
5749
5750/**
5751 * ieee80211_ctstoself_duration - Get the duration field for a CTS-to-self frame
5752 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5753 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5754 * @frame_len: the length of the frame that is going to be protected by the CTS-to-self.
5755 * @frame_txctl: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
5756 *
5757 * If the CTS-to-self is generated in firmware, but the host system must provide
5758 * the duration field, the low-level driver uses this function to receive
5759 * the duration field value in little-endian byteorder.
5760 *
5761 * Return: The duration.
5762 */
5763__le16 ieee80211_ctstoself_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5764 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5765 size_t frame_len,
5766 const struct ieee80211_tx_info *frame_txctl);
5767
5768/**
5769 * ieee80211_generic_frame_duration - Calculate the duration field for a frame
5770 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5771 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5772 * @band: the band to calculate the frame duration on
5773 * @frame_len: the length of the frame.
5774 * @rate: the rate at which the frame is going to be transmitted.
5775 *
5776 * Calculate the duration field of some generic frame, given its
5777 * length and transmission rate (in 100kbps).
5778 *
5779 * Return: The duration.
5780 */
5781__le16 ieee80211_generic_frame_duration(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
5782 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5783 enum nl80211_band band,
5784 size_t frame_len,
5785 struct ieee80211_rate *rate);
5786
5787/**
5788 * ieee80211_get_buffered_bc - accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames
5789 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
5790 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
5791 *
5792 * Function for accessing buffered broadcast and multicast frames. If
5793 * hardware/firmware does not implement buffering of broadcast/multicast
5794 * frames when power saving is used, 802.11 code buffers them in the host
5795 * memory. The low-level driver uses this function to fetch next buffered
5796 * frame. In most cases, this is used when generating beacon frame.
5797 *
5798 * Return: A pointer to the next buffered skb or NULL if no more buffered
5799 * frames are available.
5800 *
5801 * Note: buffered frames are returned only after DTIM beacon frame was
5802 * generated with ieee80211_beacon_get() and the low-level driver must thus
5803 * call ieee80211_beacon_get() first. ieee80211_get_buffered_bc() returns
5804 * NULL if the previous generated beacon was not DTIM, so the low-level driver
5805 * does not need to check for DTIM beacons separately and should be able to
5806 * use common code for all beacons.
5807 */
5808struct sk_buff *
5809ieee80211_get_buffered_bc(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
5810
5811/**
5812 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv - get a TKIP phase 1 key for IV32
5813 *
5814 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32.
5815 *
5816 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5817 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5818 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5819 */
5820void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5821 u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5822
5823/**
5824 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key
5825 *
5826 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the IV32 taken
5827 * from the given packet.
5828 *
5829 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5830 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32 value from that will be encrypted
5831 * with this P1K
5832 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5833 */
5834static inline void ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5835 struct sk_buff *skb, u16 *p1k)
5836{
5837 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (struct ieee80211_hdr *)skb->data;
5838 const u8 *data = (u8 *)hdr + ieee80211_hdrlen(hdr->frame_control);
5839 u32 iv32 = get_unaligned_le32(&data[4]);
5840
5841 ieee80211_get_tkip_p1k_iv(keyconf, iv32, p1k);
5842}
5843
5844/**
5845 * ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k - get a TKIP phase 1 key for RX
5846 *
5847 * This function returns the TKIP phase 1 key for the given IV32
5848 * and transmitter address.
5849 *
5850 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5851 * @ta: TA that will be used with the key
5852 * @iv32: IV32 to get the P1K for
5853 * @p1k: a buffer to which the key will be written, as 5 u16 values
5854 */
5855void ieee80211_get_tkip_rx_p1k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5856 const u8 *ta, u32 iv32, u16 *p1k);
5857
5858/**
5859 * ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k - get a TKIP phase 2 key
5860 *
5861 * This function computes the TKIP RC4 key for the IV values
5862 * in the packet.
5863 *
5864 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5865 * @skb: the packet to take the IV32/IV16 values from that will be
5866 * encrypted with this key
5867 * @p2k: a buffer to which the key will be written, 16 bytes
5868 */
5869void ieee80211_get_tkip_p2k(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5870 struct sk_buff *skb, u8 *p2k);
5871
5872/**
5873 * ieee80211_tkip_add_iv - write TKIP IV and Ext. IV to pos
5874 *
5875 * @pos: start of crypto header
5876 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5877 * @pn: PN to add
5878 *
5879 * Returns: pointer to the octet following IVs (i.e. beginning of
5880 * the packet payload)
5881 *
5882 * This function writes the tkip IV value to pos (which should
5883 * point to the crypto header)
5884 */
5885u8 *ieee80211_tkip_add_iv(u8 *pos, struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf, u64 pn);
5886
5887/**
5888 * ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq - get key RX sequence counter
5889 *
5890 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5891 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5892 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5893 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5894 * @seq: buffer to receive the sequence data
5895 *
5896 * This function allows a driver to retrieve the current RX IV/PNs
5897 * for the given key. It must not be called if IV checking is done
5898 * by the device and not by mac80211.
5899 *
5900 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5901 * can be done concurrently.
5902 */
5903void ieee80211_get_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5904 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5905
5906/**
5907 * ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq - set key RX sequence counter
5908 *
5909 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5910 * @tid: The TID, or -1 for the management frame value (CCMP/GCMP only);
5911 * the value on TID 0 is also used for non-QoS frames. For
5912 * CMAC, only TID 0 is valid.
5913 * @seq: new sequence data
5914 *
5915 * This function allows a driver to set the current RX IV/PNs for the
5916 * given key. This is useful when resuming from WoWLAN sleep and GTK
5917 * rekey may have been done while suspended. It should not be called
5918 * if IV checking is done by the device and not by mac80211.
5919 *
5920 * Note that this function may only be called when no RX processing
5921 * can be done concurrently.
5922 */
5923void ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5924 int tid, struct ieee80211_key_seq *seq);
5925
5926/**
5927 * ieee80211_remove_key - remove the given key
5928 * @keyconf: the parameter passed with the set key
5929 *
5930 * Context: Must be called with the wiphy mutex held.
5931 *
5932 * Remove the given key. If the key was uploaded to the hardware at the
5933 * time this function is called, it is not deleted in the hardware but
5934 * instead assumed to have been removed already.
5935 */
5936void ieee80211_remove_key(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5937
5938/**
5939 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add - add a GTK key from rekeying during WoWLAN
5940 * @vif: the virtual interface to add the key on
5941 * @keyconf: new key data
5942 * @link_id: the link id of the key or -1 for non-MLO
5943 *
5944 * When GTK rekeying was done while the system was suspended, (a) new
5945 * key(s) will be available. These will be needed by mac80211 for proper
5946 * RX processing, so this function allows setting them.
5947 *
5948 * The function returns the newly allocated key structure, which will
5949 * have similar contents to the passed key configuration but point to
5950 * mac80211-owned memory. In case of errors, the function returns an
5951 * ERR_PTR(), use IS_ERR() etc.
5952 *
5953 * Note that this function assumes the key isn't added to hardware
5954 * acceleration, so no TX will be done with the key. Since it's a GTK
5955 * on managed (station) networks, this is true anyway. If the driver
5956 * calls this function from the resume callback and subsequently uses
5957 * the return code 1 to reconfigure the device, this key will be part
5958 * of the reconfiguration.
5959 *
5960 * Note that the driver should also call ieee80211_set_key_rx_seq()
5961 * for the new key for each TID to set up sequence counters properly.
5962 *
5963 * IMPORTANT: If this replaces a key that is present in the hardware,
5964 * then it will attempt to remove it during this call. In many cases
5965 * this isn't what you want, so call ieee80211_remove_key() first for
5966 * the key that's being replaced.
5967 */
5968struct ieee80211_key_conf *
5969ieee80211_gtk_rekey_add(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
5970 struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf,
5971 int link_id);
5972
5973/**
5974 * ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify - notify userspace supplicant of rekeying
5975 * @vif: virtual interface the rekeying was done on
5976 * @bssid: The BSSID of the AP, for checking association
5977 * @replay_ctr: the new replay counter after GTK rekeying
5978 * @gfp: allocation flags
5979 */
5980void ieee80211_gtk_rekey_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *bssid,
5981 const u8 *replay_ctr, gfp_t gfp);
5982
5983/**
5984 * ieee80211_key_mic_failure - increment MIC failure counter for the key
5985 *
5986 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5987 * at the same time.
5988 *
5989 * @keyconf: the key in question
5990 */
5991void ieee80211_key_mic_failure(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
5992
5993/**
5994 * ieee80211_key_replay - increment replay counter for the key
5995 *
5996 * Note: this is really only safe if no other RX function is called
5997 * at the same time.
5998 *
5999 * @keyconf: the key in question
6000 */
6001void ieee80211_key_replay(struct ieee80211_key_conf *keyconf);
6002
6003/**
6004 * ieee80211_wake_queue - wake specific queue
6005 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6006 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
6007 *
6008 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_wake_queue.
6009 */
6010void ieee80211_wake_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
6011
6012/**
6013 * ieee80211_stop_queue - stop specific queue
6014 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6015 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
6016 *
6017 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_stop_queue.
6018 */
6019void ieee80211_stop_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
6020
6021/**
6022 * ieee80211_queue_stopped - test status of the queue
6023 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6024 * @queue: queue number (counted from zero).
6025 *
6026 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_queue_stopped.
6027 *
6028 * Return: %true if the queue is stopped. %false otherwise.
6029 */
6030
6031int ieee80211_queue_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, int queue);
6032
6033/**
6034 * ieee80211_stop_queues - stop all queues
6035 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6036 *
6037 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_stop_all_queues.
6038 */
6039void ieee80211_stop_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6040
6041/**
6042 * ieee80211_wake_queues - wake all queues
6043 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6044 *
6045 * Drivers must use this function instead of netif_tx_wake_all_queues.
6046 */
6047void ieee80211_wake_queues(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6048
6049/**
6050 * ieee80211_scan_completed - completed hardware scan
6051 *
6052 * When hardware scan offload is used (i.e. the hw_scan() callback is
6053 * assigned) this function needs to be called by the driver to notify
6054 * mac80211 that the scan finished. This function can be called from
6055 * any context, including hardirq context.
6056 *
6057 * @hw: the hardware that finished the scan
6058 * @info: information about the completed scan
6059 */
6060void ieee80211_scan_completed(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6061 struct cfg80211_scan_info *info);
6062
6063/**
6064 * ieee80211_sched_scan_results - got results from scheduled scan
6065 *
6066 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function needs to be called by the
6067 * driver whenever there are new scan results available.
6068 *
6069 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
6070 */
6071void ieee80211_sched_scan_results(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6072
6073/**
6074 * ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped - inform that the scheduled scan has stopped
6075 *
6076 * When a scheduled scan is running, this function can be called by
6077 * the driver if it needs to stop the scan to perform another task.
6078 * Usual scenarios are drivers that cannot continue the scheduled scan
6079 * while associating, for instance.
6080 *
6081 * @hw: the hardware that is performing scheduled scans
6082 */
6083void ieee80211_sched_scan_stopped(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6084
6085/**
6086 * enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags - interface iteration flags
6087 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL: Iterate over all interfaces that have
6088 * been added to the driver; However, note that during hardware
6089 * reconfiguration (after restart_hw) it will iterate over a new
6090 * interface and over all the existing interfaces even if they
6091 * haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
6092 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL: During resume, iterate over all
6093 * interfaces, even if they haven't been re-added to the driver yet.
6094 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE: Iterate only active interfaces (netdev is up).
6095 * @IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER: Skip any interfaces where SDATA
6096 * is not in the driver. This may fix crashes during firmware recovery
6097 * for instance.
6098 */
6099enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags {
6100 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_NORMAL = 0,
6101 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_RESUME_ALL = BIT(0),
6102 IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE = BIT(1),
6103 IEEE80211_IFACE_SKIP_SDATA_NOT_IN_DRIVER = BIT(2),
6104};
6105
6106/**
6107 * ieee80211_iterate_interfaces - iterate interfaces
6108 *
6109 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
6110 * hardware and calls the callback for them. This includes active as well as
6111 * inactive interfaces. This function allows the iterator function to sleep.
6112 * Will iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
6113 *
6114 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
6115 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
6116 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
6117 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6118 */
6119void ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
6120 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
6121 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
6122 void *data);
6123
6124/**
6125 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces - iterate active interfaces
6126 *
6127 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
6128 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
6129 * This function allows the iterator function to sleep, when the iterator
6130 * function is atomic @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic can
6131 * be used.
6132 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
6133 *
6134 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
6135 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
6136 * @iterator: the iterator function to call
6137 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6138 */
6139static inline void
6140ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u32 iter_flags,
6141 void (*iterator)(void *data, u8 *mac,
6142 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
6143 void *data)
6144{
6145 ieee80211_iterate_interfaces(hw,
6146 iter_flags | IEEE80211_IFACE_ITER_ACTIVE,
6147 iterator, data);
6148}
6149
6150/**
6151 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic - iterate active interfaces
6152 *
6153 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
6154 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
6155 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
6156 * if that is not desired, use @ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces instead.
6157 * Does not iterate over a new interface during add_interface().
6158 *
6159 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
6160 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
6161 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
6162 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6163 */
6164void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6165 u32 iter_flags,
6166 void (*iterator)(void *data,
6167 u8 *mac,
6168 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
6169 void *data);
6170
6171/**
6172 * ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx - iterate active interfaces
6173 *
6174 * This function iterates over the interfaces associated with a given
6175 * hardware that are currently active and calls the callback for them.
6176 * This version can only be used while holding the wiphy mutex.
6177 *
6178 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
6179 * @iter_flags: iteration flags, see &enum ieee80211_interface_iteration_flags
6180 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
6181 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6182 */
6183void ieee80211_iterate_active_interfaces_mtx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6184 u32 iter_flags,
6185 void (*iterator)(void *data,
6186 u8 *mac,
6187 struct ieee80211_vif *vif),
6188 void *data);
6189
6190/**
6191 * ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic - iterate stations
6192 *
6193 * This function iterates over all stations associated with a given
6194 * hardware that are currently uploaded to the driver and calls the callback
6195 * function for them.
6196 * This function requires the iterator callback function to be atomic,
6197 *
6198 * @hw: the hardware struct of which the interfaces should be iterated over
6199 * @iterator: the iterator function to call, cannot sleep
6200 * @data: first argument of the iterator function
6201 */
6202void ieee80211_iterate_stations_atomic(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6203 void (*iterator)(void *data,
6204 struct ieee80211_sta *sta),
6205 void *data);
6206/**
6207 * ieee80211_queue_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
6208 *
6209 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to add work onto the mac80211 workqueue.
6210 * This helper ensures drivers are not queueing work when they should not be.
6211 *
6212 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
6213 * @work: the work we want to add onto the mac80211 workqueue
6214 */
6215void ieee80211_queue_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct work_struct *work);
6216
6217/**
6218 * ieee80211_queue_delayed_work - add work onto the mac80211 workqueue
6219 *
6220 * Drivers and mac80211 use this to queue delayed work onto the mac80211
6221 * workqueue.
6222 *
6223 * @hw: the hardware struct for the interface we are adding work for
6224 * @dwork: delayable work to queue onto the mac80211 workqueue
6225 * @delay: number of jiffies to wait before queueing
6226 */
6227void ieee80211_queue_delayed_work(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6228 struct delayed_work *dwork,
6229 unsigned long delay);
6230
6231/**
6232 * ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer - Refresh a tx agg session timer.
6233 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
6234 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
6235 *
6236 * This function allows low level driver to refresh tx agg session timer
6237 * to maintain BA session, the session level will still be managed by the
6238 * mac80211.
6239 *
6240 * Note: must be called in an RCU critical section.
6241 */
6242void ieee80211_refresh_tx_agg_session_timer(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6243 u16 tid);
6244
6245/**
6246 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session - Start a tx Block Ack session.
6247 * @sta: the station for which to start a BA session
6248 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
6249 * @timeout: session timeout value (in TUs)
6250 *
6251 * Return: success if addBA request was sent, failure otherwise
6252 *
6253 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
6254 * the need to start aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
6255 * will be managed by the mac80211.
6256 */
6257int ieee80211_start_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid,
6258 u16 timeout);
6259
6260/**
6261 * ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to aggregate.
6262 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6263 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
6264 * @tid: the TID to BA on.
6265 *
6266 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
6267 * finished with preparations for the BA session. It can be called
6268 * from any context.
6269 */
6270void ieee80211_start_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
6271 u16 tid);
6272
6273/**
6274 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session - Stop a Block Ack session.
6275 * @sta: the station whose BA session to stop
6276 * @tid: the TID to stop BA.
6277 *
6278 * Return: negative error if the TID is invalid, or no aggregation active
6279 *
6280 * Although mac80211/low level driver/user space application can estimate
6281 * the need to stop aggregation on a certain RA/TID, the session level
6282 * will be managed by the mac80211.
6283 */
6284int ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u16 tid);
6285
6286/**
6287 * ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe - low level driver ready to stop aggregate.
6288 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6289 * @ra: receiver address of the BA session recipient.
6290 * @tid: the desired TID to BA on.
6291 *
6292 * This function must be called by low level driver once it has
6293 * finished with preparations for the BA session tear down. It
6294 * can be called from any context.
6295 */
6296void ieee80211_stop_tx_ba_cb_irqsafe(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *ra,
6297 u16 tid);
6298
6299/**
6300 * ieee80211_find_sta - find a station
6301 *
6302 * @vif: virtual interface to look for station on
6303 * @addr: station's address
6304 *
6305 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6306 *
6307 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6308 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6309 */
6310struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6311 const u8 *addr);
6312
6313/**
6314 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr - find a station on hardware
6315 *
6316 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6317 * @addr: remote station's address
6318 * @localaddr: local address (vif->sdata->vif.addr). Use NULL for 'any'.
6319 *
6320 * Return: The station, if found. %NULL otherwise.
6321 *
6322 * Note: This function must be called under RCU lock and the
6323 * resulting pointer is only valid under RCU lock as well.
6324 *
6325 * NOTE: You may pass NULL for localaddr, but then you will just get
6326 * the first STA that matches the remote address 'addr'.
6327 * We can have multiple STA associated with multiple
6328 * logical stations (e.g. consider a station connecting to another
6329 * BSSID on the same AP hardware without disconnecting first).
6330 * In this case, the result of this method with localaddr NULL
6331 * is not reliable.
6332 *
6333 * DO NOT USE THIS FUNCTION with localaddr NULL if at all possible.
6334 */
6335struct ieee80211_sta *ieee80211_find_sta_by_ifaddr(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6336 const u8 *addr,
6337 const u8 *localaddr);
6338
6339/**
6340 * ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs - find STA by link addresses
6341 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6342 * @addr: remote station's link address
6343 * @localaddr: local link address, use %NULL for any (but avoid that)
6344 * @link_id: pointer to obtain the link ID if the STA is found,
6345 * may be %NULL if the link ID is not needed
6346 *
6347 * Obtain the STA by link address, must use RCU protection.
6348 */
6349struct ieee80211_sta *
6350ieee80211_find_sta_by_link_addrs(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6351 const u8 *addr,
6352 const u8 *localaddr,
6353 unsigned int *link_id);
6354
6355/**
6356 * ieee80211_sta_block_awake - block station from waking up
6357 * @hw: the hardware
6358 * @pubsta: the station
6359 * @block: whether to block or unblock
6360 *
6361 * Some devices require that all frames that are on the queues
6362 * for a specific station that went to sleep are flushed before
6363 * a poll response or frames after the station woke up can be
6364 * delivered to that it. Note that such frames must be rejected
6365 * by the driver as filtered, with the appropriate status flag.
6366 *
6367 * This function allows implementing this mode in a race-free
6368 * manner.
6369 *
6370 * To do this, a driver must keep track of the number of frames
6371 * still enqueued for a specific station. If this number is not
6372 * zero when the station goes to sleep, the driver must call
6373 * this function to force mac80211 to consider the station to
6374 * be asleep regardless of the station's actual state. Once the
6375 * number of outstanding frames reaches zero, the driver must
6376 * call this function again to unblock the station. That will
6377 * cause mac80211 to be able to send ps-poll responses, and if
6378 * the station queried in the meantime then frames will also
6379 * be sent out as a result of this. Additionally, the driver
6380 * will be notified that the station woke up some time after
6381 * it is unblocked, regardless of whether the station actually
6382 * woke up while blocked or not.
6383 */
6384void ieee80211_sta_block_awake(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6385 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, bool block);
6386
6387/**
6388 * ieee80211_sta_eosp - notify mac80211 about end of SP
6389 * @pubsta: the station
6390 *
6391 * When a device transmits frames in a way that it can't tell
6392 * mac80211 in the TX status about the EOSP, it must clear the
6393 * %IEEE80211_TX_STATUS_EOSP bit and call this function instead.
6394 * This applies for PS-Poll as well as uAPSD.
6395 *
6396 * Note that just like with _tx_status() and _rx() drivers must
6397 * not mix calls to irqsafe/non-irqsafe versions, this function
6398 * must not be mixed with those either. Use the all irqsafe, or
6399 * all non-irqsafe, don't mix!
6400 *
6401 * NB: the _irqsafe version of this function doesn't exist, no
6402 * driver needs it right now. Don't call this function if
6403 * you'd need the _irqsafe version, look at the git history
6404 * and restore the _irqsafe version!
6405 */
6406void ieee80211_sta_eosp(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6407
6408/**
6409 * ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc - ask mac80211 to send NDP with EOSP
6410 * @pubsta: the station
6411 * @tid: the tid of the NDP
6412 *
6413 * Sometimes the device understands that it needs to close
6414 * the Service Period unexpectedly. This can happen when
6415 * sending frames that are filling holes in the BA window.
6416 * In this case, the device can ask mac80211 to send a
6417 * Nullfunc frame with EOSP set. When that happens, the
6418 * driver must have called ieee80211_sta_set_buffered() to
6419 * let mac80211 know that there are no buffered frames any
6420 * more, otherwise mac80211 will get the more_data bit wrong.
6421 * The low level driver must have made sure that the frame
6422 * will be sent despite the station being in power-save.
6423 * Mac80211 won't call allow_buffered_frames().
6424 * Note that calling this function, doesn't exempt the driver
6425 * from closing the EOSP properly, it will still have to call
6426 * ieee80211_sta_eosp when the NDP is sent.
6427 */
6428void ieee80211_send_eosp_nullfunc(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, int tid);
6429
6430/**
6431 * ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates - recalculate aggregate data after a change
6432 * @pubsta: the station
6433 *
6434 * Call this function after changing a per-link aggregate data as referenced in
6435 * &struct ieee80211_sta_aggregates by accessing the agg field of
6436 * &struct ieee80211_link_sta.
6437 *
6438 * With non MLO the data in deflink will be referenced directly. In that case
6439 * there is no need to call this function.
6440 */
6441void ieee80211_sta_recalc_aggregates(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta);
6442
6443/**
6444 * ieee80211_sta_register_airtime - register airtime usage for a sta/tid
6445 *
6446 * Register airtime usage for a given sta on a given tid. The driver must call
6447 * this function to notify mac80211 that a station used a certain amount of
6448 * airtime. This information will be used by the TXQ scheduler to schedule
6449 * stations in a way that ensures airtime fairness.
6450 *
6451 * The reported airtime should as a minimum include all time that is spent
6452 * transmitting to the remote station, including overhead and padding, but not
6453 * including time spent waiting for a TXOP. If the time is not reported by the
6454 * hardware it can in some cases be calculated from the rate and known frame
6455 * composition. When possible, the time should include any failed transmission
6456 * attempts.
6457 *
6458 * The driver can either call this function synchronously for every packet or
6459 * aggregate, or asynchronously as airtime usage information becomes available.
6460 * TX and RX airtime can be reported together, or separately by setting one of
6461 * them to 0.
6462 *
6463 * @pubsta: the station
6464 * @tid: the TID to register airtime for
6465 * @tx_airtime: airtime used during TX (in usec)
6466 * @rx_airtime: airtime used during RX (in usec)
6467 */
6468void ieee80211_sta_register_airtime(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6469 u32 tx_airtime, u32 rx_airtime);
6470
6471/**
6472 * ieee80211_txq_airtime_check - check if a txq can send frame to device
6473 *
6474 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6475 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
6476 *
6477 * Return true if the AQL's airtime limit has not been reached and the txq can
6478 * continue to send more packets to the device. Otherwise return false.
6479 */
6480bool
6481ieee80211_txq_airtime_check(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
6482
6483/**
6484 * ieee80211_iter_keys - iterate keys programmed into the device
6485 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6486 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6487 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6488 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6489 *
6490 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; can sleep.
6491 *
6492 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6493 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6494 * the device. This is intended for use in WoWLAN if the device
6495 * needs reprogramming of the keys during suspend.
6496 *
6497 * The order in which the keys are iterated matches the order
6498 * in which they were originally installed and handed to the
6499 * set_key callback.
6500 */
6501void ieee80211_iter_keys(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6502 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6503 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6504 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6505 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6506 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6507 void *data),
6508 void *iter_data);
6509
6510/**
6511 * ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu - iterate keys programmed into the device
6512 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6513 * @vif: virtual interface to iterate, may be %NULL for all
6514 * @iter: iterator function that will be called for each key
6515 * @iter_data: custom data to pass to the iterator function
6516 *
6517 * This function can be used to iterate all the keys known to
6518 * mac80211, even those that weren't previously programmed into
6519 * the device. Note that due to locking reasons, keys of station
6520 * in removal process will be skipped.
6521 *
6522 * This function requires being called in an RCU critical section,
6523 * and thus iter must be atomic.
6524 */
6525void ieee80211_iter_keys_rcu(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6526 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6527 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6528 struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6529 struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6530 struct ieee80211_key_conf *key,
6531 void *data),
6532 void *iter_data);
6533
6534/**
6535 * ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic - iterate channel contexts
6536 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6537 * @iter: iterator function
6538 * @iter_data: data passed to iterator function
6539 *
6540 * Iterate all active channel contexts. This function is atomic and
6541 * doesn't acquire any locks internally that might be held in other
6542 * places while calling into the driver.
6543 *
6544 * The iterator will not find a context that's being added (during
6545 * the driver callback to add it) but will find it while it's being
6546 * removed.
6547 *
6548 * Note that during hardware restart, all contexts that existed
6549 * before the restart are considered already present so will be
6550 * found while iterating, whether they've been re-added already
6551 * or not.
6552 */
6553void ieee80211_iter_chan_contexts_atomic(
6554 struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6555 void (*iter)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6556 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *chanctx_conf,
6557 void *data),
6558 void *iter_data);
6559
6560/**
6561 * ieee80211_ap_probereq_get - retrieve a Probe Request template
6562 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
6563 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6564 *
6565 * Creates a Probe Request template which can, for example, be uploaded to
6566 * hardware. The template is filled with bssid, ssid and supported rate
6567 * information. This function must only be called from within the
6568 * .bss_info_changed callback function and only in managed mode. The function
6569 * is only useful when the interface is associated, otherwise it will return
6570 * %NULL.
6571 *
6572 * Return: The Probe Request template. %NULL on error.
6573 */
6574struct sk_buff *ieee80211_ap_probereq_get(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6575 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6576
6577/**
6578 * ieee80211_beacon_loss - inform hardware does not receive beacons
6579 *
6580 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6581 *
6582 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER and
6583 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS is set, the driver needs to inform whenever the
6584 * hardware is not receiving beacons with this function.
6585 */
6586void ieee80211_beacon_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6587
6588/**
6589 * ieee80211_connection_loss - inform hardware has lost connection to the AP
6590 *
6591 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6592 *
6593 * When beacon filtering is enabled with %IEEE80211_VIF_BEACON_FILTER, and
6594 * %IEEE80211_CONF_PS and %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR are set, the driver
6595 * needs to inform if the connection to the AP has been lost.
6596 * The function may also be called if the connection needs to be terminated
6597 * for some other reason, even if %IEEE80211_HW_CONNECTION_MONITOR isn't set.
6598 *
6599 * This function will cause immediate change to disassociated state,
6600 * without connection recovery attempts.
6601 */
6602void ieee80211_connection_loss(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6603
6604/**
6605 * ieee80211_disconnect - request disconnection
6606 *
6607 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6608 * @reconnect: immediate reconnect is desired
6609 *
6610 * Request disconnection from the current network and, if enabled, send a
6611 * hint to the higher layers that immediate reconnect is desired.
6612 */
6613void ieee80211_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool reconnect);
6614
6615/**
6616 * ieee80211_resume_disconnect - disconnect from AP after resume
6617 *
6618 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6619 *
6620 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after resume.
6621 * Drivers can use this after WoWLAN if they know that the
6622 * connection cannot be kept up, for example because keys were
6623 * used while the device was asleep but the replay counters or
6624 * similar cannot be retrieved from the device during resume.
6625 *
6626 * Note that due to implementation issues, if the driver uses
6627 * the reconfiguration functionality during resume the interface
6628 * will still be added as associated first during resume and then
6629 * disconnect normally later.
6630 *
6631 * This function can only be called from the resume callback and
6632 * the driver must not be holding any of its own locks while it
6633 * calls this function, or at least not any locks it needs in the
6634 * key configuration paths (if it supports HW crypto).
6635 */
6636void ieee80211_resume_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6637
6638/**
6639 * ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect - disconnect from AP after
6640 * hardware restart
6641 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6642 *
6643 * Instructs mac80211 to disconnect from the AP after
6644 * hardware restart.
6645 */
6646void ieee80211_hw_restart_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
6647
6648/**
6649 * ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify - inform a configured connection quality monitoring
6650 * rssi threshold triggered
6651 *
6652 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6653 * @rssi_event: the RSSI trigger event type
6654 * @rssi_level: new RSSI level value or 0 if not available
6655 * @gfp: context flags
6656 *
6657 * When the %IEEE80211_VIF_SUPPORTS_CQM_RSSI is set, and a connection quality
6658 * monitoring is configured with an rssi threshold, the driver will inform
6659 * whenever the rssi level reaches the threshold.
6660 */
6661void ieee80211_cqm_rssi_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6662 enum nl80211_cqm_rssi_threshold_event rssi_event,
6663 s32 rssi_level,
6664 gfp_t gfp);
6665
6666/**
6667 * ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify - inform CQM of beacon loss
6668 *
6669 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6670 * @gfp: context flags
6671 */
6672void ieee80211_cqm_beacon_loss_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, gfp_t gfp);
6673
6674/**
6675 * ieee80211_radar_detected - inform that a radar was detected
6676 *
6677 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6678 */
6679void ieee80211_radar_detected(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6680
6681/**
6682 * ieee80211_chswitch_done - Complete channel switch process
6683 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6684 * @success: make the channel switch successful or not
6685 * @link_id: the link_id on which the switch was done. Ignored if success is
6686 * false.
6687 *
6688 * Complete the channel switch post-process: set the new operational channel
6689 * and wake up the suspended queues.
6690 */
6691void ieee80211_chswitch_done(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool success,
6692 unsigned int link_id);
6693
6694/**
6695 * ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect - disconnect due to channel switch error
6696 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6697 * @block_tx: if %true, do not send deauth frame.
6698 *
6699 * Instruct mac80211 to disconnect due to a channel switch error. The channel
6700 * switch can request to block the tx and so, we need to make sure we do not send
6701 * a deauth frame in this case.
6702 */
6703void ieee80211_channel_switch_disconnect(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6704 bool block_tx);
6705
6706/**
6707 * ieee80211_request_smps - request SM PS transition
6708 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6709 * @link_id: link ID for MLO, or 0
6710 * @smps_mode: new SM PS mode
6711 *
6712 * This allows the driver to request an SM PS transition in managed
6713 * mode. This is useful when the driver has more information than
6714 * the stack about possible interference, for example by bluetooth.
6715 */
6716void ieee80211_request_smps(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
6717 enum ieee80211_smps_mode smps_mode);
6718
6719/**
6720 * ieee80211_ready_on_channel - notification of remain-on-channel start
6721 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6722 */
6723void ieee80211_ready_on_channel(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6724
6725/**
6726 * ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired - remain_on_channel duration expired
6727 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6728 */
6729void ieee80211_remain_on_channel_expired(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6730
6731/**
6732 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session - callback to stop existing BA sessions
6733 *
6734 * in order not to harm the system performance and user experience, the device
6735 * may request not to allow any rx ba session and tear down existing rx ba
6736 * sessions based on system constraints such as periodic BT activity that needs
6737 * to limit wlan activity (eg.sco or a2dp)."
6738 * in such cases, the intention is to limit the duration of the rx ppdu and
6739 * therefore prevent the peer device to use a-mpdu aggregation.
6740 *
6741 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6742 * @ba_rx_bitmap: Bit map of open rx ba per tid
6743 * @addr: & to bssid mac address
6744 */
6745void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 ba_rx_bitmap,
6746 const u8 *addr);
6747
6748/**
6749 * ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames - move RX BA window and mark filtered
6750 * @pubsta: station struct
6751 * @tid: the session's TID
6752 * @ssn: starting sequence number of the bitmap, all frames before this are
6753 * assumed to be out of the window after the call
6754 * @filtered: bitmap of filtered frames, BIT(0) is the @ssn entry etc.
6755 * @received_mpdus: number of received mpdus in firmware
6756 *
6757 * This function moves the BA window and releases all frames before @ssn, and
6758 * marks frames marked in the bitmap as having been filtered. Afterwards, it
6759 * checks if any frames in the window starting from @ssn can now be released
6760 * (in case they were only waiting for frames that were filtered.)
6761 * (Only work correctly if @max_rx_aggregation_subframes <= 64 frames)
6762 */
6763void ieee80211_mark_rx_ba_filtered_frames(struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta, u8 tid,
6764 u16 ssn, u64 filtered,
6765 u16 received_mpdus);
6766
6767/**
6768 * ieee80211_send_bar - send a BlockAckReq frame
6769 *
6770 * can be used to flush pending frames from the peer's aggregation reorder
6771 * buffer.
6772 *
6773 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
6774 * @ra: the peer's destination address
6775 * @tid: the TID of the aggregation session
6776 * @ssn: the new starting sequence number for the receiver
6777 */
6778void ieee80211_send_bar(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u8 *ra, u16 tid, u16 ssn);
6779
6780/**
6781 * ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl - helper to queue an RX BA work
6782 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6783 * @addr: station mac address
6784 * @tid: the rx tid
6785 */
6786void ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *addr,
6787 unsigned int tid);
6788
6789/**
6790 * ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl - start a Rx BA session
6791 *
6792 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6793 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6794 * reordering.
6795 *
6796 * Create structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6797 * when they complete AddBa negotiation.
6798 *
6799 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6800 * @addr: station mac address
6801 * @tid: the rx tid
6802 */
6803static inline void ieee80211_start_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6804 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6805{
6806 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6807 return;
6808 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid);
6809}
6810
6811/**
6812 * ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl - stop a Rx BA session
6813 *
6814 * Some device drivers may offload part of the Rx aggregation flow including
6815 * AddBa/DelBa negotiation but may otherwise be incapable of full Rx
6816 * reordering.
6817 *
6818 * Destroy structures responsible for reordering so device drivers may call here
6819 * when they complete DelBa negotiation.
6820 *
6821 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6822 * @addr: station mac address
6823 * @tid: the rx tid
6824 */
6825static inline void ieee80211_stop_rx_ba_session_offl(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6826 const u8 *addr, u16 tid)
6827{
6828 if (WARN_ON(tid >= IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS))
6829 return;
6830 ieee80211_manage_rx_ba_offl(vif, addr, tid + IEEE80211_NUM_TIDS);
6831}
6832
6833/**
6834 * ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired - stop a Rx BA session due to timeout
6835 *
6836 * Some device drivers do not offload AddBa/DelBa negotiation, but handle rx
6837 * buffer reording internally, and therefore also handle the session timer.
6838 *
6839 * Trigger the timeout flow, which sends a DelBa.
6840 *
6841 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback
6842 * @addr: station mac address
6843 * @tid: the rx tid
6844 */
6845void ieee80211_rx_ba_timer_expired(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
6846 const u8 *addr, unsigned int tid);
6847
6848/* Rate control API */
6849
6850/**
6851 * struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control - rate control information for/from RC algo
6852 *
6853 * @hw: The hardware the algorithm is invoked for.
6854 * @sband: The band this frame is being transmitted on.
6855 * @bss_conf: the current BSS configuration
6856 * @skb: the skb that will be transmitted, the control information in it needs
6857 * to be filled in
6858 * @reported_rate: The rate control algorithm can fill this in to indicate
6859 * which rate should be reported to userspace as the current rate and
6860 * used for rate calculations in the mesh network.
6861 * @rts: whether RTS will be used for this frame because it is longer than the
6862 * RTS threshold
6863 * @short_preamble: whether mac80211 will request short-preamble transmission
6864 * if the selected rate supports it
6865 * @rate_idx_mask: user-requested (legacy) rate mask
6866 * @rate_idx_mcs_mask: user-requested MCS rate mask (NULL if not in use)
6867 * @bss: whether this frame is sent out in AP or IBSS mode
6868 */
6869struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control {
6870 struct ieee80211_hw *hw;
6871 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband;
6872 struct ieee80211_bss_conf *bss_conf;
6873 struct sk_buff *skb;
6874 struct ieee80211_tx_rate reported_rate;
6875 bool rts, short_preamble;
6876 u32 rate_idx_mask;
6877 u8 *rate_idx_mcs_mask;
6878 bool bss;
6879};
6880
6881/**
6882 * enum rate_control_capabilities - rate control capabilities
6883 */
6884enum rate_control_capabilities {
6885 /**
6886 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW:
6887 * Support for extended NSS BW support (dot11VHTExtendedNSSCapable)
6888 * Note that this is only looked at if the minimum number of chains
6889 * that the AP uses is < the number of TX chains the hardware has,
6890 * otherwise the NSS difference doesn't bother us.
6891 */
6892 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_VHT_EXT_NSS_BW = BIT(0),
6893 /**
6894 * @RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER:
6895 * mac80211 should start A-MPDU sessions on tx
6896 */
6897 RATE_CTRL_CAPA_AMPDU_TRIGGER = BIT(1),
6898};
6899
6900struct rate_control_ops {
6901 unsigned long capa;
6902 const char *name;
6903 void *(*alloc)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw);
6904 void (*add_debugfs)(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, void *priv,
6905 struct dentry *debugfsdir);
6906 void (*free)(void *priv);
6907
6908 void *(*alloc_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, gfp_t gfp);
6909 void (*rate_init)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6910 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6911 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta);
6912 void (*rate_update)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6913 struct cfg80211_chan_def *chandef,
6914 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6915 u32 changed);
6916 void (*free_sta)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6917 void *priv_sta);
6918
6919 void (*tx_status_ext)(void *priv,
6920 struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6921 void *priv_sta, struct ieee80211_tx_status *st);
6922 void (*tx_status)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6923 struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6924 struct sk_buff *skb);
6925 void (*get_rate)(void *priv, struct ieee80211_sta *sta, void *priv_sta,
6926 struct ieee80211_tx_rate_control *txrc);
6927
6928 void (*add_sta_debugfs)(void *priv, void *priv_sta,
6929 struct dentry *dir);
6930
6931 u32 (*get_expected_throughput)(void *priv_sta);
6932};
6933
6934static inline int rate_supported(struct ieee80211_sta *sta,
6935 enum nl80211_band band,
6936 int index)
6937{
6938 return (sta == NULL || sta->deflink.supp_rates[band] & BIT(index));
6939}
6940
6941static inline s8
6942rate_lowest_index(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6943 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6944{
6945 int i;
6946
6947 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6948 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6949 return i;
6950
6951 /* warn when we cannot find a rate. */
6952 WARN_ON_ONCE(1);
6953
6954 /* and return 0 (the lowest index) */
6955 return 0;
6956}
6957
6958static inline
6959bool rate_usable_index_exists(struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
6960 struct ieee80211_sta *sta)
6961{
6962 unsigned int i;
6963
6964 for (i = 0; i < sband->n_bitrates; i++)
6965 if (rate_supported(sta, sband->band, i))
6966 return true;
6967 return false;
6968}
6969
6970/**
6971 * rate_control_set_rates - pass the sta rate selection to mac80211/driver
6972 *
6973 * When not doing a rate control probe to test rates, rate control should pass
6974 * its rate selection to mac80211. If the driver supports receiving a station
6975 * rate table, it will use it to ensure that frames are always sent based on
6976 * the most recent rate control module decision.
6977 *
6978 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
6979 * @pubsta: &struct ieee80211_sta pointer to the target destination.
6980 * @rates: new tx rate set to be used for this station.
6981 */
6982int rate_control_set_rates(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
6983 struct ieee80211_sta *pubsta,
6984 struct ieee80211_sta_rates *rates);
6985
6986int ieee80211_rate_control_register(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6987void ieee80211_rate_control_unregister(const struct rate_control_ops *ops);
6988
6989static inline bool
6990conf_is_ht20(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6991{
6992 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20;
6993}
6994
6995static inline bool
6996conf_is_ht40_minus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
6997{
6998 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
6999 conf->chandef.center_freq1 < conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
7000}
7001
7002static inline bool
7003conf_is_ht40_plus(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
7004{
7005 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40 &&
7006 conf->chandef.center_freq1 > conf->chandef.chan->center_freq;
7007}
7008
7009static inline bool
7010conf_is_ht40(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
7011{
7012 return conf->chandef.width == NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_40;
7013}
7014
7015static inline bool
7016conf_is_ht(struct ieee80211_conf *conf)
7017{
7018 return (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_5) &&
7019 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_10) &&
7020 (conf->chandef.width != NL80211_CHAN_WIDTH_20_NOHT);
7021}
7022
7023static inline enum nl80211_iftype
7024ieee80211_iftype_p2p(enum nl80211_iftype type, bool p2p)
7025{
7026 if (p2p) {
7027 switch (type) {
7028 case NL80211_IFTYPE_STATION:
7029 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_CLIENT;
7030 case NL80211_IFTYPE_AP:
7031 return NL80211_IFTYPE_P2P_GO;
7032 default:
7033 break;
7034 }
7035 }
7036 return type;
7037}
7038
7039static inline enum nl80211_iftype
7040ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
7041{
7042 return ieee80211_iftype_p2p(vif->type, vif->p2p);
7043}
7044
7045/**
7046 * ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif - return HE capabilities for sband/vif
7047 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on
7048 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from
7049 *
7050 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap, or %NULL is none found
7051 */
7052static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_he_cap *
7053ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
7054 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
7055{
7056 return ieee80211_get_he_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif));
7057}
7058
7059/**
7060 * ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif - return HE 6 GHz capabilities
7061 * @sband: the sband to search for the STA on
7062 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from
7063 *
7064 * Return: the 6GHz capabilities
7065 */
7066static inline __le16
7067ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
7068 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
7069{
7070 return ieee80211_get_he_6ghz_capa(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif));
7071}
7072
7073/**
7074 * ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif - return ETH capabilities for sband/vif
7075 * @sband: the sband to search for the iftype on
7076 * @vif: the vif to get the iftype from
7077 *
7078 * Return: pointer to the struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap, or %NULL is none found
7079 */
7080static inline const struct ieee80211_sta_eht_cap *
7081ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap_vif(const struct ieee80211_supported_band *sband,
7082 struct ieee80211_vif *vif)
7083{
7084 return ieee80211_get_eht_iftype_cap(sband, ieee80211_vif_type_p2p(vif));
7085}
7086
7087/**
7088 * ieee80211_update_mu_groups - set the VHT MU-MIMO groud data
7089 *
7090 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
7091 * @link_id: the link ID for MLO, otherwise 0
7092 * @membership: 64 bits array - a bit is set if station is member of the group
7093 * @position: 2 bits per group id indicating the position in the group
7094 *
7095 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid and the position and
7096 * membership data is of the correct size and are in the same byte order as the
7097 * matching GroupId management frame.
7098 * Calls to this function need to be serialized with RX path.
7099 */
7100void ieee80211_update_mu_groups(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, unsigned int link_id,
7101 const u8 *membership, const u8 *position);
7102
7103void ieee80211_enable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7104 int rssi_min_thold,
7105 int rssi_max_thold);
7106
7107void ieee80211_disable_rssi_reports(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7108
7109/**
7110 * ieee80211_ave_rssi - report the average RSSI for the specified interface
7111 *
7112 * @vif: the specified virtual interface
7113 *
7114 * Note: This function assumes that the given vif is valid.
7115 *
7116 * Return: The average RSSI value for the requested interface, or 0 if not
7117 * applicable.
7118 */
7119int ieee80211_ave_rssi(struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7120
7121/**
7122 * ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup - report WoWLAN wakeup
7123 * @vif: virtual interface
7124 * @wakeup: wakeup reason(s)
7125 * @gfp: allocation flags
7126 *
7127 * See cfg80211_report_wowlan_wakeup().
7128 */
7129void ieee80211_report_wowlan_wakeup(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7130 struct cfg80211_wowlan_wakeup *wakeup,
7131 gfp_t gfp);
7132
7133/**
7134 * ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb - prepare an 802.11 skb for transmission
7135 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7136 * @vif: virtual interface
7137 * @skb: frame to be sent from within the driver
7138 * @band: the band to transmit on
7139 * @sta: optional pointer to get the station to send the frame to
7140 *
7141 * Note: must be called under RCU lock
7142 */
7143bool ieee80211_tx_prepare_skb(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7144 struct ieee80211_vif *vif, struct sk_buff *skb,
7145 int band, struct ieee80211_sta **sta);
7146
7147/**
7148 * ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap - Sanity-check and parse the radiotap header
7149 * of injected frames.
7150 *
7151 * To accurately parse and take into account rate and retransmission fields,
7152 * you must initialize the chandef field in the ieee80211_tx_info structure
7153 * of the skb before calling this function.
7154 *
7155 * @skb: packet injected by userspace
7156 * @dev: the &struct device of this 802.11 device
7157 */
7158bool ieee80211_parse_tx_radiotap(struct sk_buff *skb,
7159 struct net_device *dev);
7160
7161/**
7162 * struct ieee80211_noa_data - holds temporary data for tracking P2P NoA state
7163 *
7164 * @next_tsf: TSF timestamp of the next absent state change
7165 * @has_next_tsf: next absent state change event pending
7166 *
7167 * @absent: descriptor bitmask, set if GO is currently absent
7168 *
7169 * private:
7170 *
7171 * @count: count fields from the NoA descriptors
7172 * @desc: adjusted data from the NoA
7173 */
7174struct ieee80211_noa_data {
7175 u32 next_tsf;
7176 bool has_next_tsf;
7177
7178 u8 absent;
7179
7180 u8 count[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
7181 struct {
7182 u32 start;
7183 u32 duration;
7184 u32 interval;
7185 } desc[IEEE80211_P2P_NOA_DESC_MAX];
7186};
7187
7188/**
7189 * ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa - initialize NoA tracking data from P2P IE
7190 *
7191 * @attr: P2P NoA IE
7192 * @data: NoA tracking data
7193 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
7194 *
7195 * Return: number of successfully parsed descriptors
7196 */
7197int ieee80211_parse_p2p_noa(const struct ieee80211_p2p_noa_attr *attr,
7198 struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
7199
7200/**
7201 * ieee80211_update_p2p_noa - get next pending P2P GO absent state change
7202 *
7203 * @data: NoA tracking data
7204 * @tsf: current TSF timestamp
7205 */
7206void ieee80211_update_p2p_noa(struct ieee80211_noa_data *data, u32 tsf);
7207
7208/**
7209 * ieee80211_tdls_oper_request - request userspace to perform a TDLS operation
7210 * @vif: virtual interface
7211 * @peer: the peer's destination address
7212 * @oper: the requested TDLS operation
7213 * @reason_code: reason code for the operation, valid for TDLS teardown
7214 * @gfp: allocation flags
7215 *
7216 * See cfg80211_tdls_oper_request().
7217 */
7218void ieee80211_tdls_oper_request(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, const u8 *peer,
7219 enum nl80211_tdls_operation oper,
7220 u16 reason_code, gfp_t gfp);
7221
7222/**
7223 * ieee80211_reserve_tid - request to reserve a specific TID
7224 *
7225 * There is sometimes a need (such as in TDLS) for blocking the driver from
7226 * using a specific TID so that the FW can use it for certain operations such
7227 * as sending PTI requests. To make sure that the driver doesn't use that TID,
7228 * this function must be called as it flushes out packets on this TID and marks
7229 * it as blocked, so that any transmit for the station on this TID will be
7230 * redirected to the alternative TID in the same AC.
7231 *
7232 * Note that this function blocks and may call back into the driver, so it
7233 * should be called without driver locks held. Also note this function should
7234 * only be called from the driver's @sta_state callback.
7235 *
7236 * @sta: the station to reserve the TID for
7237 * @tid: the TID to reserve
7238 *
7239 * Returns: 0 on success, else on failure
7240 */
7241int ieee80211_reserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
7242
7243/**
7244 * ieee80211_unreserve_tid - request to unreserve a specific TID
7245 *
7246 * Once there is no longer any need for reserving a certain TID, this function
7247 * should be called, and no longer will packets have their TID modified for
7248 * preventing use of this TID in the driver.
7249 *
7250 * Note that this function blocks and acquires a lock, so it should be called
7251 * without driver locks held. Also note this function should only be called
7252 * from the driver's @sta_state callback.
7253 *
7254 * @sta: the station
7255 * @tid: the TID to unreserve
7256 */
7257void ieee80211_unreserve_tid(struct ieee80211_sta *sta, u8 tid);
7258
7259/**
7260 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
7261 *
7262 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7263 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
7264 * ieee80211_next_txq()
7265 *
7266 * Returns the skb if successful, %NULL if no frame was available.
7267 *
7268 * Note that this must be called in an rcu_read_lock() critical section,
7269 * which can only be released after the SKB was handled. Some pointers in
7270 * skb->cb, e.g. the key pointer, are protected by RCU and thus the
7271 * critical section must persist not just for the duration of this call
7272 * but for the duration of the frame handling.
7273 * However, also note that while in the wake_tx_queue() method,
7274 * rcu_read_lock() is already held.
7275 *
7276 * softirqs must also be disabled when this function is called.
7277 * In process context, use ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni() instead.
7278 */
7279struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7280 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7281
7282/**
7283 * ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni - dequeue a packet from a software tx queue
7284 * (in process context)
7285 *
7286 * Like ieee80211_tx_dequeue() but can be called in process context
7287 * (internally disables bottom halves).
7288 *
7289 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7290 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface, or from
7291 * ieee80211_next_txq()
7292 */
7293static inline struct sk_buff *ieee80211_tx_dequeue_ni(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7294 struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
7295{
7296 struct sk_buff *skb;
7297
7298 local_bh_disable();
7299 skb = ieee80211_tx_dequeue(hw, txq);
7300 local_bh_enable();
7301
7302 return skb;
7303}
7304
7305/**
7306 * ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue - mac80211 handler for wake_tx_queue callback
7307 *
7308 * @hw: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback().
7309 * @txq: pointer as obtained from wake_tx_queue() callback().
7310 *
7311 * Drivers can use this function for the mandatory mac80211 wake_tx_queue
7312 * callback in struct ieee80211_ops. They should not call this function.
7313 */
7314void ieee80211_handle_wake_tx_queue(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7315 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7316
7317/**
7318 * ieee80211_next_txq - get next tx queue to pull packets from
7319 *
7320 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7321 * @ac: AC number to return packets from.
7322 *
7323 * Returns the next txq if successful, %NULL if no queue is eligible. If a txq
7324 * is returned, it should be returned with ieee80211_return_txq() after the
7325 * driver has finished scheduling it.
7326 */
7327struct ieee80211_txq *ieee80211_next_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
7328
7329/**
7330 * ieee80211_txq_schedule_start - start new scheduling round for TXQs
7331 *
7332 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7333 * @ac: AC number to acquire locks for
7334 *
7335 * Should be called before ieee80211_next_txq() or ieee80211_return_txq().
7336 * The driver must not call multiple TXQ scheduling rounds concurrently.
7337 */
7338void ieee80211_txq_schedule_start(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac);
7339
7340/* (deprecated) */
7341static inline void ieee80211_txq_schedule_end(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, u8 ac)
7342{
7343}
7344
7345void __ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7346 struct ieee80211_txq *txq, bool force);
7347
7348/**
7349 * ieee80211_schedule_txq - schedule a TXQ for transmission
7350 *
7351 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7352 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7353 *
7354 * Schedules a TXQ for transmission if it is not already scheduled,
7355 * even if mac80211 does not have any packets buffered.
7356 *
7357 * The driver may call this function if it has buffered packets for
7358 * this TXQ internally.
7359 */
7360static inline void
7361ieee80211_schedule_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq)
7362{
7363 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, true);
7364}
7365
7366/**
7367 * ieee80211_return_txq - return a TXQ previously acquired by ieee80211_next_txq()
7368 *
7369 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7370 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7371 * @force: schedule txq even if mac80211 does not have any buffered packets.
7372 *
7373 * The driver may set force=true if it has buffered packets for this TXQ
7374 * internally.
7375 */
7376static inline void
7377ieee80211_return_txq(struct ieee80211_hw *hw, struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7378 bool force)
7379{
7380 __ieee80211_schedule_txq(hw, txq, force);
7381}
7382
7383/**
7384 * ieee80211_txq_may_transmit - check whether TXQ is allowed to transmit
7385 *
7386 * This function is used to check whether given txq is allowed to transmit by
7387 * the airtime scheduler, and can be used by drivers to access the airtime
7388 * fairness accounting without using the scheduling order enforced by
7389 * next_txq().
7390 *
7391 * Returns %true if the airtime scheduler thinks the TXQ should be allowed to
7392 * transmit, and %false if it should be throttled. This function can also have
7393 * the side effect of rotating the TXQ in the scheduler rotation, which will
7394 * eventually bring the deficit to positive and allow the station to transmit
7395 * again.
7396 *
7397 * The API ieee80211_txq_may_transmit() also ensures that TXQ list will be
7398 * aligned against driver's own round-robin scheduler list. i.e it rotates
7399 * the TXQ list till it makes the requested node becomes the first entry
7400 * in TXQ list. Thus both the TXQ list and driver's list are in sync. If this
7401 * function returns %true, the driver is expected to schedule packets
7402 * for transmission, and then return the TXQ through ieee80211_return_txq().
7403 *
7404 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7405 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7406 */
7407bool ieee80211_txq_may_transmit(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7408 struct ieee80211_txq *txq);
7409
7410/**
7411 * ieee80211_txq_get_depth - get pending frame/byte count of given txq
7412 *
7413 * The values are not guaranteed to be coherent with regard to each other, i.e.
7414 * txq state can change half-way of this function and the caller may end up
7415 * with "new" frame_cnt and "old" byte_cnt or vice-versa.
7416 *
7417 * @txq: pointer obtained from station or virtual interface
7418 * @frame_cnt: pointer to store frame count
7419 * @byte_cnt: pointer to store byte count
7420 */
7421void ieee80211_txq_get_depth(struct ieee80211_txq *txq,
7422 unsigned long *frame_cnt,
7423 unsigned long *byte_cnt);
7424
7425/**
7426 * ieee80211_nan_func_terminated - notify about NAN function termination.
7427 *
7428 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function termination.
7429 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7430 *
7431 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7432 * @inst_id: the local instance id
7433 * @reason: termination reason (one of the NL80211_NAN_FUNC_TERM_REASON_*)
7434 * @gfp: allocation flags
7435 */
7436void ieee80211_nan_func_terminated(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7437 u8 inst_id,
7438 enum nl80211_nan_func_term_reason reason,
7439 gfp_t gfp);
7440
7441/**
7442 * ieee80211_nan_func_match - notify about NAN function match event.
7443 *
7444 * This function is used to notify mac80211 about NAN function match. The
7445 * cookie inside the match struct will be assigned by mac80211.
7446 * Note that this function can't be called from hard irq.
7447 *
7448 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7449 * @match: match event information
7450 * @gfp: allocation flags
7451 */
7452void ieee80211_nan_func_match(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7453 struct cfg80211_nan_match_params *match,
7454 gfp_t gfp);
7455
7456/**
7457 * ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for RX.
7458 *
7459 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7460 * rate information in the RX status struct and the frame length.
7461 *
7462 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7463 * @status: &struct ieee80211_rx_status containing the transmission rate
7464 * information.
7465 * @len: frame length in bytes
7466 */
7467u32 ieee80211_calc_rx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7468 struct ieee80211_rx_status *status,
7469 int len);
7470
7471/**
7472 * ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime - calculate estimated transmission airtime for TX.
7473 *
7474 * This function calculates the estimated airtime usage of a frame based on the
7475 * rate information in the TX info struct and the frame length.
7476 *
7477 * @hw: pointer as obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw()
7478 * @info: &struct ieee80211_tx_info of the frame.
7479 * @len: frame length in bytes
7480 */
7481u32 ieee80211_calc_tx_airtime(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7482 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info,
7483 int len);
7484/**
7485 * ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap - enable hardware encapsulation offloading.
7486 *
7487 * This function is used to notify mac80211 that a vif can be passed raw 802.3
7488 * frames. The driver needs to then handle the 802.11 encapsulation inside the
7489 * hardware or firmware.
7490 *
7491 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7492 * @enable: indicate if the feature should be turned on or off
7493 */
7494bool ieee80211_set_hw_80211_encap(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, bool enable);
7495
7496/**
7497 * ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl - Get FILS discovery template.
7498 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7499 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7500 *
7501 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7502 *
7503 * Return: FILS discovery template. %NULL on error.
7504 */
7505struct sk_buff *ieee80211_get_fils_discovery_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7506 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7507
7508/**
7509 * ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl - Get unsolicited broadcast
7510 * probe response template.
7511 * @hw: pointer obtained from ieee80211_alloc_hw().
7512 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7513 *
7514 * The driver is responsible for freeing the returned skb.
7515 *
7516 * Return: Unsolicited broadcast probe response template. %NULL on error.
7517 */
7518struct sk_buff *
7519ieee80211_get_unsol_bcast_probe_resp_tmpl(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7520 struct ieee80211_vif *vif);
7521
7522/**
7523 * ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify - notify userland about a BSS color
7524 * collision.
7525 *
7526 * @vif: &struct ieee80211_vif pointer from the add_interface callback.
7527 * @color_bitmap: a 64 bit bitmap representing the colors that the local BSS is
7528 * aware of.
7529 */
7530void
7531ieee80211_obss_color_collision_notify(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7532 u64 color_bitmap);
7533
7534/**
7535 * ieee80211_is_tx_data - check if frame is a data frame
7536 *
7537 * The function is used to check if a frame is a data frame. Frames with
7538 * hardware encapsulation enabled are data frames.
7539 *
7540 * @skb: the frame to be transmitted.
7541 */
7542static inline bool ieee80211_is_tx_data(struct sk_buff *skb)
7543{
7544 struct ieee80211_tx_info *info = IEEE80211_SKB_CB(skb);
7545 struct ieee80211_hdr *hdr = (void *) skb->data;
7546
7547 return info->flags & IEEE80211_TX_CTL_HW_80211_ENCAP ||
7548 ieee80211_is_data(hdr->frame_control);
7549}
7550
7551/**
7552 * ieee80211_set_active_links - set active links in client mode
7553 * @vif: interface to set active links on
7554 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7555 *
7556 * Context: Must be called with wiphy mutex held; may sleep; calls
7557 * back into the driver.
7558 *
7559 * This changes the active links on an interface. The interface
7560 * must be in client mode (in AP mode, all links are always active),
7561 * and @active_links must be a subset of the vif's valid_links.
7562 *
7563 * If a link is switched off and another is switched on at the same
7564 * time (e.g. active_links going from 0x1 to 0x10) then you will get
7565 * a sequence of calls like
7566 *
7567 * - change_vif_links(0x11)
7568 * - unassign_vif_chanctx(link_id=0)
7569 * - change_sta_links(0x11) for each affected STA (the AP)
7570 * (TDLS connections on now inactive links should be torn down)
7571 * - remove group keys on the old link (link_id 0)
7572 * - add new group keys (GTK/IGTK/BIGTK) on the new link (link_id 4)
7573 * - change_sta_links(0x10) for each affected STA (the AP)
7574 * - assign_vif_chanctx(link_id=4)
7575 * - change_vif_links(0x10)
7576 */
7577int ieee80211_set_active_links(struct ieee80211_vif *vif, u16 active_links);
7578
7579/**
7580 * ieee80211_set_active_links_async - asynchronously set active links
7581 * @vif: interface to set active links on
7582 * @active_links: the new active links bitmap
7583 *
7584 * See ieee80211_set_active_links() for more information, the only
7585 * difference here is that the link change is triggered async and
7586 * can be called in any context, but the link switch will only be
7587 * completed after it returns.
7588 */
7589void ieee80211_set_active_links_async(struct ieee80211_vif *vif,
7590 u16 active_links);
7591
7592/* for older drivers - let's not document these ... */
7593int ieee80211_emulate_add_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7594 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
7595void ieee80211_emulate_remove_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7596 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx);
7597void ieee80211_emulate_change_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7598 struct ieee80211_chanctx_conf *ctx,
7599 u32 changed);
7600int ieee80211_emulate_switch_vif_chanctx(struct ieee80211_hw *hw,
7601 struct ieee80211_vif_chanctx_switch *vifs,
7602 int n_vifs,
7603 enum ieee80211_chanctx_switch_mode mode);
7604
7605#endif /* MAC80211_H */